Home

TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite® 9.1.1

1. Organize Favorites Finish Cancel Help 2 Double click a data source or select an item and click Next gt 3 3 2 2 Importing from a File gt To import data Select File gt Import gt Import Data and gt To import an SFS file 1 In the Select Data Source dialog select File Click Next gt In the Open dialog select the file containing the data Click Open Unless any conditioning is needed click Finish D oy In the Select Data Source dialog select File In the Open dialog select the file containing the data Click Open In the Specify Delimiter dialog select a column delimiter Click Next gt In the Specify Data Types dialog click on a data type in the table head to change the type Click Finish 5 Unless any conditioning is needed click Finish gt To import a text file 1 2 3 4 gt To import an Excel file 1 Inthe Select Data Source dialog select File 2 Inthe Open dialog select the file containing the data Click Open 3 Inthe MS JET OLE DB dialog click OK 4 In the Database dialog specify which Excel worksheets and which columns to include An Excel file is treated as a database 5 Click OK 20 Loading Data gt To import an SDFile file 1 2 3 4 In the Select Data Source dialog select SDFile Click Next gt In the Open dialog select the file containing the data Click Open Unless any conditioning is needed cl
2. When high negative values are used for sizing By average or By sum pies will appear large A red filled circle within the pie will indicate that the value used for sizing is negative If the sum or average is zero this will yield invisible pies 4 8 12 Lines Tab 4 8 12 1 Lines Tab Visualizations Edit gt Properties gt Lines tab Properties Line Chart x Annotations Lines Column Customer age Cascade All Maximize All y Data and Background Columns Details Columns Markers Line Chart Columns Appearance Color i Line type Straightline gt Line width 1 x Marker Filed Circle Layout Relative Numeric Bottom Vertical Position Top Min Vertical Scale Max Option Appearance Layout Description Here you set the properties for each column that is each line Select the column you want to edit and view the properties in the list boxes on the right Adjusting the controls will change the appearance of the selected column When Scale Mode is set to Individual see Markers property page it is possible to control the vertical position and amplitude of the plotted curves This makes it easy to compare the shapes of the curves Position and scale can be set either using sliders or by entering numerical values You can at any time switch between the two modes by pressing either of the two radio buttons labeled Relative or Numeric 4 8
3. Bars Use marker color Width 1 z C Use custom color Help Cancel Option Column containing main values Column containing upper errors Column containing lower errors Use marker color Use custom color Width Description Specifies which column contains the main or average values Specifies which column contains the upper error values Specifies which column contains the lower error values Select this option to use the marker color for the error bars Select this option to use a custom color for the error bars The width in pixels of the error bars 4 8 2 5 4 Orthogonal Straight Line Fit 81 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 82 Orthogonal straight line fit is calculated by choosing the line that minimizes the least square sum of the distance d perpendicular to the line of all the selected markers see picture below It should be used when the distance between the markers along both the X axis and the Y axis varies User Interface Orthogonal Straight Line Fit x m Base calculation on Selected records C Allrecords m Trellis plot options Create separate statistics for each trellis panel Create statistics based on entire visualization Line Color a Width 1 7 OK Cancel Option Base calculation on Trellis plot options Color Width Description Specifies whether the li
4. Specifies whether the labels should be oriented horizontally or vertically on the X axis and on the Y axis For spacing you can select to show axis ticks in four ways Even Distribution will attempt to distribute ticks evenly between the highest and lowest value At Values will not place a tick where there is no value At All Values will place ticks at all values within density constraint At Even Values will attempt to place ticks at evenly spaced whole numbers Specifies the maximum number of allowed ticks However the actual number of displayed ticks might be less than this number depending on which option you have selected under Tick spacing above Resets all settings in this dialog to its default value 4 8 2 3 4 8 2 3 1 4 8 2 3 2 Visualizations Background Images Image Files and Background Maps Background maps images and figures may be displayed along with visualization markers in a Spotfire DecisionSite visualization Such images can ease the interpretation of the data by providing a context in which it can be interpreted For example some aspects of the environmental database described earlier can be examined more easily if data is seen together with a map of Sweden Another example where an image provides context to the data is the metabolic pathway for yeast genes used in the microarray sample file included in the Spotfire DecisionSite distribution Background images can be added to 2D scatt
5. 115 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 116 The shape of markers can be fixed or made to reflect the value of a particular column Click Fixed or By to alternate between these modes Only columns with less than 23 distinct values can be used for controlling shapes Click Customize to choose appropriate shapes for each value There are twelve shapes available for 3D markers Solid Cube Wire Cube Arrow Pyramid Minus Solid Sphere Wire Sphere Diamond Bar Solid Tetrahedron Wire Tetrahedron Cross Point These shapes consist of polygonal surfaces or lines They all show shading and other 3D characteristics Some shapes are particularly useful in conjunction with rotation It is possible to customize the shape and size of the markers in a scatter plot gt To customize markers 1 Open a scatter plot 2 Select Edit gt Properties 3 Select the Markers tab 4 Select a column to determine the shape of the markers Shape C Fixed Customize By Sex None Liverbig 5 Click on Customize Customize Shapes x Values Shapes Size Specify size Width fi Height fi Visualizations Select a value no yes or Empty in the example above 7 Select a shape for that value 8 Select the Specify size check box When this option is selected the custom size overrides the usual size slider in the properties Marker tab 9 Enter Width and Height These valu
6. Color range Defaut 7 Apply New Edit Delete IV Show deselected The Heat Map tab of the Properties dialog is used to modify the color range of the heat map and to display or hide row labels and deselected records The default color range is set to green for minimum values black for intermediate values and red for maximum values 151 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 17 2 152 Apply color range to column To apply a specific color range to one or more columns select the appropriate columns from the list then choose a range from the Color range drop down list and finally click the Apply button Create new color scheme To change the color range of one or more columns you need to create a new range Click on the New button to open the Create Color Scheme dialog Edit existing color scheme You can also edit the coloring of an already existing color range Select a certain color range from the Color range drop down list and click on the Edit button to open the Edit Color Scheme dialog Changes made to this color range will have effect on the columns already linked to the range Delete color range To delete a color range select the color range from the Color range drop down list and click on the Delete button Any columns linked to the deleted range will automatically be reset to the Default color range Show hide deselected records To hide records that have been desel
7. Guides gt Tutorials 2 Explore a film database Find interesting stocks Open Guide from Library l for Guides published to DecisionSite Library gt To open Guides from Library 1 Click Open Guide from Library in the Guides pane or select Guides gt Run from Library Response The Open Guide from Library Dialog is shown 2 Inthe Open Guide from Library Dialog locate the Guide you want to open and click Open Response The Guide is opened in the Guides pane 9 4 2 Open Guide from Library Dialog This dialog lets you select and open a Guide that is located in the Library To find a Guide either look through a Library Section s content or search for the Guide Note Only Guides created with Analysis Builder are available to be opened and edited in Analysis Builder 286 Guides Open from Library xj Library Search Home gt DecisionSite for Functional Genomics Type Title Description e E Advanced microarray Guide Example This Guide uses a number El Microarray Guide Example This Guide shows how visua Help Open Cancel Library tab options Library Open Search tab options Search tab Search for Look in Description All Guides folders and Library Sections are listed on this tab Note Only Library Sections that you have access to are listed Select the Guide you want and click Open to open it in the Guides pane or in Analysis Builder if you have reached t
8. Part Description Lower Enter the lower limit for the values of the column Upper Enter the upper limit for the values of the column Get Range Use this button to set the column filter by fetching values from the current visualization in DecisionSite More 49 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 50 List Box Set Filter for Column xj 191 Step 1 of 3 Select Day gl I Include empty values for this step Help Part List box Include empty values for this step lt Back Next gt Cancel Description Select the individual values for the column by clicking the entries in the list To select consecutive values click the first item press and hold down SHIFT and then click the last item To select multiple entries that are not consecutive press and hold down CTRL and then click each item To select all the values in the list press CTRL A Select this check box to also include records that contain no data for this column consequently not available in the list Loading Data Check Boxes O Set Filter for Column im m m m m Ke co m p n p a o a E ce Part Check boxes Include empty values for this step Description Select individual values for the column from the list To select all the values in the list press CTRL A Select this check box to also include records that contain no data for this column consequently not available in the l
9. Move Up Move Down Records selection Jan z OK Cancel Comment What columns you see in the Available columns list depends on which data set you have opened and which data types you specified in step 18 You can also right click on the Name header and select the Show search field option if you want to further limit the number of shown columns in this list In the dialog type the desired integer and select the desired columns Click OK Response The computation is performed and the resulting columns are added to the data set Tools 32 Save the configuration or send it to Analysis Builder File gt Send to Analysis Builder to incorporate the action Start Data computation R in a Guide In the latter case you should also remember to save the Guide 8 2 2 4 General Concepts The handling of forbidden characters in column names differs for different computation servers To avoid possible problems with forbidden characters in column names Computation Services temporarily translates the column names that are sent to a server in the following manner e Allowed characters are a z A Z 0 9 Any other characters will be temporarily removed from the column names when the configuration is executed on the server e The column name cannot start with a number If the available column name starts with a number the number will be removed e The column name may be a maximum of 32 characters long If the available colu
10. x m F 45 4 ZE Option Description Fixed Shows the color of the markers in the data set Marked Shows the color of the records that have been marked Empty Shows the color of the empty records Empty refers to records that have at least one empty field These records are not shown at all in visualizations where an axis corresponds to the missing field Undefined Shows the color of values that are not included in a range continuous Deselected Shows the color of the deselected values Deselected refers to records that do not fulfill the constraints of the query devices 119 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 7 7 2 120 Continuous Coloring Dialog Continuous Coloring x Ranges aj min x max x E Boston Seattle Delete Marked Empty Other a Deselected Templates w aa Help Import Export Advanced Option Ranges Add Delete Marked Empty Description Displays the values in the chosen column and the color for each value Note When the dialog is opened the color gradients are sorted such that the highest priority is at the bottom next highest just above that and so on If new gradients are added the order is changed but you can restore the order by right clicking and selecting Sort gradients Adds a new item to the list of Color ranges Using this you can assign specific colors to values and
11. 184 191 193 194 183 189 355 188 181 185 190 180 111 289 257 257 279 259 188 181 192 37 170 201 169 170 169 168 170 201 168 72 92 185 186 8 254 109 277 341 338 340 346 7 8 235 164 111 383 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual marked records visualizations zooming in visualizations Resizing windows Resources pane Resources Retrieving data using the Import Agent Rotating a data set depivot data pivot data transposing Rotation of markers Row height Table Columns tab Table tab Run time filter dialog example filtering data during retrieval S Sample data SAS Computation Services overview connection to a SAS server example configuration Saving a visualization as an image an Analysis SFS data in other formats visualization settings Scale exponential inverse labels line charts logarithmic profile charts Scatter plots 2D marker rotation 3D color creating jitter labels line connection scale shapes size zooming Script Computation Services overview field in Computation Services Searching regular expression the Internet using Web Links 384 55 56 73 108 169 170 164 172 355 18 243 239 248 112 162 161 257 279 259 343 316 345 173 97 166 143 148 112 113 58 117 166 118 115 112 164 257 263 185 253 the library using Full text search query device Security soft
12. Ctrl Shift left drag Adds profiles by using a lasso function to the set of marked records Mouse wheel Zooms in and out in the visualization Ctrl right click Zooms in from the visualization Ctrl Shift right click Zooms out from the visualization Right click in visualization Brings up the visualization context pop up menu Quick Reference 369 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 12 Glossary 370 The glossary only contains brief definitions of the terminology used in Spotfire DecisionSite Links to more information are available when applicable API The term API stands for Application Programmer s Interface and is a set of functions available to programmers These functions cover a wide range of tasks such as graphics multimedia fonts disk access memory management etc This functionality allows strong integration with legacy systems and novel applications Bar Charts A visualization displaying the data as bars The value from each record is added to the bar s total value Y axis height Binning The process of grouping values with similar properties together in a way that each Bin contains values that in some important respect are similar Not to be confused with clustering which means grouping similar records Bitmap A file format for graphics The format is used in Spotfire DecisionSite when copying the graphical presentation of a decision tree to the clipboard
13. e anomalies Finds the title and description e wafer Finds the description since wafer is lower case e wafer production Finds the phrase part in the description e wafer production CODE A Finds the description and keyword Note The search will only be performed on items that you have read access to 3 3 Import Data 3 3 1 Importing Data Spotfire DecisionSite can access data from a variety of sources 18 Loading Data e Spotfire Analysis File SFS e Text files TXT CSV SKV e Microsoft Excel Workbooks XLS e MDL SDFiles SDF e Databases OLE DB or ODBC e The Windows clipboard SFS files text files and SDFiles can be opened directly using the Open option on the File menu This is the quickest way to access unambiguously formatted data from a file Note You can also enter a URL in the File name field and access data from a web server Similarly properly formatted data on the clipboard can be pasted directly into Spotfire DecisionSite However if your data resides in a database or if it needs some kind of preprocessing before being visualized in Spotfire DecisionSite then use Import Data This dialog is designed to help you access your data whatever the source and whatever preprocessing you require gt To import data Select File gt Import gt Import Data 1 Select a data source such as a file or database 2 Select methods for data conditioning such as pivoting aggregation or normalizatio
14. C Fixed Continuous Categorical Mn f Max I Highlight V Active Static labels Reset None C Marked Visible max 200 labels By height m By weight kg Customize I Show deselected m Drawing order Shape By None X Fixed Customize Jitter C Per value __ By eye color None Max Labels Rotate Dynamic labels Customize By None m Line connection By None v Order None gt I Arrows indicating direction x Option Color Shape Labels 112 Description Markers can be colored to reflect the value of a particular attribute There are three modes for coloring Fixed Continuous and Categorical The shape of markers can be fixed or made to reflect the value of a particular column Click Fixed or Per value to alternate between these modes It is possible to tag each marker with a label showing the value of a particular column You can select to show both Dynamic labels Highlight and or Active and Static labels None Marked Visible at the same time Dynamic labels are always placed on top of any static labels The static labels include the following options None No labels are visible Marked Only records that are marked will have labels next to them Size Drawing order Jitter Rotate Line connection 4 8 7 2 Color Visualizations Visible max All visible records up to
15. Clicking markers Clipboard adding columns from importing data set from Clone visualization Closing Color expression Color range Coloring bands bar charts categorical continuos customizing fixed heat maps histograms line charts overlapping ranges pie charts profile charts scatter plots trellis headings Column adding from clipboard adding from file adding using advanced data import calculating new format name order for table separators width for table Columns adding from clipboard adding from file Index 152 24 254 166 193 174 174 110 189 188 11 164 13 187 213 169 169 168 115 169 204 21 172 316 127 114 151 141 132 113 113 113 113 151 132 146 114 141 150 113 106 204 203 205 219 95 193 161 162 30 161 162 204 203 377 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual adding using advanced data import annotating delimiters heat maps new by binning new by calculation new name tab Comments annotating columns annotations tab Computation Services example configuration Execution Log tab general concepts Input Parameters tab menus Output Parameters tab overview Result dialog Result Handling tab toolbar user interface overview workflow Condition in trellis plots Conditioning data conditioning upon import using Pivot Data using Transpose Data Connecting to data source using OLE DB to DecisionSite server logging in 205 97
16. Ctrl R Ctrl 1 Ctrl 2 Ctrl 4 Ctrl 5 Ctrl 6 Ctrl 7 Ctrl 8 Ctrl 9 Menu Toolbar Command or Mouse File gt Open File gt Import Data File gt Save File gt Print i Edit gt Copy Fe Edit gt Paste A Edit gt Reset to All ty Window gt New Scatter Plot t Window gt New 3D EY Scatter Plot Window gt New Bar Lh Chart Window gt New Pie B Chart Window gt New Line bx Chart Bl Window gt New jit Profile Chart e Window gt New Heat aij Map Window gt New Table a Window gt Auto Tile ia Window gt Cascade al Window gt Tile jan Button 365 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 11 5 11 5 1 366 other Vertical Place all visualizations under each Window gt Tile other Horizontal Open the Properties dialog Ctrl Enter Edit gt Properties OR Alt Enter Display legend in separate window Ctrl L View gt Legend Export the active visualization as an File gt Export gt a image BMP or JPG to disk Current Visualization Open browser and display values for File gt Export gt a the currently marked records Details Show the Guides pane Ctrl W View gt Spotfire s DecisionSite Go to Start page fal Mouse Shortcuts Mouse Shortcuts Scatter Plots and Line Charts Mouse over marker A thin ring highlights the marker and all markers containing the record in other visualizations Left click on marker Activ
17. European demographics Example European demographic dat e Laser experiments Example A laser experiment containi CE The periodic table A reference of the periodic Analysis title T he periodic table Help lt Back Next gt Cancel Library tab Description options New folder Creates a new folder where you can publish your Analysis A dialog will prompt you for the new folder name Delete Deletes a selected item permanently from the Library Properties Use Properties to edit the properties of selected Library items such as folders Members Displays a list of all users with at least read access to the current Library Section Each Library Section has its own set of access permissions Analysis title The name of the Analysis as it will be displayed in the Library It is important that the title is informative with regards to what the Analysis actually does Note The title can be 50 characters at the most and the following characters are not supported Saving and Exporting Data 2 lt gt amp Next Select the folder in which you want to publish your Analysis and click Next to proceed to Publish Analysis to Library Step 2 2 You can also select an existing Analysis if you want to overwrite it gt To reach the Publish Analysis to Library Step 1 2 dialog Click File gt Publish Analysis to Library 10 3 3 Publish Analysis to Library Wizard Step 2 2 This dialog lets you ent
18. Example 1 You have a data set containing stock prices for a number of different stocks during a selected time period Loading Data 1 1 2002 100 0000 Barkley Books Ltd 1 1 2002 150 0000 Cameo Cars Inc 1 1 2002 60 0000 Fline Foods Inc 1 1 2002 180 0000 Machton Machinery Ltd 2 1 2002 120 0000 Barkley Books Ltd 2 1 2002 175 0000 Cameo Cars Inc 2 1 2002 70 0000 Fline Foods Inc 2 1 2002 170 0000 Machton Machinery Ltd 3 1 2002 122 0000 Barkley Books Ltd 3 1 2002 190 0000 Cameo Cars Inc 3 1 2002 85 0000 Flinc Foods Inc 3 1 2002 150 0000 Machton Machinery Ltd 4 1 2002 110 0000 Barkley Books Ltd 4 1 2002 160 0000 Cameo Cars Inc 4 1 2002 90 0000 Flinc Foods Inc 4 1 2002 180 0000 Machton Machinery Ltd 5 1 2002 135 0000 Barkley Books Ltd 5 1 2002 130 0000 Cameo Cars Inc 5 1 2002 95 0000 Flinc Foods Inc 5 1 2002 220 0000 Machton Machinery Ltd 6 1 2002 140 0000 Barkley Books Ltd 6 1 2002 165 0000 Cameo Cars Inc 6 1 2002 100 0000 Flinc Foods Inc 6 1 2002 190 0000 Machton Machinery Ltd 7 1 2002 145 0000 Barkley Books Ltd 7 1 2002 175 0000 Cameo Cars Inc 7 1 2002 110 0000 Flinc Foods Inc 7 1 2002 210 0000 Machton Machinery Ltd Traditionally you could plot the data in a scatter plot or a profile chart to see how the price of each stock has varied during the time period 1 1 2002 1 30 2002 3 1 2002 3 30 2002 4 20 2002 5 20 2002 6 10 20 7 1 2002 lt Date v But by changing the way the date column is repr
19. Previous Next Details on Demand amp Previous Next Viewing page 6 10 10 total Viewing page 1 1 8 total Info Info France L Tryptophan Chiral N N Z N A Web Search Details on Demand can be set to A Web Search Details on Demand can also be set to show the search results directly in the Poster show links for the selected records which launches a This is useful for molecular structures among separate browser search window when clicked other things Whether the search results should be displayed directly in the details on demand window of the Poster or displayed in a new browser window can be switched from within the Poster You cannot configure this aspect from the Publish Poster wizard gt To create a new custom Web Search 1 Select Add new from the drop down list A dialog appears 2 Edit the URL to the web link Comment For example open www google com and make a search for replaceme Then copy the entire URL http www google com search hl en amp ie UTF 8 amp oe UTF 8 amp q replaceme and paste it into the Web Search field 3 Enter a dollar sign within curly brackets as a placeholder for the ID variable that will be inserted from the Poster Comment For example replace the replaceme variable above with so that the URL reads http www google com search hl en amp ie UT F 8 amp o0e UTF 8 amp q Saving and Exporting Data Comment Anything you enter between the left
20. Properties gt Heat Map Columns tab 159 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Properties Heat Map x 160 Annotations Details Columns Available columns Recency Date joined First buy Business loca Toys Receipt aver Option Available columns Columns in heat map Add gt gt lt lt Remove Remove All Move First Move Up Move Down String Integer Data and Background Columns Trelis Heat Map Columns HeatMap Columns in heat map Name Type Customer age Integer Date Total Integer Date Age group Integer Date Add gt gt Number of purchases Integer String Groceries Integer Integer lt lt Remove Garden Integer Furniture Integer Electronics Integer Remove All Move First Move Up Move Down EEEE Wil Move Last Description These columns are not included in the heat map Note You can right click on the Name header to get a pop up menu where you can select other attributes you would like to be visible These columns are included in the heat map The order of this list corresponds to the order the columns are shown in the Heat Map visualization You can also see this numerically in the X axis selector of the Heat Map Select a column from the left list and press the Add gt gt button to move it to the right list and include it in the heat map Select a column from the right list and press the lt lt Remove
21. Select Insert Empty Panel 107 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual If an empty panel is inserted on the first page it will appear at the same position on each subsequent page An empty panel inserted on the second page will appear on even pages etc You may also be in the situation where some of the combinations of variables used for the trellis panels result in panels without any records These panels can easily be hidden gt To hide empty panels 1 Right click in the heading field of any trellis panel 2 Select Drop Empty Panels from the pop up menu Comment You can also select the Drop empty panels check box in the Layout field of the Trellis tab in the Properties dialog 4 8 5 Axes Tab 4 8 5 1 Axes Tab Edit gt Properties gt Axes tab Axis labels for Scatter Plots are controlled from the Axes tab of the Properties dialog For other plots see Axes Properties Correlation x Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Trellis Axes 3D Markers Axis TSR Snel Range Min 1314 375 Max 57033 375 Default Ticks Labels Automatic MV Show labels Horizontal C Interval Vertical Every fica r Grid a MV Show grid lines C Fixed 0 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 Option Description Axis Select the axis whose labels you want to edit All other settings made in the Axes dialog are specific to the axis you have currently
22. The Add Columns Select Source dialog is opened Click the Clipboard radio button Click to select a Column match method In this step instruction it is assumed that you select Manual Comment If Automatic is selected identifier columns with identical names not case sensitive must exist in both the old and the new data set All columns with identical names will be used as identifier columns implicit primary key matching The new data set must also contain at least one new column Clicking Finish in the first step of the wizard will add all columns with names that do not exist in the current data set Clicking Next gt will take you to the Add Columns Select Columns dialog where you can select which columns to add Manual allows you to select which columns to use in the matching of identifiers explicit primary key matching Use this option if you want to make sure that the matching is correct 10 11 Working with the Data Click Next gt Response The Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog is displayed Click to select a column from the Columns in new data set that you want to use to map against your current data Comment This should be some kind of ID column preferably containing unique identifiers If a record in this column is missing in the current data set the record will not be added to the data set For information about how non unique values are handled see Details on how data are added Comment If
23. Visible max All visible records up to a configurable maximum number will have labels next to them provided that the number of visible records does not exceed the specified max number If so no labels are shown Click on Customize to open the Customize Labels dialog where you can change the color and line width of the label frames and lines as well as the size available to labels You can drag labels to any position within the visualization area Click on Reset to return all profile labels to their original position Select the column you wish to label by from the drop down list By If you are running DecisionSite for Lead Discovery you can also select to display the chemical structure for each profile in the label This is done by right clicking in the profile chart and selecting Structure Marker Labels from the pop up menu Select Structure Marker Labels gt Remove to revert to the column selected here Jittering displaces markers slightly and randomly thereby making aggregations stand out visually Attention is brought to areas where many records overlap Such regions can then be investigated further by zooming changing axes etc Use the slider to increase or decrease jittering The width of all lines is adjusted by moving the Width slider Select a column under Line width by to associate the width of individual lines with the value of a particular attribute Empty values can be dealt with in two ways either by leaving a
24. and the value in each column on the Y axis This means that each record is presented as a line Properties The dialog box enabling changes to query devices visualization objects markers pies bars backgrounds and HTML code Located in the Edit menu Accessible with Alt Enter Edit gt Properties and a toolbar button Query Device A tool that selects data having certain values for visualization There are five kinds of query devices range sliders item sliders full text searches check boxes and radio buttons Query Device Window The window where the query devices are located By default this window is placed in the upper right corner Range Slider A Query Device used to select a range of data The default device for numerical data A range slider enables narrowing broadening and moving the interval of the selected data of the designated column Record One entry or line in a database or data set Sometimes called a row Sampling In previous versions of DecisionSite subsets of data could be extracted using a sampling tool This is no longer supported SAR Table Structure Activity Relationship table The SAR table combines structural and other data about compounds into a single spreadsheet Scatter Plot A visualization type showing the records as markers in a two dimensional or three dimensional diagram SDFile This is a file format used for exporting ISIS data Structure data files contain structures and
25. be empty for these records Records with IDs that do not exist in the original data set will not be added at all gt To add columns from a file to an open data set 1 Select Data gt Add Columns Response The Add Columns Select Source dialog is opened Click the File radio button Click Browse and open the file from which you want to add columns Comment You can also type the path and file name directly in the text box Comment Common formats like CSV TXT XLS SKV SFS SFA or XSF can be opened Click to select a Column match method In this step instruction it is assumed that you select Manual Comment If Automatic is selected identifier columns with identical names not case sensitive must exist in both the old and the new data set All columns with identical names will be used as identifier columns implicit primary key matching The new data set must also contain at least one new column Clicking Finish in the first step of the wizard will add all columns with names that do not exist in the current data set Clicking Next gt will take you to the Add Columns Select Columns dialog where you can select which columns to add Manual allows you to select which columns to use in the matching of identifiers explicit primary key matching Use this option if you want to make sure that the matching is correct Click Next gt Response The Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog is displayed If you have
26. created in the new table To change the way the measurements are calculated right click on the Method and select a different method from the list or use Ctrl click to select multiple methods Method Selection List Right click on the Method to change the method of calculation for your column Ctrl click to select multiple methods Use values in the following columnis Method right click to change Ctrl click t Year Integer Averar C Cadmium Integer Averac O Chome Integer Averac Average Integer Averac Count all values Count rows Count unique values First value Name Type Metho E Cadmium Integer Avera Maximum v Chrome Integer Averat Median InChrome Integer Averat Merge all values C Copper Integer Averar Merge unique values Minimum value Most common value Standard deviation Sum Gtrl click to multiselect Transfer the following column s all For examples of how Tall Skinny to Short Wide conversion can be used see Pivoting and Pivoting and Aggregation 25 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 26 Pivoting Pivoting in its simplest form means rotating a table Mostly though it also includes performing some form of aggregation so that the new table is more compact than the original Pivoting a data set means changing it from a tall skinny format to a short wide format Consider the following tall skinny table based on a series of
27. gt Properties gt Trellis tab 103 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Properties Correlation x Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Trellis Axes 3D Markers Conditions Variable Values Bind To Add Columns Remove a Edit Move Up Move Down Layout Columns 2 Pages IT Drop empty panels Bind dimensions to conditioning variables Rows fl T r Headings V Show headings Text Background Indicator Option Conditions Layout Headings 4 8 4 3 Description A condition specifies a variable by which the data is divided into subsets Each value of the conditioning variable will yield a separate subset Adding a second condition will split each subset etc You can control the layout of the plots in terms of rows columns and pages There are two ways of doing this Automatically by binding a dimension to each conditioning variable Manually by specifying the exact dimensions of the Trellis plot You can also select whether or not to show empty trellis panels by clearing or selecting the Drop empty panels check box Specifies whether or not to show headings You can also change the colors used in the headings Trellis Conditions Edit gt Properties gt Trellis tab A condition specifies a variable by which the data is divided into subsets Each value of
28. make it easier for the server administrator to group similar Guides together and remove duplicates etc ToolTip A short description of the Guide to be displayed as a ToolTip when you hover with the mouse pointer over the Guide title in the Guides pane Example Creates a bar chart by binning data into even intervals Keywords Keywords specific to the contents of the Guide Keywords are separated by semicolon i e if you write bar chart binning it will be interpreted as a single keyword To produce two keywords the words must be separated with semicolon Hence bar chart binning will result in the two keywords bar chart and binning 302 Author Company Don t show this dialog when saving Guide Guides The name of the Guide author The default value is the user name that you used when logging in to DecisionSite Analytics Server The author name can be especially important to your IT personnel if they want to perform any changes to your Guide and want to check with you that their changes are correct The company for which you have created the Guide This is commonly used in the package name of the Guide resource when the Guide is deployed to a server If the Guide will be published to a server no characters other than a z A Z 0 9 _ and blank spaces should be used in this field due to restrictions in DS Builder Select this check box if you do not want to see this dialog automatically when you are saving
29. never changed or if you want to create a prototype Guide where some IT personnel will later on modify your Guide to open data from a data source that is currently not supported by Analysis Builder The data set that is saved with the Guide is the currently available data That means that if you have added or removed columns from the original data set prior to adding the link to your Guide the embedded data will contain the modified data set If you want to save the data from an information link with the Guide e g for testing purposes you can first open the information link save the data as an Analysis in DecisionSite open the Analysis with the data and add the new action Open data saved with Guide to your Guide Visualizations The visualizations appear in the Actions in DecisionSite list when they are created but the actual settings for the visualization are retrieved when a link is added to the Guide contents list All properties are saved with the specific visualization For example you can specify that a scatter plot should be created with two defined columns on the axes and with the markers colored by a third column Query device settings filtering transformed columns and background images are also included in the link It is also possible to add steps to the Guide where the end user of the Guide is prompted to specify which settings to use See Prompting Guide users for input for more information Set query device filters Addi
30. the record will not be added to the data set For information about how non unique values are handled see Details on how data are added Comment If a column has already been used in a matching it will not be available in the Columns in new data set list Select a column pair in the Matching columns list and click on Remove to make the columns available in the two selection lists again Click to select a column from the Columns in current data set Comment This should be some kind of ID column preferably containing unique identifiers For information about how non unique values are handled see Details on how data are added Click Add Match Comment The selected column pair is moved to the Matching columns list box If desired it is possible to use multiple key pairs In this case only records that have identical values in all of the selected column pairs will be added to the data set For more information see Details on how data are added Click Next gt Response The Add Columns Select Columns dialog is displayed Comment Clicking Finish here will perform the addition of columns by adding all columns from the new data set that were not selected among the Matching columns above to the current data set Click to select the columns to actually include in your data set Comment If a column to include has the same name as one of the columns already in the data set it will be added with the suffix 1 2 etc Click Finish
31. thereby making aggregations stand out visually Attention is brought to areas where many records overlap The rotation of markers can be made to reflect the value of a column Using asymmetrical markers and rotating them according to a chosen variable takes advantage of the human ability to visually detect regions with different surface structure Line connection means that a line is drawn between records that share some property To follow a progression markers can also be connected in ascending order according to some other property The order of lines can be made clearer by use of arrows indicating direction pointing from lower to higher value in the Order column Edit gt Properties gt Markers tab Color By Hits C Fixed Continuous Categorical Customize I Show deselected Markers can be colored to reflect the value of a particular attribute There are three modes for coloring Fixed Continuous and Categorical The mode is set in the Properties dialog 113 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 7 3 114 Option Description Fixed Fixed coloring means that all markers are the same color except deselected and marked Continuous Continuous coloring means that the maximum and minimum specified values in the selected column are each assigned a color Intermediate values are then assigned colors on a scale ranging between the two extreme colors In scatter plots any column can
32. 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 7 6 118 a C6H11 C6H5 C7H70 C6H11 C6H5 C7H70 PRL nm 7 U Fr ris Line Connection Edit gt Properties gt Markers tab Line connection By Salesperson x Order Date x JV Arrows indicating direction Line connection means that a line is drawn between records that share some property To follow a progression markers can also be connected in ascending order according to some other property The order of lines can be made clearer by use of arrows indicating direction pointing from lower to higher value in the Order column To demonstrate the usefulness of line connection in the example data above the locations of two salespersons indicated by red and blue are plotted The two salespersons visit various locations at different points in time Without the lines and arrows indicating direction we would be unable to see in which order the blue salesperson visited the different locations Setting the By selection to None causes the Line connections to disregard which individual salesperson went to what location and will instead plot a timeline showing which locations were visited by any salesperson in order of the date the locations were visited Visualizations Line connection By None ve Order Date JV Arrows indicating direction 4 8 7 7 User Interface 4 8 7 7 1 Fixed Coloring Dialog x Fixed Marked a Deselected E Help
33. 161 162 68 172 241 239 240 24 239 167 78 198 317 200 370 29 30 296 88 91 98 58 109 Own 109 108 138 131 143 146 112 139 148 171 97 106 303 296 385 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual in DecisionSite Tools in DecisionSite Tools menu Transforming axis scale data Transpose Data dialog example using Trellis plot conditions creating empty panels heading colors layout what is it Trends Trinary operators Tutorials TXT files specifications supported formats Type strings Unary operators Unmarking records URL editing a web link removing a web link setting up new web link User ID User interface Spotfire DecisionSite V View menu View tip algorithms description Visualization menu Visualizations 2D scatter plots 3D scatter plots annotating bar charts changing axes customizing 386 173 365 7 352 97 23 24 26 250 251 252 249 248 104 102 107 106 106 102 78 227 284 29 30 31 225 168 254 254 253 8 6 350 178 178 350 exporting heat maps histograms line charts multiple pie charts profile charts properties table tiling W Web link creating in Web Links tool editing in Web Links tool removing from Web Links tool sending a query using Web Links Web Links dialog options dialog overview Web page Web report exporting visualizations Welcome screen Width of table columns Window menu Wind
34. 2 1 What is DecisionSite Library DecisionSite Library provides publishing capabilities for of all your analysis materials so you can share the data with your colleagues Using the Library you can organize your analysis material and collaborate with others in a distributed environment The Library can be used directly from DecisionSite Client by anyone who has at least read privileges The DecisionSite Library is divided into Library Sections which contain all material published to the Library and where access permissions are set With write access you can open and 15 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual publish any type of analysis material Analyses Guides or Posters If you have read access you can open any material in the Library Section For more information see the Library Help in the DecisionSite Library tool Note The license for DecisionSite Library must be enabled if you intend to use the Library Note You must have a license for DecisionSite Posters to use DecisionSite Posters Please contact your DecisionSite Administrator for information about licenses Spotfire Spotfire DecisionSite Library Help Library Search Click to select a Library Section 2 New Library Section X Delete 5 Copy Link E Access Rights f Properties Refresh DecisionSite for Functional Genomics Additional content for Functional Genomics analysis DecisionSite for Lead Discovery Additional content for Lead Discovery a
35. 9 Give the bins new names if desired 10 Click OK Empty values will be empty in the new column and when loading data sets from external sources linked data the new values will be placed in new bins taking the substrings into consideration 214 Working with the Data 7 2 2 Performing Binning gt To perform binning 1 AR WN Select Data gt New Column gt By Binning Response The New Column by Binning dialog in launched Note You can also reach this dialog by right clicking in the Query Device window and selecting New Column gt By Binning From the drop down list select the name of the column that you want to bin Select the desired binning method and enter the respective values Type a New column name for the binned column or use the default name Click OK Response The Edit Bin Names dialog is launched Enter the desired bin names and click OK to create the new column This column can now be used as any other Spotfire DecisionSite column 215 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 2 3 User Interface 7 2 3 1 New Column by Binning Dialog xi Column MOLREGNO m Bin method C Even intervals Number of bins C Cherry picking Specific limits for example 1 0 5 10 40 jo 250 3500 5250 6800 C Even distribution Number of bins C Based on standard deviation stddeytoinclude M 05s M1 V2 Wa PE Beginning C End C Substring Compare from Pos
36. A dialog opens in which you specify detail on how to publish See Publish Analysis to Library Hotkey Description Ctrl F4 Closes the active visualization Closes all visualizations Hides axis selectors When hidden this gives greater room for the visualizations Hides window frame With multiple visualizations displayed greater room is available for the visualizations when frame and title bar are hidden Auto tiles the visualizations Arranges all the open visualizations to fill the visualization window Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical Visualizations Help Menu Help menu Option Hotkey Help Topics F1 PDF Manuals What s New Ask Spotfire Support Support Diagnostics About Spotfire DecisionSite Quick Reference Arranges windows so they overlap Each window is staggered so that all title bars are accessible Arranges visualizations as non overlapping horizontal tiles Arranges visualizations as non overlapping vertical tiles Pressing the key representing the number in front of the visualization title activates that visualization Description Launches the online Help where you can search for specific topics or subjects Opens a web page where you can download printable manuals in PDF format Lists all the new features and latest information for Spotfire DecisionSite Opens the Support web page with information on how to contact Spotfire support Use this tool to verif
37. Bars Error bars are used to indicate the estimated error in a measurement Errors bars indicate the uncertainty in the x and or y values Orthogonal Straight Line Fit This is suitable when it is reasonable to assume randomness for both the X axis values and the Y axis values 4 8 2 5 2 Visualizations Curve This option lets you enter a custom expression using the full power of the SXL language which is drawn as a curve overlaying the visualization Curve Fit This adds a best fit curve to the graph using one of several different models Curve fit should be used when there is no randomness for the markers along the X axis Note If you designate X and Y axes for a Pie Chart you can add some statistical measures to that visualization as well gt To add a measure or a curve to a visualization 1 Open the Properties dialog and select the Data and Background tab 2 Click on the Add button 3 Choose a measure from the drop down list 4 Make the appropriate settings in the dialog that appears 5 Click OK gt To edit a statistical measure 1 Select a measure from the list by clicking on it 2 Click on the Edit button or e Double click on the statistical measure in the list gt To remove a statistical measure 1 Select a statistical measure from the list by clicking on it 2 Click on the Remove button or press Delete on your keyboard You can show or hide a statistical measure without removing it permanentl
38. Browser A program able to display pages encoded in HTML Categorical Coloring Markers bars or pie charts are assigned distinct colors depending on their values Centroids The centroids are the center points of clusters How initial centroids are chosen is determined in the K means Clustering dialog Check Boxes A Query Device enabling toggling of each data value to control which will be shown in the visualization and which will not Clustering A technique for grouping objects on the basis of their similarity for a specified set of characteristics The main objective of a cluster analysis is that objects within a cluster should be more similar to each other than they are to objects in other clusters Spotfire DecisionSite Statistics offers three different kinds of clustering Hierarchical Clustering K means Clustering and Self Organizing Maps Column Corresponding fields in a set of records constitute a column Records go by the name rows in spreadsheet programs glossary Continuous Coloring Coloring whereby the values in the column determine the shade displayed The dissimilar Begin and End colors selected in the Customize dialog represent the minimum and maximum values in a column The markers representing records having intermediate values are colored with a blend of the two depending on their value Control A control is a graphical object for example an icon a button or a window in the user interface tha
39. Dallas 2000 Seattle 15 1999 Seattle 500 2000 Boston 2000 2000 Dallas 3000 Boston 53 Dallas 33 2000 Seattle 1000 2001 Boston 2500 2001 Dallas 1000 2001 Seattle 500 2002 Boston 3000 2002 Dallas 500 2002 Seattle 1000 A pie chart visualization can consist of one or more pies Multiple pies are used to split the data by different categories in a column This is accomplished by setting the X axis and or Y axis selectors to represent a categorical column in the data set BE Pie Chart Color by City m Boston Dallas e C Seattle Size by average of Revenue 500 3000 000 Labels show sector value sector percentage v None 4l l gt Make a new pie chart in one of the following ways e Press Ctrl 5 on the keyboard e Click the New Pie Chart button on the toolbar B e Select New Pie Chart from the Visualization menu By right clicking in a visualization a pop up menu appears This context menu lets you access many features in a fast and easy way 4 4 Line Charts A line chart is a way to summarize how two pieces of information are related and how they vary depending on one another Line charts are useful for visualizing data that behaves like a function with respect to the variable on the X axis such as time series data This visualization type is ideal for showing trends or changes in data over a period of time at even intervals Line charts emphasize time flow and rate of change
40. Data Set Row by Row result handler instead Add to Current Data Set Automatic Key Matching x Output parameter Y OK Cancel 275 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 2 3 9 2 276 Select the output parameter that you want to add to your DecisionSite data set from the drop down list Only output parameters defined as the data type Dataset are available in the list How it works For all column names that are identical in DecisionSite and on the server the contents of the columns will be compared If the values are identical new values are added to the rows where there was a match If the same value occurs in more than one place in the key column the first value will be used Tip If your key columns have names that do not match it is easy to change the names in DecisionSite Add to Current Data Set Row by Row Use this result handler when you want the resulting columns to be added to your current data set using a row by row matching This will make sure that the results are added to the correct rows even if the calculation has been performed using marked or selected records only Add to Current Data Set Row by Row x Output parameter Y x Input parameter for matching of rows tal Column name template original name represented by Calculated z M Overvrite existing columns Help OK Cancel Option Description Output parameter Select the output pa
41. Dialog for more information Prompt Settings File E xi Label Use this file in the calculation Help OK Cancel According to Spotfire UI Guidelines the label for a text field should use sentence style capitalization and end with a colon Resulting prompt for the example above Use this file in the calculation myinputdataset txt Browse Prompt Settings Integer Dialog Use this type of prompt when you want user input in the form of an integer Prompt Settings Integer x Label Age Default value 33 Min value Max value 0 115 Help OK Cancel Option Description Label The text that will be displayed above the input field in the prompt dialog when the configuration is executed Try to make the label as clear as possible to ensure that the end users of the configuration understand what the input parameter should be According to Spotfire UI Guidelines the label for a text field should use sentence style capitalization and end with a colon Default value If desired type a value for default display in the prompt dialog Min value If desired type the lowest acceptable value that can be used as input If an end user tries to provide a lower value an error message will be 8 2 3 8 6 Max value Tools displayed upon execution If desired type the highest acceptable value that can be used as input If an end user tries to provide a lower value an error message will be displayed upon
42. Element Atomic Number Atomic Mass Atomic Radius Ionic Radius Ionization Energy Electronegativity P1l P2 STRING INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Ac 89 227 200 126 51 11 140 0 Ag 47 107 144 129 75 18 630 80 Al 13 27 143 67 60 16 750 160 This data is stored in one of the data formats recognized by Spotfire DecisionSite This particular example can be found in the directory named Data General Periodic Table in the Spotfire DecisionSite distribution as periodic csv Loading a data set gt To load a data set into Spotfire DecisionSite 1 Start Spotfire DecisionSite by selecting Spotfire DecisionSite from Programs in the Windows Start menu or by double clicking the Spotfire DecisionSite icon on the desktop 2 Select File gt Open in the Spotfire DecisionSite main window The File open dialog will appear 3 The folder Data will be shown in the DecisionSite directory 4 Browse to the folder General Periodic Periodic Table 5 Select the file periodic csv and click the Open button Spotfire DecisionSite will automatically set up an initial visualization where each record is represented by a marker along with a number of query devices for manipulating the visualization Tip An alternative way of loading the data is to open the file periodic sfs This may be preferable since sfs files contain Spotfire specific information on how the visualizations will be initially set up 3 2 DecisionSite Library 3
43. IDs exist in the current data set all of the entries will receive the value from the added column the first in the column if there are multiple IDs in the column to be added see above If several matching column pairs are selected in the Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog all values in the pairs must match for the data to be added Multiple key pairs can be used to create unique identifiers from several ID columns with multiple IDs Note Empty values work in the same way as other values Hence if empty values exist in the key column of the current data set and other records have empty values in the key for the columns to be added there is a major risk that values are added to the wrong records Therefore it is advisable to not use columns containing empty values as key columns See Example of adding columns with empty values for more information 7 1 4 2 Example of Adding Columns with Multiple IDs Imagine that you have a data set with the following columns and records loaded into Spotfire DecisionSite Last name First name Job title Scott Alice Analyst Ford Henry Analyst Miller John Clerk Smith Jane Clerk Smith George Clerk Note that there are two employees with the last name Smith Hence the Last name column does not contain unique identifiers Now you want to add information about the salary of each employee which is located in a separate file or data sheet Last name First name Salary Scott Alice 3200 Miller
44. JPG or EMF formats Font size Select whether to use a Small Normal Large or Extra Large font size when exporting to Word The selection made here affects all labels in the visualization including the axis labels and the legend The image in the dialog shows what the Word report might look like gt To reach the Microsoft Word Presentation dialog Select File gt Export gt Microsoft Word Presentation 10 7 Export as Web Page 10 7 1 Exporting Visualizations as a Web Page The Export as Web Page tool exports the current visualizations as an HTML file and a set of images You can also include the legend annotations the SQL query involved and information on the currently marked records Tip Also note other Export options can be found under the File menu gt To export visualizations as a web page 1 SON Gr Create the desired visualizations and set the query devices If you want to mark any records do so now If you use multiple visualizations then organize these so that they are all visible and of the right proportions Comment The visualizations will be included in the report just the way you see them in the visualization area If the visualizations are tiled then they will appear tiled in the report Use Window gt Auto Tile to automatically organize your visualizations Select File gt Export gt Web Page Response The Export as Web Page dialog is displayed Enter a report header This
45. NULL If Find Pri 1 Coll gt 0 Important Not important Returns the first Arg2 characters of the string Arg Arg and the result are of type string Arg2 is of type real but only the integer part is used If Arg2 gt the length of Arg the whole string is returned If Arg2 is negative an error is returned Example 231 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Left Daddy 3 99 gt Dad Left Daddy 386 gt Daddy Left Daddy 1 gt ARG Len Arg1 Returns the length of the string Arg Arg is of type string and the result is of type integer Example Len Hello gt 5 Len null gt NULL Lower Arg1 Returns Arg converted to lowercase Arg and the result are of type string Mid Arg1 Arg2 Arg3 Returns the substring of Arg starting at index Arg2 with a length of Arg3 characters Arg and the result are of type string Arg2 and Arg3 are of type real but only the integer part is used If Arg2 gt Len Arg an empty string is returned Else if Arg2 Arg3 gt Len Arg Arg3 is adjusted to 1 Len Arg Arg2 If either Arg2 or Arg3 is negative or if Arg2 is zero an error is returned Example Mid Daddy 2 3 gt add Mid Daddy 386 4 gt Mid Daddy 4 386 gt dy Mid Daddy 1 2 gt ARG Mid Daddy 2 1 gt ARG Right Argl Arg2 Returns the last Arg2 characters of the string Arg Arg and the result are of type string Arg
46. One of the options available in the menu presented by one of the commands in the menu bar MOL File This is a file format used for chemical structures Each file contains only one structure Navigate Menu The Navigate menu used to be located in the top left corner of the DecisionSite Navigator From here you could reach various tools and resources or log into and log out of the network In DecisionSite 8 1 the corresponding functions can be reached via the main menus in DecisionSite Node A node is a circle in a decision tree that represents either a record or a cluster of records Null Value Empty value Cell with no value ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity a common method of accessing databases Pie Chart A visualization showing data in aggregated pie segments which can be split drilled down into and taken apart Pivoted Data Another word for Short Wide data Pop up Menu Menus that are available of you right click directly in the graphical user interface The content of the menu depends on where you click Portfolio A portfolio is a data file in XML format that can be viewed in the Portfolio tool and which makes it possible to work with genes or experimental results in a structured way Profile Synonymous to a record data point in Spotfire DecisionSite 373 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 374 Profile Chart A visualization type where column names are plotted along the X axis
47. Pages is selected each trellis panel will be displayed on a separate page and you will have to scroll down to see all panels 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any additional conditions Tip Experiment with different layouts while still in the Trellis Condition dialog The visualization is updated dynamically so you can immediately see the results of your current settings gt To set layout manually 1 In the Properties dialog under the Trellis tab make sure the check box labeled Bind dimensions to conditioning variables is cleared 2 Enter the number of trellis panels that you want to show next to each other simultaneously both horizontally columns and vertically rows The number of pages is automatically updated to make sure there is room for the specified panels you can never change the number of pages directly 4 8 4 5 Trellis Headings Edit gt Properties gt Trellis tab 106 Visualizations Show Headings You can select whether or not to show trellis panel headings from the Trellis tab of the Properties dialog Select the check box to show all headings Clear the check box to hide all headings You can also right click on any trellis panel header and select Heading gt Hide All Headers from the pop up menu Heading Color The colors used in the headings of columns rows and pages can be set manually from the Trellis tab of the Properties dialog Text is the color of the text in all headings Background is the
48. Plot button on the toolbar e Select New Scatter Plot from the Visualization menu By right clicking in a visualization a pop up menu appears This context menu lets you access many features in a fast and easy way A 3D scatter plot is used to show the relationship between three variables It shows the data set in three dimensions using three columns as axes Each record or row in the data set is represented by a marker whose position depends on its values corresponding to the X Y and Z axis A fourth variable can be set to correspond to the color or size of the markers thus adding yet another dimension to the plot Visualizations T ATT A eee wn Lt a lonization Energy 3D scatter plots allow a lot of information to be encoded into visualizations They are especially useful when analyzing data that is not clustered along any of the axes columns of the data set gt Make a new 3D scatter plot in one of the following ways e Press Ctrl 2 on the keyboard e Click the New 3D Scatter Plot button on the toolbar E e Select New 3D Scatter Plot from the Visualization menu 3D visualizations have the Z axis selector and zoom bar along the top edge of the visualization The Z axis initially points towards the viewer out from the screen 4 2 Bar Charts A Bar Chart is a way of summarizing a set of categorical data It displays the data using a number of bars of the same width each of which represents a particular
49. Retrieval for details Filtering Data During Retrieval An information link can include columns with run time filters For each such column that is loaded you are asked to specify the values that you are interested in Only records with the selected values will then be loaded Note To enable run time filtering for a column or to set the type of control used for selecting values use Information Builder to edit the information link gt To open an information link with run time filters 1 Select File gt Import gt Open Information Link Response The Information Library dialog is shown In the Information Links pane select a link with run time filters Response Information about the selected link is displayed in the Information Link details pane You will see here whether or not the link includes columns with run time filters Click Open Comment To open a link directly double click the link icon AL Response The first Set Filter for Column dialog appears Specify the values or range of values in which you are interested Comment Information links may include more than one run time filter In this case each prompt will reduce the data set such that subsequent prompts may present fewer values See the Run time Filter Example for more details Click Next gt or Finish if this is the last filter Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each column with a run time filter Using Current Query Device Settings as a Filter When
50. Slider i Item Slider Full Text Search Sessscssesss Hone All v Show Empty Values v Show Full Name Sort gt a Ta the Top New Column gt Up Set Property gt Edit Annotation To the ma Hide 0 15933 FR F 2 A7607 Place the cursor over the Move option A submenu will appear 3 Choose the command that reflects the direction in which to move the device The options Up and Down move it one step upwards or downwards respectively The options To the top and To the bottom make the query device the topmost or bottommost device respectively 5 9 Sorting the Query Devices The order of the query devices can be sorted in four ways by original order by annotation by name or by type For example you can group all range sliders together or sort the query devices in alphabetical order gt To sort the query devices 1 Right click on a query device 190 Query Devices 2 Select Sort from the pop up menu Query Devices PlatelD IAL Check Boxes Radio Buttons Range Slider Item Slider E Full Text Search Hone All D Data Range gt Ple v Show Empty Yalues 2_ y Show Full Name p Pe Move b 0 0 New Column gt w Set Property gt Edit Annotation De vans un venidnuy Original by Annotation by Type PlatelD Position Platey 2 F3 F 0 15933 z CR c E 2 07R070 3 Select Original by A
51. Spotfire DecisionSite mapping files Maps Maps Maps Maps Marked records marking new column from Markers activating Index 319 320 321 322 294 310 323 324 325 326 327 15 109 143 143 143 63 63 117 166 143 144 147 143 146 143 118 147 290 10 15 381 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual coloring copying customizing drawing order highlighting labelling marking rotating shape of size of tab of scatter plot Marking how to Marking records Matrix plots Menu Analysis Builder Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation dialog exporting visualizations Microsoft Word Presentation dialog exporting visualizations MIF file Minimum requirements Mismatching case when adding columns data types when adding columns Mouse maneuvers 3D scatter plots bar charts and pie charts profile charts scatter plots and line charts Moving windows Multiple conditioning methods N Name of column of web link Navigation Navigator options what is the Guides pane Negative numbers Network connection New visualization web link New column adding to data set by binning from expression from marked records Normalize case Null expressions Number Format 382 167 307 308 205 113 170 112 112 169 112 168 112 115 112 112 168 168 65 309 193 254 111 285 284 13 253 203 215 219 218 235 98 O ODBC Offline OLE DB Open From Library Op
52. Star Starting guides local Guides Statistical computations Computation Services overview example configuration suggested workflow user interface overview Statistical functions Statistical measures in visualizations Statistics for HTML templates in visualizations Status bar Straight line fit Data and Background tab description String Support Symbols shape and rotation Syntax 161 195 190 33 29 222 176 257 279 259 317 317 68 21 343 115 59 131 79 213 115 284 292 257 259 259 263 229 78 200 78 170 201 78 81 85 91 36 5 115 223 System requirements T Table color column order column selection column width creating details on demand properties sorting what is it Tabs Tall Skinny dialog examples pivoting Templates applying Details on Demand templates editing HTML templates SFT files statistics for HTML templates Terminology Text files specifications supported formats Text Properties dialog Theory of curve fit Thousands separators Three dimensional scatter plots settings TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite contact support welcome to what is it Tick marks 3D tab Axes tab Bar Chart Columns tab Bars tab Lines tab Markers tab of line chart Markers tab of scatter plot Pies tab Profile tab Tiling Time Title columns trellis plots visualizations Tool Option dialog Toolbar in Analysis Builder Index 161 162 162 161 162 162 68 195 161 162
53. This will allow you to specify manually which character to interpret as separator Dialog Box Controls for the Specify Delimiter dialog Delimiter Select one of the four common delimiter symbols or enter a character of your choice Column names Check the box if you know that the first row contains column names and not data Data preview The table shows how the file will be interpreted given the specified delimiter e Values in a Spotfire DecisionSite data set may contain any character including white space except the column separator If enclosed in double quotation marks columns may also contain separator characters Column headers are allowed to contain separators if double quoted and the first double quotation mark is preceded by a backslash 3 3 5 5 Name and Type Strings The first one or two lines in a text file or file may be interpreted as name and type information according to the following rules If the second line appears to be type information i e containing columns with strings like INT STRING DATE etc it is used as type information The first line is then expected to contain name information For example a small database with personal data and both name and type information looks like the table below Here the second line is interpreted as type information and the first as name information Data Spotfire DecisionSite Interpretation Name Age name info STRING INT type info Peter 26 data John 35
54. a DecisionSite session This means that the data is built up and changed on the server as the various configurations are run Note When you use this option the different steps of a Guide with many calculations will not be independent of one another This may increase the risk of errors upon execution if links in a Guide are clicked in the wrong order or if requests times out Force single Use this option to be able to run SAS configurations created with quotation for DecisionSite 8 1 1 This option should normally be cleared string parameters Test Validates the connection without closing the dialog gt To reach the Connector Settings dialog 1 If Computation Services is not already started select Tools gt Computation Services gt SAS R or S PLUS or whatever the name of the computation server you want to connect to 2 Select File gt Connector Settings Servers Dialog This dialog lists all servers currently defined as calculation servers for a specific connector Click on the server that you want to use upon configuration execution then click OK x Defined servers http myRiserver http Reserverl 8012 Help OK Cancel Constant Definition Dialog The constant definition dialog s appearance varies depending on what data type you are defining a constant for Just enter the value that you want to use in the calculation and click OK Example dialogs Constant String x Value Help OK C
55. a column contains other types no values will be displayed in the Distance Calculator window gt To reach the Distance Calculator Select Tools gt Distance Calculator Tools 8 4 Administration Tools 8 4 1 Administration Tools Overview The Administration section contains the tools needed to organize the DecisionSite environment These tools are only available for users with Administrator privileges The Library provides publishing of all analysis material for sharing with colleagues Using the Library you can collaborate with colleagues in a distributed environment and organize your analysis material See the Library Help for more information DecisionSite Administrator DecisionSite Library DecisionSite Library Administrator Server Usage The DecisionSite Administrator can be reached by selecting Tools gt Administration gt DecisionSite Administrator This will open a Microsoft Internet Explorer window where Administrators can manage user privileges Refer to the DecisionSite Administrator Help for more information The Library can be accessed for various purposes By selecting Tools gt Administration gt DecisionSite Library the main view of the Library is opened This will open a Microsoft Internet Explorer window with the Library Use this view to open Library items and to administrate it Refer to the Library Help for more information The DecisionSite Library Administrator can be reached by selecting
56. a query device into a full text search it will be either case sensitive or not depending on this setting However you can also specify whether or not each individual full text search query device should be case sensitive by right clicking on it In the pop up menu that appears select Set Property gt Search options gt Ignore Case By using this alternative different query devices can have different settings This sets the default behavior for full text search query devices This means that when you import a new data set or change a query device into a full text search it will either use regular expressions or not depending on this setting However you can also specify whether or not each individual full text search query device should use regular expressions by right clicking on it In the pop up menu that appears select Set Property gt Search options gt Use Regular Expression By using this alternative different query devices can have different settings Note When you save the visualization the settings for each query device are saved in the SFS file and will remain when you open the file again However since the case sensitivity and regular expression settings are not available in versions older than DecisionSite 7 1 the full text search query devices in older SFS files that are opened in DecisionSite 7 1 or later will be based on the default settings in the Advanced options tab In DecisionSite 8 0 a new improved bar c
57. a specific column Settings from the 3D tab such as navigation rendering and perspective are not saved neither are Data and Background tab settings as they are column specific The Reset button will remove the configuration that you have previously saved and restore the default values 4 9 6 7 Customizing Toolbars Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars tab You can tailor Spotfire DecisionSite s toolbars to allow you to rapidly access features that you use regularly gt To customize toolbars 1 Select Tools gt Customize 2 Go to the Toolbars tab 3 Click New 4 Enter a name for the new toolbar and click OK 5 Make sure the new toolbar is selected in the list Your toolbar should be visible as a small box on your screen 173 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 6 Go to the Commands tab 7 Select a category of commands Customize x Toolbars Commands Categories Buttons A Visualizations Spotfire T ableVist Select a category then click a button to see its description Drag the button to any toolbar Description Creates a new 3D scatter plot visualization Cancel Apply Help 8 Drag any button to your new toolbar or to any of the standard toolbars 9 Click OK 4 9 6 8 Fonts amp Numbers Tab gt To change the fonts Select Tools gt Options gt Fonts amp Numbers This opens the Fonts amp Numbers tab of the Options dialog in whic
58. a specified maximum number will have labels next to them provided that the number of visible markers does not exceed the specified max number If so no labels are shown Select the column you wish to label by from the drop down list By Click on Customize to open the Customize Labels dialog where you can change the color and line width of the label frames and lines as well as the size available to labels You can drag labels to any position within the visualization area Click on Reset to return all marker labels to their original position If you are running DecisionSite for Lead Discovery you can also select to display the chemical structure for each record in the label This is done by right clicking in the scatter plot and selecting Structure Marker Labels from the pop up menu Select Structure Marker Labels gt Remove to revert to the column selected here The size of markers can be made to reflect the value of a particular column Select a column from the drop down list under Size Moving the slider changes the size of all markers while maintaining the size ratio of different markers It is possible to specify the order in which the markers of a scatter plot will be drawn This is done by specifying a column that will determine the drawing order Note By setting both Size by and Drawing order by to the same column the smaller markers will be drawn on top of the larger ones Jittering displaces markers slightly and randomly
59. and timestamp data types are supported in DecisionSite 9 0 and forward For example it is possible to calculate how many days it differs between two date columns When a date time or timestamp column is subtracted from another date time or timestamp column the corresponding result column will show the number of days as a real decimal column For example 2006 10 10 7 00 AM minus 2006 10 10 1 00 AM equals 0 25 since 6 hours is a quarter of a day Operators Operators Overview Please select which type of Operators you are interested in Unary Operators Operators with only one argument Binary Operators Operators with two arguments Trinary Operators Operators with three arguments Operator Precedence Unary Operators A unary operator takes one argument following the operator Operator Description Argl Negates the argument The argument and the result are of type real Argl Returns the logical Not of Arg The argument and the result are of type boolean See also function Not Example true gt false false gt true Binary Operators A binary operator takes two arguments one preceding and one following the operator Operator Description Argl Arg2 Adds the two arguments The arguments and the result are of type real See operator amp for string concatenation 225 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Argl Arg2 Argl Arg2 Argl Arg2 Argl amp Arg2 Argl lt Arg
60. any defined input and output parameters as well as the specified result handlers and prompt settings Saves the current configuration including the script all input and output parameters as well as the specified result handlers and prompt settings to an earlier specified file Sends the current configuration to Analysis Builder as an available action so that the calculation can be incorporated in a Guide Adds the selected text in the script text area as an input parameter Same functionality as the Add button on the Input Parameters tab Adds the selected text in the script text area as an output parameter Same functionality as Add button on the Output Parameters tab Runs the current script configuration Displays the Connector Settings dialog which handles the connection to the computation server Input Parameters Tab Input Parameters Output Parameters Result Handling Execution Log Prompt dialog title Prompt dialog description My Example Calculation This is an example R script calculation which adds an entered integer to all specifie Parameter name Data type Value C El Add datain Dataset Ee Prompt Data set x E Remove Move Down 266 Tools Option Description Prompt dialog title The text in this field is displayed as the title of the prompt dialog when the configuration is executed Maximum length is 80 characters Prompt dialog The text entered here is also displayed in the promp
61. as comma separated values csv When you select the File gt Export gt Data option a Save As dialog opens and you can browse to the location where you want to save the file and save it under any viable name you wish Available formats are TXT tab separated columns CSV default list separator SKV semicolon Spotfire Text Data Format and two versions of Microsoft ADO Persisted Record set XML and ADTG binary format To export as Persisted Record set you need MDAC 2 5 or later installed on your computer You can also open Persisted Record sets in DecisionSite Client via File gt Open and selecting All Files Note Data are per default exported exactly the way they are currently displayed This means that the export of a formatted Date Time or DateTime column may result in data loss For example if a Date column is formatted to be displayed as Day of week Monday first day name the exported data will not contain the information about year and month which was originally in the data but only the string showing day of week Optionally you can turn off this setting and always export the original data from the Advanced tab of the Tools gt Options dialog 345 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 346 Tip You can export data directly from the Table visualization by right clicking and selecting Export Data Also note other Export options can be found under the File menu 10 13 Printing g
62. as seen in the table below Dates not matching the selected format will be discarded as conversion errors Formats Name Fields Interpretation Priority ISO format YY YY MM DD Highest User Locale Setting lt MS Windows setting gt Reverse ISO format DD MM YY YY USA amp UK format MM DD YY YY European format DD MM YY YY Custom format YY YY MM DD Custom format YYYYMMDD Custom format YYMMDD Custom format DD MM YY YY Loading Data Long ISO format DD MonthName YY YY Long ISO Internet DD MonthName YY YY Long USA amp UK format MonthName DD YY YY Lowest Type strings date sfDate Remarks The year YY can always be specified in two or four digits e g 89 or 1989 If only two digits are given for the year the date is assumed to belong to the 20th century if the number representing the years is higher than the dividing year and to the 21st century if equal to the dividing year or below Microsoft Windows settings provide the dividing year Windows default dividing year is 31 If alterations have been made there they will be reflected in the way Spotfire DecisionSite calculates dates Months can be written using the initial three letters If spelled out names should be in U S English Month names are not case sensitive Spotfire DecisionSite performs a leap year control when importing data of type Date Once date data is loaded into Spotfire DecisionSite it will be presented in localized format set in
63. as the last item on root level Adds the marked records from the visualization into your currently active Portfolio list Opens the Properties dialog to the Annotations tab where you can provide the visualization with a description of your choice Copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format It also copies an image of the visualization to the clipboard which can be pasted into other applications by using a Paste Special option Creates a duplicate of the selected visualization Available for 3d scatter plots only Resets the visualization to the original view Opens the Properties dialog n which parameters governing the appearance of the visualization can be set annotations made etc Description Zooms to the selected records Resets the zoom bars to the original state no zooming Opens the Properties dialog to the Trellis tab where you can split the visualization to display different subsets of your data Deletes the set of marked records The marked records are removed from the data set in Spotfire DecisionSite s memory This operation cannot be undone but does not affect the original data unless that file is intentionally overwritten with the diminished data Resets the set of marked records No records will be marked after you have executed this operation Inverts the set of marked records Marks all
64. background color of all headings Indicator is the color of the bar that indicates the relative size and position of the range of values Background Indicator Note The indicator bar represents the size of the range of values represented by a column row or page not the number of records with that value Heading Text What to show in the heading text is specified from the Trellis condition dialog reached by clicking Add or Edit on the Trellis tab of the Properties dialog You can specify which of three options should be shown as the heading for the trellis panels e Show variable name e Show variable value e Show variable name and value 4 8 4 6 Empty Panels It is possible to insert empty panels anywhere in the layout This can be useful when manually configuring a multi page layout Normally in such a layout a page flows to the next as soon as it is full This may not always be appropriate Consider for example a situation with twenty four panels arranged in a three by three layout This would yield two pages with nine panels on each and a final page with only six panes By inserting an empty panel on each page the result would be three pages with eight non empty panels on each gt To insert an empty panel 1 In the Trellis tab of the Properties dialog make sure Bind dimensions to conditioning variables is cleared 2 Right click in the heading field of the panel were you want the empty panel to be inserted 3
65. button to move it back to the available columns list and remove it from the heat map Removes all columns from the right list and moves them to the available columns list Select a column from the right list and press the Move First button to move it to the top This changes the order the lines are displayed Select a column from the right list and press the Move Up button to move it a step up This changes the order the columns are displayed in the heat map Select a column from the right list and press the Move Down button to move it a step down This changes the order the columns are displayed in the heat map Visualizations Move Last Select a column from the right list and press the Move Last button to move it to the bottom This changes the order the columns are displayed in the heat map Table Tab Table Tab Edit gt Properties gt Table tab Properties Table x Annotations Columns Details Columns Table Columns Table 4 8 19 4 8 19 1 Color Row height Marked color Number of lines Deselected color m Show deselected Sort rows by r Header height Number of lines None v Ascending Descending Frozen columns Then by EE Number of columns fo x Ascending Descending Then by Grid z MV Show grid lines Ascending Descending Option Description You can change the color that indicates marked and dese
66. clicking Add on the Input Parameters tab edit the default parameter name and then write the script that includes the parameter Add at least one input parameter Select the Data type of the parameter from the drop down list 257 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Add an output parameter Define what to do with the results Add resulting columns to the data set Add resulting output as a file Test a configuration Save a configuration Incorporate a configuration in a Guide 258 In the Input Parameters tab select Prompt prompt type from the Value drop down list Configure the prompt in the Prompt Settings dialog by adding a label and other information Select the parameter in the script and click on the Add as Output Parameter button a Select the Data type of the parameter from the drop down list Tip You can also start by clicking Add on the Output Parameters tab edit the default parameter name and then write the script that includes the parameter Make sure that you have defined the output parameter that you want to use as result On the Result Handling tab click Add From the menu select the type of result handler that you want to use If applicable configure the selected result handler to work on the desired output parameter Make sure that you have defined at least one output parameter as the data type Dataset On the Result Handling tab click Add From the menu sele
67. custom Guides and Analysis Builder Guides to the Library By publishing your Guides colleagues can use them in a convenient way To publish Analyses and Posters see Publishing Analyses to Library and Publishing Posters to Library gt To publish Guides to the Library 1 Select Guides gt Publish to Library 2 In Publish to Library Wizard Step 1 3 select if you want to publish a custom made Guide or a Guide created with Analysis Builder Click Next gt 3 Select the location in the Library for your Guide in Publish to Library Wizard Step 2 3 Click Next gt Navigate in the Library by using double click on Library Sections and folders Enter properties of your Guide in Publish to Library Wizard Step 3 3 Click Finish 5 Inthe Publish to Library Wizard Guide Published dialog select if you want to notify your colleagues In this dialog you can send an email with a link to the Guide Response Your Guide is published to the Library in the specified location Anyone with read access to that Library Section can now use the Guide 9 6 2 Publish to Library Wizard 9 6 2 1 Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 1 3 This wizard helps you to publish a Guide in the Library Using the Library your colleagues can use your Guide from a Library Section Both custom made Guides and Guides created with Analysis Builder can be published with the Publish to Library Wizard 310 Guides Publish Guide to Library Step1 3 x Whi
68. data set there is a major risk that values are added to the wrong records Take a look at this simple example where the current data set contains an empty value Last name First name Job title Scott Alice Analyst Ford Henry Analyst John Clerk Smith Jane Clerk Now you want to add information about the salary of each employee which is located in a separate file or data sheet Name First name Salary Alice 3200 Ford Henry 2800 Miller John 1300 Smith Jane 800 Note that there is another record that contains the empty value in this data set 212 Working with the Data Adding the column using Last name and Name as matching columns will produce the following result Alice Analyst Ford Henry Analyst 2800 John Clerk 3200 Smith Jane Clerk 800 The name Scott is missing in the new data set and Alice Scott will therefore not receive any value in the Salary column The person in the original data set where no last name was entered John will be matched with the empty value in the new data set and hence receive the Salary 3200 even though this number has nothing to do with him Selecting both last name and first name as key columns would have produced empty values for both Alice Scott and John X which in this case would have been the correct procedure unless it was possible to add the correct last names to the data sets prior to import 7 2 New Column by Binning 7 2 1 Different Binning Methods Depending on the type of values in
69. database connections and perform preprocessing The benefit is that you can fetch the data preprocess it and get exactly the initial visualization that you want all by just double clicking a file icon Please contact the Spotfire Central for more information on how to integrate code in SFA files Version 8 0 and Prior For legacy reasons you can also save your Analysis as Spotfire DecisionSite 8 0 and version 7 files There are two kinds of files used in older versions of Spotfire DecisionSite SFS and XSF files Spotfire File version 8 0 sfs The 8 0 file is actually an 8 1 file with the possibility to be opened in a DecisionSite 8 0 environment Data will always be embedded if you select this option linked data is not supported Spotfire File version 7 sfs This format saves a binary SFS file in the same format as version 7 3 and is only recommended for files that must be backward compatible with Spotfire DecisionSite version 7 Linked data is not supported XSF Files version 7 xsf XSF files store exactly the same information as SFS files but in an XML based format Since the files are in text format rather than binary they can be searched from a file system XML also makes the structure of the content more clear Spotfire DecisionSite Mapping Files SFM Files The Spotfire DecisionSite mapping file sfm format first establishes a coordinate system which relates the data set s coordinate system to that of th
70. dendrogram a tree graph based on the similarity between them See Hierarchical Clustering Method Overview Groups compounds with similar sets of substructures See Hierarchical Clustering on Keys Groups records using an algorithm based on neural networks See Self Organizing Maps Overview A non hierarchical clustering which groups records into a defined number of clusters based on their similarity See K means Clustering Overview Reduces the dimensionality of a data set without significant loss of information See Understanding PCA 351 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 11 1 6 352 Pattern Detection gt gt Profile Search gt Coincidence Testing Tools Menu Option Structure Analytics gt gt Structure Viewer gt Structures in Table gt Structure Search gt R group Search gt List Search gt Add Structure Keys gt Structure Connection gt Advanced Preferences Web Links Computation Services Calculates the similarity to a selected profile for all records in the data set and adds the result as a new column See Profile Search Overview Compares two columns and investigates whether or not the seeming similarity between the two distributions is a coincidence See Coincidence Testing Overview Description Launches the Structure Viewer tool which allows you to examine chemical structures from an ISIS database and manage lists of compou
71. dialog Comments are directly opened for editing by double clicking on the comment Link Displays the Link Properties dialog Properties Show Add Shows or hides the Link Properties dialogs that are displayed when you add Link Dialogs a link from the Actions in DecisionSite list 9 5 3 12 3 Analysis Builder Add Menu The Add menu contains the following commands 308 9 5 3 12 4 9 5 3 12 5 9 5 3 12 6 Option Text New Page Comment Guides Description Opens the Text Properties dialog where you can enter a new text which will be inserted below the currently selected item or if no item is selected at the bottom of the Guide contents list The Text Properties dialog is displayed with the default text Enter text here Creates a new page in the Guide The beginning of the new page is labeled Page Break in the Guide contents list Adds a new text box with text in italics below the currently selected item or if no item is selected at the bottom of the Guide contents list The new comment item is displayed with the default text Click to add comment The purpose of comments is normally to indicate that something in this Guide should be changed or added by the IT department of the Guide creators company Therefore comments should normally be removed before the Guide is deployed to all users Analysis Builder Format Menu The Format menu contains the following commands Option Numbered Bulleted
72. displays bars side by side but proportionally so that each group sums up to 100 if the Sum measure is selected See Bar Chart Layout Details for more information Selecting the Drop empty bars check box will hide all bars containing no records from the visualization letting the visible bars use the space along the horizontal axis Filtering with the query devices will cause bars to appear disappear dynamically if this option is selected Use the drop down list to change the column to use on the X axis If the X axis in your bar chart represents a numeric value you can select to bin group the records from several bars into larger binned bars Rather than showing a separate bar for say 1987 1988 1989 etc you can show a single bar for 1980 1989 another bar for 1990 1999 etc Do this by first selecting the Use binned values check box This setting can also be reached from the right click menu of the axis selector Then you can either can choose your own number of bins by typing the number into the Manual field or select Automatic and adjust the slider to display a suitable number of bars Moving the slider sets a maximum number of bins 1 1000 and the bar chart displays a number of bars as close to this as possible depending on the range of the data Note Automatic binning of the bar charts uses a form of even interval binning which is optimized for interactivity and has heuristics to automatically adjust to fit logical tick m
73. etc However the data set includes no information about geographical coordinates By using a MIF file as background you get not only a background map but also two new columns of data Each record is given map coordinates depending on which country it represents 4 8 2 3 5 Visualizations gt To use a MIF file as background 1 Create a scatter plot visualization 2 Activate the Properties dialog and select the Data and Background tab 3 Click the Browse button by the Background Image field and select MapInfo Interchange Files then browse to the file you want as a background 4 Click Open The Match Data and Background dialog is displayed where it is possible to match a database column with a tag in the MIF file 5 In the left field select the column in your data set that identifies geographical position in this case Country 6 In the right field select the MapInfo tag in the MIF file that relates to the same information in this case Country The names are not necessarily the same 7 Inthe two text fields enter names for the new columns that will be added to your data set specifying X and Y position 8 Make sure Use current axes is cleared If you select this option then no new coordinates will be extracted from the MIF file You will then only get a background image 9 Ifyou want to add all the information in the MIF file i e not just the coordinates to your data set then select Make new columns for backgr
74. execution Resulting prompt for the example above Age pa a aasussssssssssssssssssssssssssssl Prompt Settings List Dialog Use this type of prompt when you want user input in the form of a string selected from a predefined list Prompt Settings List E xj Label Favorite color Selectable option black red value 1 default Help e o 4a Remove Move Up Move Down Set as Default OK Cancel Option Label Selectable option Value Description The text that will be displayed above the list selection in the prompt dialog when the configuration is executed Try to make the label as clear as possible to ensure that the end users of the configuration understand what the input parameter should be According to Spotfire UI Guidelines the label for a drop down list should use sentence style capitalization and end with a colon The list item text as you want it to be displayed for the end users Each selectable option should be connected to a value to be used in the actual calculations The list item value used in the calculations which is what lies behind the selectable options shown in the drop down list 273 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Add Remove Move Up Move Down Set as Default Adds the current pair of selectable option value to the list Removes the selected option from the list Moves the selected option up in the list Move
75. file but without any data content When you want to apply a template to a data set you can therefore choose to apply the settings from either a Template file SFT a Spotfire Analysis File SFS or a Spotfire XML File XSF which is the same thing as an SFS file only in XML format gt To Apply a Template 1 Open your data set in DecisionSite Client 2 Select File gt Apply Template 3 Select the template file you want to apply 4 Click Open Response The template is applied on your data 4 9 5 Marking Activating and Highlighting Records 4 9 5 1 How to Mark Activate and Highlight In DecisionSite there are three ways to interact with the data set marking activating and highlighting 167 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 9 5 2 168 Action Marking Activating Highlighting Indicator in visualizations g How to do it Hold down the left Click on a single Hover with the mouse mouse button and draw object pointer over an object a rectangle around one or more objects or press Shift before you press the button and drag for a lasso effect Note An object can be a single record as in scatter plots or an aggregation of records such as pie charts The effect of performing these actions varies with the tool and type of visualization Go to the sections describing each tool to find out more or click the Help window s Back button to return to where you were Marking The purpose of m
76. for a Query Device When using a data set with many columns you often have just as many query devices Sometimes it can be hard to find the query device you wish to manipulate by scrolling through the query device panel A quick way to find a certain query device is to use the search function at the top of the query device panel If you know the name of the column Query Device you want simply begin typing it into the search box and the desired query device should come into focus Any columns with names that do not match this are hidden from the query device panel As you enter text the query device panel is continuously updated with the query devices that begin with the current substring To show all query devices again just clear the search box The query device search expression is based on case insensitive substring matching of the column name For example Typing in a will match a column named Apple as well as a column named Pear but it will not match a column named Lemon You can also navigate between the query devices using your keyboard F3 up arrow or F3 down arrow will move you up or down one query device F3 home or F3 end will move you to the first or last query device and F3 page up or F3 page down will move you up or down one screen length among the query devices Query Devices iqueryDeviees EF Type to search Search among Query Devices Item slider Range slider Year a Check boxes mi 80 OM s5 Fcc ull text sear
77. for the Guide Note Only Guides created with Analysis Builder are available to be opened and edited in Analysis Builder Open from Library x Library Search Home gt DecisionSite for Functional Genomics Type Title Description t 13 Advanced microarray Guide Example This Guide uses a number E Microarray Guide Example This Guide shows how visua Help Open Cancel Library tab Description options Library All Guides folders and Library Sections are listed on this tab Note Only Library Sections that you have access to are listed Open Select the Guide you want and click Open to open it in the Guides pane or in Analysis Builder if you have reached this dialog from there You can also double click the Guide to open it Search tab Description options Search tab Use Search to search for the item you want to open Search for Enter the search string in the Search for field and click Search See Searching in the Library for information about search strings If you click a folder in the Search result you will be redirected to the Library View under the Library tab Look in Select which Library Section you want to perform your search in Either one or all Library Sections can be searched Only Library Sections you have access to are listed gt To reach the Open Guide from Library dialog e Click Open Guide from Library in the Guides pane or e select Guides gt Run from Library from the menu
78. have to scroll down in the Query Devices window to see the new query devices 7 1 2 3 Adding Columns using Advanced Data Import The Advanced Data Import option in the Add Columns tool can be used to add columns to a data set from a different source than a file or the clipboard e g from a database It can also be used if the delimiter or data type must be modified to retrieve the data properly Note The matching of values in the selected ID columns is case sensitive If existing record IDs are missing in the file which is merged into the data set the values in the new column will be empty for these records Records with IDs that do not exist in the original data set will not be added at all gt To add columns using advanced data import 1 Select Data gt Add Columns Response The Add Columns Select Source dialog is opened Click the Advanced Data Import radio button Click to select a Column match method In this step instruction it is assumed that you select Manual Comment If Automatic is selected identifier columns with identical names not case sensitive must exist in both the old and the new data set All columns with identical names will be used as identifier columns implicit primary key matching The new data set must also contain at least one new column 205 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 206 10 11 12 13 14 Manual allows you to select which columns to use
79. heat map This setting plus the selection of the column to display as row labels are set on the Heat Map tab of the Properties dialog When row labels have been displayed it is possible to adjust the space available for the labels by dragging the line between the heat map and the row labels with the mouse pointer If the height of the rows is so small that it is impossible to see row labels row labels will not be shown on every row Instead the number of row labels that fit into the heat map will be displayed at an equal distance from each for example only on every fifth row If rows have been deselected no row labels will be shown for these rows Row labels that are too long to be displayed correctly will be truncated and end with an ellipsis In this case hovering over the row label with the mouse pointer will display a ToolTip of the entire row label text 4 7 Tables The Table visualization presents the data as a table of rows and columns The Table can handle the same number of rows and columns as any other visualization in DecisionSite In the Table a row represents a record By clicking on a row you make that record active and by holding down the mouse button and dragging the pointer over several rows you can mark them You can sort the rows in the table according to different columns by clicking on the column headers or filter out unwanted records by using the query devices gt To create a Table 1 Pre
80. here one new column will be created in the new table To change the way the measurements are calculated right click on the Method and select a different method from the list or use Ctrl click to select multiple methods Click OK Option Description Identity Each unique value in the chosen column produces a row in the generated table You can choose more than one column Doing so means that Loading Data the new table will have a separate row for each unique combination of values in the chosen columns Category Each unique value in the chosen column produces a new column in the generated table Selecting more than one column means that the new table will have a separate column for each unique combination of values in the chosen columns Values The column selected under Values is the column from which the data is pulled It is possible to select more than one Value column The values in the generated table are always computed as the average of values in the original table unless the original values are strings If so values in the generated table will consist of concatenated strings To change the way the values are calculated right click on the Method and select a different method from the list or use Ctrl click to select multiple methods Other Columns This option allows you to include an overall average of a particular measurement for each row in the generated table For each column selected here one new column will be
81. in DecisionSite this is the only alternative available The number of tools that can be run silently without input from the end user of the Guide will increase in coming releases of Analysis Builder Click OK Response The Tool Option dialog is closed Click OK Response The link is added to the Guide contents list 293 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 5 2 8 9 5 2 9 9 5 3 9 5 3 1 294 Open and Publish Guides to the Library The Library introduces convenient publishing of analysis material Guides can be published to the Library for sharing with your colleagues Located in the Library the Guide can be opened by anyone with read access gt To open Guides from Library in Analysis Builder 1 In Analysis Builder select Guide gt Open from Library 2 Inthe Open from Library Dialog locate the Guide you want to open and click Open Response The Guide is opened in Analysis Builder Note Only Guides created with Analysis Builder can be opened gt To publish Guides to the Library 1 In Analysis Builder select Guide gt Publish to Library 2 Inthe Publish to Library Wizard Step 1 2 browse to the location where you want to publish the Guide 3 Inthe Guide Title text box enter the name of the Guide and click Next gt Please enter properties of your Guide in Publish to Library Wizard Step 2 2 5 Click Finish Response Your Guide is published to the Library 6 Inthe Publish
82. included query devices select one by clicking t on it and move it up or down by clicking on the or H button 329 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 10 4 6 3 Poster Details on Demand 330 There are two kinds of Details on Demand windows that can be included in the Poster Table or Web Search Select the one you want from the drop down list Table This option includes a standard Details on Demand window in which the information about marked records in the visualization is displayed in a table Web Search The Web Search Details on Demand can be configured to send a query to an external web site to search for information about marked records For example you can link to a search engine such as Google or an MDL ISIS database in order to view molecular structures You can create several customized Details on Demand web searches which will appear in the drop down list Either you select a pre configured one from the drop down list or you select the Add new option which lets you configure a new Web Search Details on Demand Note The DecisionSite administrator can setup preconfigured ISIS Direct Details on Demand options from the Library Administrator tool Such options will appear in the drop down menu automatically for all Poster authors and can easily be selected when publishing a new Poster Please see the DecisionSite Installation and Upgrade manual for information on how to do this Details on Demand
83. into your expression with the Insert Variable button Select a category of functions to limit the choices in the Functions list All Operators Math Functions Statistical Functions Text Functions Logical Functions Date amp Time Functions Conversion Functions Select a function by clicking on it and click the Insert Function button to insert it to the Expression field You can also double click on a function to insert it If you place the cursor at a specific location in the Expression field the function will be inserted there 127 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 128 Description Expression Target type Result Recent expressions Insert Provides a brief description of the selected function For more detailed descriptions please see Spotfire Expression Language SXL This is the text field in which you build your expression You can insert variables and functions to it from the lists or enter text as in any standard text editor Cut Copy Paste works in the field using standard Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Highlighting a section of the expression and clicking Insert Function will add the selected function to the expression with the highlighted section as an argument Also Undo Redo functionality is available by pressing Ctrl Z Note Very long expressions will be displayed truncated in the Visualization Legend To avoid this insert a blank space with suitable distance This will not
84. is clearer and it doesn t break compatibility with the old one Bottom line In plain English this means you can use this library in commercial closed source applications 1 2 2 WebFX Menu 4 22 and 4 30 from WebFx Microsoft Permissive License Ms PL Published October 18 2005 This license governs use of the accompanying software If you use the software you accept this license If you do not accept the license do not use the software 1 Definitions The terms reproduce reproduction and distribution have the same meaning here as under U S copyright law You means the licensee of the software Licensed patents means any TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Microsoft patent claims which read directly on the software as distributed by Microsoft under this license 2 Grant of Rights A Copyright Grant Subject to the terms of this license including the license conditions and limitations in section 3 Microsoft grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free copyright license to reproduce the software prepare derivative works of the software and distribute the software or any derivative works that you create B Patent Grant Subject to the terms of this license including the license conditions and limitations in section 3 Microsoft grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under licensed patents to make have made use practice sell and offer for sale and or otherwise disp
85. is exported as a JPG or BMP image file A Save As dialog is opened and you can navigate to where you want to save your image Exports the settings of the query devices as an SQL query Exports the legend An image of the legend the description of which columns are used for size color etc is exported as a JPG or BMP image file A Save As dialog is opened and you can navigate to where you want to save your image Exports data as Tab Separated Values A Save As dialog opens and you can save all the records in the data set as tab separated text Exports the selected visualizations to PowerPoint See Exporting Visualizations to PowerPoint Exports the selected visualizations to Microsoft Word See Exporting Visualizations to Word Exports the visualization as a Web Page Changes the report layout Displays full pages Shows a preview of the visualization as it will be printed with the settings that will apply Prints the active visualization A Print dialog is opened where you can choose printer and printer settings Switch to another DecisionSite Log out of the current DecisionSite Analytics Server Log into a DecisionSite Analytics Server Change your current password to a new one Opens the Add Software tool where Spotfire Administrators can enter a product key to unlock more features to Spotfire DecisionSite The four most recently opened documents can be opened from the list Quit the application
86. link the Analysis can easily be referenced in email discussions or from web pages or portals Using the links retrieved with Copy Link Analyses can be accessed from any web environment using the URL and name supplied Send Email Launches a new email with your default email client Close Closes the notification dialog If you want to send an email notification click on the Send Email button This opens an email dialog where you may enter To The email address of one or more recipients separated by comma or semicolon From Your own email address mandatory Subject The subject of the email Comment Any additional text you wish to appear in the email Saving and Exporting Data gt To reach the Publish to Library Wizard Analysis Published dialog 1 Click File gt Publish Analysis to Library 2 Inthe Publish Analysis to Library Step 1 2 select Library location enter a title and click Next gt 3 Edit the Analysis properties in Publish Analysis to Library Step 2 2 and click Finish 10 4 Publish Poster to Library 10 4 1 Publishing Posters to the Library Publishing a DecisionSite Poster of your Analysis enables your colleagues to participate in your decision process from a Microsoft Internet Explorer window Note The Library functionality is not available if you are working offline without a connection to a server Note To open this tool and publish DecisionSite Posters a license is required Plea
87. linked to a data source These can only be applied from the Data Conditioning dialog i e you must specify a data source before using them gt To move a favorite to a different folder 1 Highlight a favorite 2 Click Change Group 3 Select a group from the list or enter a new group name gt To remove a favorite 1 Highlight a favorite 2 Click Delete 3 3 5 Text File Formatting 3 3 5 1 General Text File Specifications A data set imported into Spotfire DecisionSite consists of the following One line containing the name of each column optional One declaration line describing the type of data in each column optional The first two single lines make up the header If the original data set has no header i e it consists of raw data Spotfire DecisionSite will name the columns Column1 Column2 One line per data record Carriage return followed by Line feed end each row Note e The type declaration is case insensitive e Data sets must contain at least 3 rows to be valid Add an empty row if you need to import a data set with 2 rows e The number of columns present in the first row determines the number of columns used in the entire data set Additional columns in subsequent rows will be ignored Therefore make sure the first row contains the correct number of columns e The first row of a data set must never be empty i e it should only contain a row break or similar The following are examples of we
88. more than one record is marked the records are separated by the web link delimiter in the query gt To send a query using Web Links l 2 In a visualization mark those records you want to search for information about Select Tools gt Web Links Response The Web Links dialog is displayed Click to select the link to the web site where you want the query to be sent Comment Some web sites only allow you to search for one item at a time If you do not get any hits from a search mark one record at a time in the visualizations and try again Select the Identifier column that you want to use as input to the query Comment You can choose from any column in your data set Click OK Response The query is sent to the web site and the results are displayed in a new web browser 8 1 2 2 Setting Up a New Web Link gt To set up a new web link 1 Select Tools gt Web Links Response The Web Links dialog is displayed Click Options Response The Web Links Options dialog is displayed Click New Response A New web link is created and selected in the list of Available web links Comment The Preview helps you see what the finished query will look like when it is sent Edit the name of the new link in the Web link name text box Edit the URL to the web link Comment A dollar sign within curly brackets should be used as placeholder for the ID Anything you enter between the left bracket and the dollar s
89. name and use the controls described below to control that column Click on the headers e g Column Type etc to sort the columns accordingly Enter any text that you want to associate with this column This text will appear when you place the mouse pointer over the paper clip icon next to a query device Displays a paper clip icon in the upper right corner of the query device when the column has an annotation and displays the letter e when the column contains empty values Shows what query device type is assigned to the selected column in the list Shows or hides all records were a value is missing in the selected column Toggles the query device associated with this column Allows you to enter a new name for the column Configures how to display the format for various columns Number Formatting Date and Time Formatting Date Formatting or Time Formatting For example how to represent negative values number of decimal digits etc Visualizations Select one or more columns from the list click the Format button and select a formatting option to access the formatting dialog Note Formatting may change the perceived type of a column For example a date column will be presented as a string column when week day formatting is applied See Rearranging the Data by Formatting for more information Selecting Format gt None from the drop down menu resets the options to the default settings Scale Sets the scale of t
90. name of the element six of its properties and finally the coordinates of each element when the periodic table is printed in the familiar layout first suggested by Dimitri Mendeleev The text file contains the column names column types integer or string and the data itself Element Atomic Number Atomic Mass Atomic Radius Ionic Radius Ionization Energy Electronegativity P1l P2 STRING INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Ac 89 227 200 126 51 11 140 0 Ag 47 107 144 129 75 18 630 80 Al 13 27 143 67 60 16 750 160 This data is stored in one of the data formats recognized by Spotfire DecisionSite This particular example can be found in the directory named Data General Periodic Table in the Spotfire DecisionSite distribution as periodic csv Loading a data set gt To load a data set into Spotfire DecisionSite 1 Start Spotfire DecisionSite by selecting Spotfire DecisionSite from Programs in the Windows Start menu or by double clicking the Spotfire DecisionSite icon on the desktop 2 Select File gt Open in the Spotfire DecisionSite main window The File open dialog will appear 3 The folder Data will be shown in the DecisionSite directory 4 Browse to the folder General Periodic Periodic Table 5 Select the file periodic csv and click the Open button Spotfire DecisionSite will automatically set up an initial visualization where each record is represented by a marker along with a number of query de
91. of calculation for your column Ctrl click to select multiple methods Use values in the following columnis Method right click to change Ctrl click t Year Integer Averat C Cadmium Integer Averac CO Chome Integer Averac Average Integer Averac Count all values Gtrl click to multiselect Count rows Transfer the following column s ihe lea First value Name Type Metho i Cadmium Integer Avera Maximum y M Chrome Integer Averac Median M InChrome Integer Avera Merge all values C Copper Integer Averac Merge unique values Minimum value Most common value Standard deviation Sum all Working with the Data gt To reach the Tall Skinny gt Short Wide dialog Select Data gt Pivot Data 7 6 Depivot Data 7 6 1 Depivot Data Overview Pivoting in its simplest form means rotating a table While the Pivot Data tool transforms a table from the tall skinny variant to the short wide form the Depivot Data tool does the opposite While most tools in DecisionSite require that data is short and wide there may be occasions when you want to view data in a different form such as a bar chart visualization showing different years on the x axis 7 6 2 Using Depivot Data 7 6 2 1 Depivoting the Data Set gt To depivot the current data set 1 ce Select Data gt Depivot Data Response The Depivot Short Wide gt Tall Skinny dialog is opened In the Available columns lis
92. one or more entire rows which equals one or many records Making a record Active When you click on a row a black triangle appears at both ends of the selected row to indicate that it is active Information about the row is displayed in the Details on Demand window Time 1 Time2 Time3 Marking Records By clicking and holding the mouse button while the mouse pointer is on a row and dragging it to cover several rows these rows all become marked This is indicated by a small bar shown at the left and right of the rows in question Details on these records are shown in the Details on Demand window By right clicking in a visualization a pop up menu appears This context menu lets you access many features in a fast and easy way Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 Show hide deselected records Records that have been deselected by using the query devices become gray default color in the heat map To hide these records clear the Show deselected check box in the Heat Map tab of the Properties dialog Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 Note If you have had a dendrogram associated to the heat map this will no longer be valid after hiding the deselected values In this case the dendrogram tree will be removed You can show the dendrogram again by selecting the Show deselected check box 67 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Row Labels It is possible to show row labels either to the left or to the right of the
93. opening information links with run time filters that prompt for values or value range see Filtering Data During Retrieval it is possible to use the visual capabilities of Spotfire DecisionSite to set these values gt To use the current visualization for filter definition l 2 Open a suitable data set in DecisionSite Choose a subset of data either by using the query devices or by marking records Comment Marking means clicking and dragging a rectangle around a group of markers in a visualization Open the information link When the Set Filter for Column dialog for the desired column appears click Get Values or Get Range Response The Get Values from Data Set dialog is displayed From the Matching column drop down list select the column in the visualized data set from which you want to get the values or the range Click Selected records or Marked records depending on which values you want to use 3 4 2 4 Using Users of Loading Data Click OK In the Set Filter for Column dialog click Next gt or Finish if this is the last prompted column Repeat steps 4 to 8 for each column that has a run time filter Response The data is loaded and displayed in a visualization Structure Search DecisionSite for Lead Discovery can use structure search in run time filters This means using substructure or similarity search to limit the data set to chemical structures of a particular type gt To use a ru
94. or 304 9 5 3 11 9 5 3 11 1 Guides e in Analysis Builder click Guide gt Open from Library Note Opening a Guide in Analysis Builder will open the Guide for editing in Analysis Builder and not to the Guides pane as in the previous cases Publish to Library Wizard Publish to Library Wizard Step 1 2 This wizard helps you to publish a Guide in the Library Using the Library your colleagues can use your Guide from a Library Section This step lets you specify where in the Library your Guide should be published Navigate in the Library by double clicking on Library Sections and folders Note Only Guides created with Analysis Builder are available Publish to Library Step 1 2 x Home gt General DecisionSite New Folder f Properties Q Members Type Title Description a z Actresses and film popularity Example Do a drill down on interesti Guide title Football Help Bach Next gt Cancel Options New Folder Members Guide title Description Creates a new folder where you can publish your Guide A dialog will prompt you for the new folder name Note The New Folder button is only displayed inside a Library Section Lists all users with at least read access to the current Library Section Each Library Section has its own set of access permissions Note The Members button is only displayed inside a Library Section The name of the Guide as it will be displayed in the Librar
95. rather than the amount of change 63 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 5 64 g Car s Value Mileage z 15000 14000 0 8 12500 R 12000 22000 10000 10000 38000 7500 8000 65000 6000 80000 ies 4000 102000 2500 2000 120000 0 138000 0 0 25000 50000 75000 100000 125000 Mileage Y The above picture demonstrates how line charts can be used Say for example that you want to show how fast a car devaluates the more mileage it gets The line chart shows that according to this set of data the longer a car is driven the more its value decreases gt Make a new line chart in one of the following ways e Press Ctrl 6 on the keyboard e Click the New Line Chart button on the toolbar amp e Select New Line Chart from the Visualization menu By right clicking in a visualization a pop up menu appears This context menu lets you access many features in a fast and easy way Profile Charts A profile chart maps each record as a line or profile Each attribute of a record is represented by a point on the line This makes profile charts similar in appearance to line charts but the way data is translated into a plot is substantially different Consider for example a data set with three different applicants for a job position Through tests or interviews the recruiter may have provided percentage estimates of each candidate in terms of experience social competence and creativity The data may look as
96. real Example Real 1 23 gt 1 23 Real 2 gt 2 0 Real 0 gt ARG syntax error Real null gt NULL Substitutes errors Returns Arg if it is not an error Arg2 otherwise Arg and Arg2 can be of any type but must both be of the same type or null The result is of the same type as the arguments Example SE 1 2 gt 1 SE null 2 gt NULL SE 0 0 2 gt 2 Substitutes null values Returns Arg if it is not null String Arg1 Time Arg1 TimeStamp Arg1 7 4 4 5 Reserved Words Import Result Template Type null true false 7 4 4 6 Errors and Null Working with the Data Arg2 otherwise Arg and Arg2 can be of any type but must both be of the same type or null The result is of the same type as the arguments Example SN 1 2 gt 1 SN null 2 gt 2 SN 0 0 2 gt NUM Converts Arg to a string This conversion never fails except if Arg is null Arg can be of any type and the result is of type string Example String 1 23 gt 1 23 String null gt NULL Converts Arg to a time If the conversion fails an error is returned Arg can be of type String or TimeStamp and the result is of type Time Ifa TimeStamp is specified the date part is removed See also date amp time functions Example Time 11 37 00 gt 11 37 00 Time 10 gt ARG conversion error Time null gt NULL Time 2003 03 21 11 37 00 gt 11 37 00 Converts
97. representing low electronegative potential in the visualization Introduction Query Devices x Type to search Atomic Number i 1 89 Atomic Mass 1 227 Let Atomic Radius 31 269 lonic Radius 0 206 lonization Energy 2 3 7 Creating a New Visualization gt To create a new visualization 1 Select a visualization type from the Visualization menu For this example select New 3D Scatter Plot 2 Reassign the X axis to Electronegativity the Y axis to Ionization Energy and the Z axis along the top of the visualization to Jonic Radius 3 View the plot from different angles by pressing Shift and or Ctrl dragging with the right mouse button 13 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Sa nm lonization Energy The 3D plot created in this example will cover the 2D plot but you can show both plots by selecting Window gt Auto Tile If you move your mouse pointer over one of the markers in the 2D plot the corresponding marker will also be highlighted in the 3D view If you activate one element in the 2D plot by clicking on it you can move the circle indicating the active element using the arrow keys 2 3 8 Checklist for Exploring New Data The following steps are typically helpful when exploring a new data set especially if its content is unknown gt To explore a new data set 1 Start off by selecting different combinations of visualization axes to reveal patterns trends and an
98. spotfire net or a company specific Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server Microsoft Internet Explorer on the client should be configured to access the Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server via the standard Web connection The security settings in Microsoft Internet Explorer for accessing the Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server should be set to Medium Security This includes enabling ActiveScripting enabling cookies and enabling the download of signed ActiveX components Downloading signed ActiveX components and scripts from the Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server must be allowed through the firewall Other requirements You must have Administrator privileges to install Spotfire DecisionSite Microsoft PowerPoint must be installed on the computer in order to use the PowerPoint presentation tool Microsoft Word must be installed on the computer in order to use the Word presentation tool 2 3 Getting Started 2 3 1 Logging In Logging In When you start Spotfire DecisionSite a login dialog appears First select which DecisionSite Analytics Server you want to log into by clicking on the Server drop down list Usually you will only have one server so there might not be a need to choose You can also add a new server if you need to by clicking on the Server drop down list selecting Add new and typing in the location and name of the new server Then type your User ID and Password and click on the Login button to start Spotfire DecisionSit
99. state no zooming Opens the Properties dialog to the Trellis tab Marked Record s gt gt Delete Del gt Unmark Ctrl E gt Invert Ctrl I gt Select Ctrl M gt New Column gt Create New Portfolio List gt Add to Portfolio List Show Deselected Annotate Copy Ctrl C Duplicate Visualization Reset Navigation Properties Alt Enter Table visualizations Option Marked Records gt Hotkey Quick Reference where you can split the visualization to display different subsets of your data Deletes the set of marked records The marked records are removed from the data set in Spotfire DecisionSite s memory This operation cannot be undone but does not affect the original data unless that file is intentionally overwritten with the diminished data Resets the set of marked records No records will be marked after you have executed this operation Inverts the set of marked records Marks all unmarked records and unmarks the set of marked records Sets the selection to the marked records Creates a temporary filter so that only the marked records are visible Opens the New Column from Marked Records dialog where you can add a new column showing whether records are included in the marked group or not Creates a new list with the marked records to the Portfolio The list is placed as the last item on root level Adds the marked records from the visualization into your currently active P
100. that hour and minute be specified Optionally seconds and fractions of seconds can be included The fractions must be in the range of real values and must begin with a period or the decimal separator defined by the regional settings in Windows In addition to a colon separator as above it is also possible to use a decimal point or no character at all AM or PM can optionally be specified at the end of a time string Time must be within legal values For example 13 00 AM is not supported Negative times are not supported Examples Accepted Not accepted 14 05 32 6 14 05 32 6 14 05 25 05 140532 140532 6 2 05 32 PM 14 05 32 PM 2 05 32 AM 14 05 32 AM 5D The display format of a Time column can be changed in the Time Format dialog Date Please see the Remarks section following the formats table for more information on priority formats and other important details of the formats It is recommended that you use Long ISO formats since there is no ambiguity in these When type guessing a text file that is being imported DecisionSite makes a qualified guess of any dates contained by analyzing the format of the following first non empty 100 values in each column DecisionSite checks to see how many matches each of the following format receives and then chooses the one with the most matches If several formats should receive the same amount of matches then DecisionSite will choose the date format according to the Interpretation Priority
101. the conditioning variable will yield a separate subset Adding a second condition will split each subset etc If for example two Boolean variables are used as conditioning variables this will result in four separate plots representing the combinations True True True False False True and False 104 Visualizations False If a Boolean variable is used in conjunction with a variable that has five different values this will yield ten plots From this follows that variables with a continuous distribution and a wide range of values e g Real values should be binned before forming a Trellis plot Otherwise the number of plots quickly becomes unmanageable gt To add a condition 1 In the Properties dialog under the Trellis tab click Add 2 Inthe Trellis condition dialog select a variable and a dimension to bind it to 3 Optionally use the radio buttons in the Heading box to control what information to show in the heading for this variable 4 Click OK Trellis condition x m Condition Variable Bioavailability E Bind to Rows ud I Show empty values m Heading C Show variable name C Show variable value Show variable name and value Help Cancel Empty values Selecting the Show empty values option will generate an extra trellis panel containing records for which the conditioning variable is undefined gt To remove a condition 1 Select a condition from the list on the
102. the range The records in the range will be marked Keyboard only Move the active record to the first record in the range using the up and down arrow keys Press the Spacebar to mark this record and to start a new marking session Hold down the Shift key while pressing the up down arrow keys The records will be marked one after another gt To mark multiple records Keyboard mouse Drag the mouse over the records in the first range Hold down the Ctrl key and drag over another range The records will be added to the set of marked records Alternative Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on individual records This will include the clicked records in the set of marked records Keyboard only Mark a range of records as described above Continue to move the active record with the arrow keys Hold down the Ctrl key and press the Space key to add the currently active record to the set of marked records Properties Dialog Annotations Tab Annotations Tab Edit gt Properties gt Annotations tab Visualizations Properties Research 2004 03 Trellis Axes 3D Markers Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Visualization title Research 2004 03 Append axes names to visualization title Annotation This is the research done on the samples taken in 2004 03 You can give any visualization a title and an annotation The title will appear as the caption of the window It can also
103. the Data and Background tab of the Properties dialog applies only to the HTML Details on Demand not to the text Details on Demand 197 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 6 4 6 5 HTML Spotfire DecisionSite can display the data for active or marked records as an HTML formatted document in the details frame This is initialized by selecting View gt Details on Demand Html Spotfire DecisionSite uses the HTML template specified for the data set to lay out the information If no template has been defined the application will provide a default template for the type of visualization that is active Details on Demand Html x Pb Name Atomic number Atomic mass Atomic radius Ionic radius Ionization energy Electronegativity It is also possible to launch an external browser such as Netscape or Internet Explorer to view the details of the data To do so select View gt Details on Demand External Browser Editing HTML Templates The HTML templates used for formatting record details are accessed and edited through the Data and Background tab of the Properties dialog box There are six editable templates one each for Pie highlighted pie details Bar highlighted bar details Active Marker these are individual records in scatter plots profile charts line charts tables or heat maps that have been clicked on Marked Records Header the header part of the Deta
104. the Information Library or the Information Builder the created Guide will include a reference to the information link or the actual query respectively If the information link is prompted the end users of the Guide will see the prompts and be able to make their own selection There is however no reference to the server that the Information Link is located on so if you intend to distribute your Guide containing information links to users who work on a different server to your own you must copy the Information Model to their server For more information on copying data layers see the chapter Information Designer of the Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server Administrator s Guide and contact your DecisionSite Analytics Server administrator If you want the end user of the Guide to be able to choose a different information link you should instead include a link that starts the tool Information Library To make the action Start Information Library appear in the Actions in DecisionSite list start the tool once more after opening the information link that you used when creating the Guide and select Cancel in the Information Library dialog Open data saved with Guide If a data set has been opened by some other means than by opening an information link you will have the option to save the data with the Guide This means that the data set that you are currently using will be a part of the Guide file This can be useful for reference data that are
105. the Legend displays information about their relevant parameters For example in Bar Charts the Legend states what the height of the bars represents and in Pie Charts the Legend states if the size of a pie corresponds to a certain parameter Also if the plot has any active Statistical Measures these will be described in the Legend Scatter Plot Color by Subject im Action im Adventure C Comedy im Crime im Drama E Fantasy Horror Legend m Music C Mystery m Romance Science Fiction im Short m War im Western im Westerns E Empty gt To display the Legend window Select View gt Legend 7 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 2 1 Working with the Data Working with the Data Add Columns Add Columns Overview The Add Columns tool allows you to incorporate new columns into your current data set Data can be added from a file from the clipboard or by being opened and conditioned using advanced data import The new columns are appended to the data set Note When you are using the Add Columns tool it is not possible to save the resulting data set as linked data Only embedded data is supported See Saving Spotfire files for more information Using Add Columns Adding Columns from a File Note The matching of values in the selected ID columns is case sensitive If existing record IDs are missing in the file which is merged into the data set the values in the new column will
106. the Regional Properties of your system Years may range from 100 to 9999 The display format of a Date column can be changed in the Date Format dialog 3 3 6 4 DateTime DateTimes are also known as TimeStamps Formats DATE TIME DATE TIME Where DATE is any date as described above and TIME is any time as described above Note that there must be at least one of the following between both main groups a single Space a single Slash Multiple Spaces are allowed and ignored but multiple Slashes are illegal Type strings datetime timedate timestamp sfTimeStamp Remarks The DateTime format is used to combine date and time in a single data column In previous documentation it has been referred to as TimeStamp A value is accepted as DateTime even if it lacks the Time component Examples DateTime Interpreted as 99 08 07 11 01 32 6 August 7 1999 11 01 32 600 99 08 07 11 01 32 August 7 1999 11 01 32 08 07 99 11 01 August 7 1999 11 01 00 35 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 3 6 5 36 08 07 99 11 01 32 6 PM August 7 1999 23 01 32 600 99 08 07 11 01 August 7 1999 11 01 00 990807 11 01 32 6 August 7 1999 11 01 32 600 990807 110132 AM August 7 1999 11 01 32 07 aug 99 11 01 August 7 1999 11 01 00 The display format of a DateTime column can be changed in the Date and Time Format dialog String Format Any string of characters with or without quotation marks Type strings strin
107. the background on the label You can also adjust the transparency of the background using the slider Allows you to change the color of the frame surrounding the label as well as the line leading to the border The transparency of the border can also be adjusted Select this check box to use the same color on the label frame and line as is used on each item Note In bar charts only the segment labels will be affected by this setting not the bar labels Adjusts the thickness of the surrounding frame Adjusts the thickness of the line leading from the marker to the label Allows you to change the color of the label text 4 8 8 Details Columns Tab 4 8 8 1 Details Columns Tab Edit gt Properties gt Details Columns tab 129 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 130 Properties Age Distribution x Trellis Annotations Available columns Age group Gender Customer age Recency Total Date joined Option Available columns Columns in Details on Demand Add gt gt lt lt Remove Remove All Move First Move Up Name Type Integer First buy Date String Number of purchases Integer Integer Business location String Add gt gt Groceries Integer Integer Garden Integer Date lt lt Remove Furniture Integer Electronics Integer Remove All Toys Integer Receipt average Integer Bars Bar Chart Columns Data and Background Columns Details Columns Col
108. the columns numeric or alphanumeric continuous or discrete you may need to resort to different methods to rearrange the data Spotfire DecisionSite provides a variety of binning methods Specific Limits This option allows you to explicitly enter the values of the limits to use for each bin Enter the value you wish to use for the limits of your bins and separate them with a semicolon Do not use a space character after the semicolon Even Intervals The subranges suggested are equal in scope This is the default method dividing the value range into equal intervals and works for all data types except string The current data range is divided up into the desired number of bins Empty values will be empty in the new column and when loading data sets from external sources linked data new values will be placed inside the bin or in the upper and lower bin respectively Even Distribution The suggested division works for all data types and is made so that the bins each contain an equal number of unique values Extra values are placed in the final bins so if you have four values and you want three bins with one value in each bin your final value will be placed in the third bin Empty values will be empty in the new column and when loading data sets from external sources linked data the even distribution will be recalculated Cherry Picking This method works for all data types and allows you to manually select which value to put in each
109. the height width ratio of the exported image will be the same as that of the visualization on screen Click OK 5 Select a location name and format for the file The formats available are Windows BMP JPEG and PNG Tip The current visualization can be copied to the Windows Clipboard as a vector graphic Windows Metafile to be pasted into another application This is accomplished through the Copy Special gt Visualization option under the Edit menu In the Metafile format each block of text marker line etc is an independent object that can be manipulated 10 10 Export Database Queries The current query device settings can be exported as a SQL database query This is done by selecting the Export gt SQL Query option from the File menu When you do this a dialog containing the query appears The query can be edited at this stage by clicking in the edit box and entering or erasing text By clicking Save As the query can be saved to the file system Tip Also note other Export options can be found under the File menu 343 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Generated Select Statement xi SELECT FROM Embedded a where 18 lt MOLREGNO and MOLREGNO lt 1753 and 284 644618181818 lt mw isis and mw isis lt 647 2967 and 193 2475 lt mw sasa and mw sasa lt 455 656024675325 and 3 56282077922078 lt Dipole moment Gast and Dipole moment Gast lt 22 lt Nof_atoms and Nof
110. the order the lines are displayed Move Down Select a column from the right list and press the Move Down button to move it a step down This changes the order the lines are displayed Move Last Select a column from the right list and press the Move Last button to move it to the bottom This changes the order the lines are displayed 4 8 14 Markers Tab of the Line chart 4 8 14 1 Markers Tab of the Line chart Edit gt Properties gt Markers tab Properties Line Chart x Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Lines Markers Line Chart Columns Color Markers Marked color m I Show markers Deselected color Min Size Max Show deselected i m Scale mode Jitter C Ohne for all None Max Individual 4 Labels Line connection cy ie Connect by iN one gt C Marked records Allrecords max 20 j labels Order by kai IV Break on empty values Color i IV Break on deselected values Option Description Color The colors used for drawing marked and deselected records are edited here Whether deselected records should be drawn or not is determined with the Show Deselected check box Note the color used to plot the records is the same as the connecting line and thus configured on a per column basis on the Lines tab Scale mode The line chart works in two modes one in which all columns are plotted against a common Y axis and on
111. the pop up menu that appears select Set Property gt Search Options gt Ignore case By using this alternative different query devices can have different settings When you save the visualization the settings for each query device are saved in the SFS file and will remain when you open the file again However since the case sensitivity and regular expression settings are not available in versions older than DecisionSite 7 1 the full text search query devices in older SFS files opened in DecisionSite 7 1 or later will be based on the default settings in the Advanced options tab Note When a query device is changed into a full text search query device the Show Empty Values option from the Properties dialog is automatically set to False This means that empty values are not included in the search result Using the Full text Slider The slider integrated in the full text search query device is really just an item slider with one important difference the scope of the slider corresponds to the result of the full text search This means that if you set the slider in its leftmost position All all items that match the search criteria will be shown which doesn t necessarily mean all the records in the data set Use the slider to select individual items among those that match the search criteria Drag the upper portion and the scrolling will be rapid If the search has resulted in many hits some will not appear with the coarse selector When
112. the sum of the arguments The arguments and the result are of type real Null arguments are ignored and do not contribute to the sum Example Sum 1 gt 1 Sum 1 5 2 3 gt 2 5 Sum 1 null 3 gt 4 Sum null gt NULL Returns the tangent of Arg where Arg is an angle expressed in radians The argument and the result are of type real Description Returns the average arithmetic mean of the arguments The arguments and the result are of type real Null arguments are ignored and do not contribute to the average Example Average 1 gt 1 Average 1 5 2 3 5 gt 1 Average 1 null 3 gt 2 Average null gt NULL Returns the largest of the arguments The argument and the result are of type real Null arguments are ignored 229 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Min Arg 7 4 4 4 3 Logical Functions Function And Argl If Argl Arg2 Arg3 IsError Expr1 IsNull Arg1 230 Example Max 1 gt 1 Max 1 5 2 3 gt 3 Max 1 null 3 gt 3 Max null gt NULL Returns the smallest of the arguments The argument and the result are of type real Null arguments are ignored Example Min 1 gt 1 Min 1 5 2 3 gt 2 Min 1 null 3 gt 1 Min null gt NULL Description Returns the logical And of the arguments If any argument is false the result is false Otherwise if any argument is null the res
113. this Select whether you want the description to be the column name once imported into Spotfire DecisionSite Click Next gt Response The Import Data Data Conditioning dialog is opened Select a conditioning method if desired and click Finish Response The data from the selected SAS file is imported into Spotfire DecisionSite as a new data set 3 5 2 Loading Data SAS Data Import Column Selection Dialog x Available SAS columns Imported columns Type Column name Column name Description String Tot_HHs Total Number of Househ String Pct_Female Add gt gt Dec R Pct_Under18 String Pct_Over62 string USPS ZIP Code 3 digit State Tot_Pop Median_HHInc Per_Capita_Income Pct_Minority Pct_NoEnglish Pct_ForeignBorn Pct_NoCollege Pct_Unemployed Avg_HHSize Avg_HHInc Pct_Poor Pct_PoorFamilies Median_HomeValue 4vg_HomeValue File C Census Data Census sas bdat Help Option Available SAS columns Enter text here Y Add gt gt lt lt Remove Add All Remove All Move Up Move Down File lt lt Remove Dec Mean_PovertyRatio Add All Remove All Move U ik EE NE Move Down Import settings IV Map data to Spotfire compatible types IV Use Description as column name if available lt Back IT Next gt Cancel Description The columns in the SAS file available to be imported into Spotfire DecisionSite Clic
114. to Selection from the pop up menu To zoom in on one side but not on the other double click on the left or right drag box gt Resetting the zoom bar span 1 Double click on the center of the zoom bar 0 36 0 34 032 03 b 4 ter Plot 165 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 9 3 166 Response The zoom bar now expands to its full length 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Scatter Plot Tip You can also right click on the Zoom bar and select Reset Zooming from the pop up menu Note By double clicking on the left or right drag box of the zoom bar you can narrow down the left or right span gt Setting the zoom bar to a specific value 1 Click on an end arrow of the zoom bar 2 Type the desired value The scatter plot and the zoom bar are now adjusted to show the value you entered Note Note that no edit field will appear in which to type the value Simply type the value after clicking a temporary ToolTip will be displayed and the slider will adjust itself to the specified number gt Setting the Data Range to Selected records 1 Move the drag box of the zoom bar to narrow the selection 2 Right click on the zoom bar 3 Select Data Range from Zooming from the pop up menu The zoom bar expands to its full width but with the Data Range set to encompass only the selected records Three dots are displayed to indicate that the range is not the original full range gt To reset the Data R
115. to use the wildcard characters and in the search Moves selected columns from the Available columns field to the field next to the button Removes a column and brings it back to the Available columns field Removes all columns from the selected columns fields The selected columns containing the values that you wish to combine into a single column The column names of these columns will be used 247 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Tf 7 7 1 7 7 2 7 7 2 1 248 transform Keep NULL values Columns to pass through Category column name contains old column names Value column name Type as category values in the resulting new category column Typically this might be a number of columns containing the same type of data For example sales figures for different years Select this check box to transfer empty values to the depivoted data view If the check box is cleared all records containing empty values will be discarded The selected columns containing information that should be transferred to the depivoted data set without any transformation This could be ID columns categorical information such as Region Priority etc Type a column name that summarize the information provided in the columns that you have selected to transform For instance Year could be used when sales figures for several different years are to be combined to a single column Type a column name that shows wh
116. unmarked records and unmarks the set of marked records Sets the selection to the marked records Creates a gt New Column gt Create New Portfolio List gt Add to Portfolio List Sort gt Descending gt Ascending gt Reverse gt Reset Annotate Copy Ctrl C Duplicate Visualization Properties Alt Enter Pie charts Option Hotkey Zoom gt gt Reset Zooming Trellis Marked Record s gt gt Delete Del gt Unmark Ctrl E Quick Reference temporary filter so that only the marked records are visible Opens the New Column from Marked Records dialog where you can add a new column showing whether records are included in the marked group or not Creates a new list with the marked records to the Portfolio The list is placed as the last item on root level Adds the marked records from the visualization into your currently active Portfolio list Sorts the bars from the highest to the lowest bar Sorts the bars from the lowest to the highest bar Reverses the current sort order Resets the sorting to the original order Opens the Properties dialog to the Annotations tab where you can provide the visualization with a description of your choice Copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format It also copies an image of the visualization to the clipboard which can be pasted i
117. used to set the color of the marker If the value of a marker is included in several ranges the gradient with the highest start value is selected However if multiple gradients exist with the same low start value the gradient with the lowest end value is selected Also note that categorical values are more important than continuous ones In other words if you have a value that you have set to a specific categorical color this color will be used even if the value is also defined within a color range Visualizations Example x Ranges BB nin v max E Add 1 227 ae I Jejete Marked os im min 19 v max 197 v I E mpty 20 30 Lo _ min 29 X max 167 v E Other st a Deselected Cc El min 19 v max 157 v E 20 70 Templates Import Export Help Close If you have set the Ranges as above e Value 1 is colored according to the first range e Value 20 is colored according to the third range e Value 30 is colored according to the last range When the dialog is opened the color gradients are sorted such that the highest priority is at the bottom next highest just above that and so on If new gradients are added the order is changed but you can restore the order by right clicking and selecting Sort gradients which will cause the list to reflect the drawing order 4 8 7 4 Shape and Rotation Edit gt Properties gt Markers tab Shape Fixed Customize By Pt z
118. uy gt Bar chart with categorical coloring displaying the Average Value line Total Sum Line Average Value Line When using categorical coloring and there are negative segments in the bar it can still be very useful to see how high the bar would be if all the positive and negative segments were summed up This is indicated by a black line crossing each bar If the bars are set to show the Sum of the values the line indicates the Total Sum and if the bars are set to show the average of the values the line indicates the Average Value Such a value can be both positive and negative Show deselected If you select the Show deselected check box a gray shadow will appear behind the regular bars This indicates how the bars would look if all the records in the data set are included Filtering with a query device or zooming in another plot deselects records in bars causing the bars to change but you can always compare them to the background shadows which remain the same 133 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual E 5 b 2000 um 5 1000 m il ag 0 IV Dallas 1000 M Seattle 2000 Revenue 3000 Iv 3000 V 1000 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 Iv 500 lM af First buy lv 1000 Jv 2000 Scatter Plot i Bar Chart J 2500 You can change the color of the shadow by clicking on the Customize color button in the Bars tab of the Properties dialog 4 8 9 3 Bar Chart Layout Details When categori
119. values to enable this function The Default button restores default threshold values and disables Auto hide Controlling default settings for new visualizations The Save button on the Visualization Settings tab of the Options dialog allows you to set the preferred initial settings for new visualizations The settings of the current visualization are used as a template for initial visualizations of similar type In this context 2D and 3D scatter plots are linked i e default settings for 3D visualizations will also apply to 2D scatter plots The following settings are saved for all visualizations e Color e g categorical or continuous coloring beginning and ending colors for continuous coloring marked and deselected marker color etc but not which column governs coloring e Size the size of markers but not which column governs size e Labels the label mode None Marked All the number of labels displayed and their color displacement orientation positioning and density e Gridtype show grid or not e Append axis names to visualization title e Show deselected whether or not deselected records should be displayed In addition marker shape is also saved for scatter plots outline or no outline is saved for bar charts scale mode is saved for profile charts and line charts as well as the show marker option for line charts No column specific settings are saved e g Rotate by is not saved since it refers to
120. you have made in the Prompt for dialog Example A data set containing height weight and eye color of a group of men and women is opened in DecisionSite and two visualizations are created The first visualization is a scatter plot with height on the X axis and weight on the Y axis and the markers are colored by eye color and sized by gender The second visualization is a table showing all available columns in the data set Guides A Guide created using Analysis Builder can be edited to prompt its end user to specify certain visualization settings as indicated below Settings in Properties dialog for visualization in DecisionSite r Sor amp a C ped C Doyan Coogee Br forte Caras F Showder yga Stace o fa z F Foai Costonsce ma Ce fo 2 Hoe _ t m F thee fy nve Mote ood 7 awecoda vag FT te Are commecton ty mizel te pew zj Oge me cio T seen bideetng aoan The Properties dialog of a scatter plot 5we gerda Siro heiii Desi magi ho Decired ap The Properties dialog of a table visualization Settings and titles specified in the Prompt Resulting Settings for dialog displayed upon running Guide for dialog rempt cer Scatter Mast height m we meighi kgh Prong uim bar Tite foe reu baki in prrangi daig F your Select ast F Ya Fiewes v a F Cotorty Coke raha by fre voles nihe loiorrg curn F ssy Ea ani y eire niei an
121. 1 The Check box query device presents a set of check boxes one for each unique value present in the column One or several boxes may be selected or cleared to determine which values are to appear in the visualizations If all records with a certain value are deselected by some other query device the label of that value becomes red Subject mV Action EV Adventure EV Comedy OW Crime SIV Drama EN Fantasy m V Horror mV Music OV Mystery values not present among currently selected records are highlighted in red lighter gray in black and white printing 187 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 5 6 5 7 188 A check box query device applied to the column Subject of the Film database Coloring is set to categorical ticking a check box causes all records of that particular color to show unless they are deselected by another query device By default Spotfire DecisionSite assigns check boxes to any column containing ten values or less Initially boxes all are selected which makes all records in the data set visible For quick selecting or clearing of all the values right click on the check boxes query device and select All or None from the pop up menu Like radio buttons check boxes provide options that are either On or Off Check boxes differ from radio buttons in that you typically use check boxes for independent or nonexclusive choices Radio Button In a radio button query device a radio but
122. 12 2 Line Charts Appearance Edit gt Properties gt Lines tab 143 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 12 3 144 On the Lines of the Properties dialog tab you set the properties for each column i e each line Select the column you want to edit and view the properties in the list boxes on the right Adjusting the controls will change the appearance of the selected column Color The color used for this column The column is used for lines and markers as well as for axis labels in the Individual Scale mode Line type Determines the type of the line used to connect points Alternatives None no line will be drawn Straight line points will be connected with a straight line Step points will be connected with a right angle The first line is horizontal Line width Indicates the width of the line in pixels The default setting is 1 Thick lines take considerably longer time to draw It is therefore a good idea to use a low value for Line width when viewing large data sets Marker Allows you to select a shape to use for markers If Marker is set to None no markers are shown in the plot Please note that no markers will be drawn unless Show Markers is turned on in the Markers tab Line Charts Layout Edit gt Properties gt Lines tab When Scale Mode is set to Individual see Markers property page it is possible to control the vertical position and amplitude of the plotted cu
123. 156 Delete Delete All Ranges Add Delete Delete All Other Color gt gt From palette gt Edit gt Fixed Deselected Marked Empty Templates gt gt Shared auto range Removes a selected value Ctrl click to select multiple items for deletion Deletes all items in the Values list Shows the color of the empty records Empty refers to records that have at least one empty field These records are not shown at all in visualizations where an axis corresponds to the missing field Adds a new item to the list of Ranges Using this you can assign specific colors to values and create your own coloring arrangement Removes a selected value Ctrl click to select multiple items for deletion Deletes all items in the Ranges list Determines which color is used for markers that do not get a color from any other setting The color a marker gets is decided in the following order Markers associated with a data row with empty null value in the color column are set to the empty color Markers filtered out by query devices or zoom sliders are set to the deselected color Marked items are drawn using the marked color Markers that are included in the value list are set to the color specified there The value list may include values that are not part of the current data set but you know those values could be included in a future data set thus it is possible to set up color arrangements that have predefined colors fo
124. 2 Argl gt Arg2 Argl lt Arg2 Argl gt Arg2 Argl Arg2 Argl lt gt Arg2 226 Subtracts Arg2 from Arg1 The arguments and the result are of type real Multiplies the two arguments The arguments and the result are of type real Divides Arg by Arg2 The arguments and the result are of type real Division by zero results in an error Example 7 2 gt 3 5 0 0 gt NUM 1 0 gt NUM Appends Arg2 to the end of Arg1 The arguments can be of any type but are converted to strings The result is of type string See also function Concatenate Example April amp 20 1 amp st gt April 21st null amp Ape gt NULL Returns true if Arg is less than Arg2 The arguments are of type real and the result is of type boolean The function is defined for comparing normal numbers to each other and to Infinity It is also defined for comparing Infinity to Infinity Other combinations result in errors or null Example 1 lt 2 gt true 1 lt null gt NULL 1 lt 1 0 gt true 1 0 lt 1 0 gt NUM 1 0 lt 1 0 gt true 1 lt 0 0 gt NUM Returns true if Arg is greater than Arg2 The arguments are of type real and the result is of type boolean See operator lt for the definition of valid arguments Returns true if Arg is less than or equal to Arg2 The arguments are of type real and the result is of type boolean See operator lt for the definition of valid argum
125. 2 is of type real but only the integer part is used If Arg2 gt the length of Arg the whole string is returned If Arg2 is negative an error is returned Example Right Daddy 3 99 gt ddy Right Daddy 386 gt Daddy Right Daddy 1 gt ARG Upper Arg1 Returns Arg converted to uppercase Arg and the result are of type string 7 4 4 4 5 Date and Time Functions Function Description AddDays Argl Arg2 Adds Arg2 number of days to Argl Arg2 is of type Real and Arg is of type Date or TimeStamp The result is of the same type as Arg Example AddDays 2002 03 04 2 AddSeconds Arg1 Arg2 Adds Arg2 number of seconds to Argl Arg2 is of type Real and Argl is of type Time or TimeStamp The result is of the same type as Arg Example AddSeconds Time col 30 AddSeconds Time col 0 010 Date Arg1 Arg2 Arg3 Creates a Date The arguments are year month and day and are of type Real The year must be between 100 232 DateDiff Arg1 Arg2 Day Argl Days Arg1 Arg2 Hour Arg1 Millisecond Arg1 Minute Arg1 Month Arg1 Second Arg1 Seconds Arg1 Arg2 Time Argl Arg2 Arg3 Working with the Data and 9999 The month must be between 1 and 12 The day must be between 1 and 31 See also conversion functions Example Date 2003 4 9 gt 2003 04 09 Date 2000 1 1 gt ARG conversion error Returns the difference in milliseconds in between two Date Ti
126. 20 30 95 159 215 219 95 162 97 70 259 269 263 266 265 267 257 281 268 266 263 259 104 23 239 248 39 8 to SAS R or S Plus computation servers 257 279 Constant Definition Dialog in Computation Services Constraints Continuous coloring 2D scatter plots Continuous Coloring Dialog heat maps Copy special Copying a visualization marked records to new column records Correlation between data Creating Favorites Creating Guides Analysis Builder user interface deploying to server including links to actions overview properties included with links quick reference running guides locally 378 280 38 113 120 152 170 172 169 170 178 27 294 294 290 288 291 289 292 suggested workflow Creating new columns by binning from an expression from marked records Creating visualizations bar chart heat map histogram line chart pie chart profile chart scatter plots table trellis plot visualization CSV files Currency Curve draw from equation fit 85 87 88 91 Custom Guides creating using Analysis Builder publishing to Library Customizing advanced options axes colors fonts markers shapes start page toolbars visualizations D Data conditioning copying data set overview exporting importing loading pasting range saving types Data and Background axes tab Data conditioning using Pivot Data using Transpose Data Data menu Data range axes range sliders se
127. 3 70 318 167 171 346 171 171 176 Auto switch Average data and background tab Axes 3D tab bar chart columns bars tab data and background lines tab markers tab pies tab profile tab tab for scatter plots Axis labels scale selectors in visualizations Background images and files adding an image adding MapInfo files image files and maps positioning SFM files Bar chart bar chart columns color reference line visualization Bars bar charts bars tab Binary operators Bind to Binning different methods in bar charts performing Bookmarks Break on deselected Brushing Buttons in Analysis Builder in Computation Services in DecisionSite main toolbar C Calculating columns using an expression distance between markers using statistical computation servers Cascade Case of ID values for Add Columns Case sensitivity Categorical coloring 2D scatter plots Categorical Coloring Dialog 197 78 79 112 77 59 132 257 109 138 131 143 146 139 148 108 166 171 168 296 266 365 219 282 259 171 207 113 122 heat maps Category columns Changing a web link axis labels width and height column name fonts number formatting perspective in 3D scatter plot query device order query device type visualization axes visualization type Check box query devices Cherry picking Choosing records activating highlighting marking Circle shape and rotation of markers
128. 3 1 New Column from Marked Records Dialog When you have found an interesting subset in the data you can mark these records and then create a new column indicating for each record whether it is part of the subset or not By doing so you will be able to toggle the subset and also the records excluded from the subset Note Columns created from marked records cannot be saved in templates SFT files and cannot be saved as linked data New Column from Marked Records x m Properties for the new column Name Label for marked records Label for unmarked records Yes No Cancel 218 Working with the Data Option Description Name Type a suitable name for the column to be created Label for marked Type a name for the value associated with marked records records Label for Type a name for the value associated with unmarked records unmarked records gt To reach the New Column from Marked Records dialog Select Data gt New Column gt From Marked Records or right click in the Query Device window and select New Column gt From Marked Records 7 4 New Column from Expression 7 4 1 Calculating Columns New columns can be computed from the current data set by using mathematical and logical expressions This chapter describes how to create and evaluate such expressions using the New Column from Expression tool 7 4 2 Workflow of the New Column from Expression Tool Occasionally the columns includ
129. Arg1 to a time stamp If the conversion fails an error is returned Argl can be of type String or Date and the result is of type TimeStamp If a Date is specified the time part is set to 00 00 00 See also date amp time functions Example TimeStamp 2003 03 21 11 37 00 gt 2003 03 21 11 37 00 TimeStamp 10 gt ARG conversion error TimeStamp null gt NULL TimeStamp 2003 03 21 gt 2003 03 21 00 00 00 An expression is considered valid if it is syntactically correct and all function operator and column references can be resolved If an expression is not valid it cannot be evaluated This will be indicated in the SXL Ul as EXPR 235 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 236 When evaluating an expression some operations produce errors or null values Each function and operator can choose how to handle arguments that are errors or null The default behavior is to propagate the first error or null value that is encountered So if a function takes two arguments and the first is null and the second is an error the default behavior is to return null Functions that handle errors and null in other ways are explained in their Descriptions Errors For operations on arguments of type real the result is sometimes not defined This produces a NaN Not a Number error If the result of an operation is greater than the maximum real number an Infinity error or Infinity error is produced Many op
130. DK gt To import data using an OLE DB provider 1 Click Open on the File menu and select Full OLE DB Connect from the Files of type drop down list 2 Use the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify initialization properties for your OLE DB provider Data link properties may vary depending on your OLE DB provider Next navigates to the Connection tab for the selected OLE DB provider Before you can access data from OLE DB you must provide specific connection information such as e The type of data that you want to access e The server on which the data resides e The database in which the data is stored Use the Connection tab to specify how to connect to Oracle data Enter the server where the database you want to access is located Click Test Connection to attempt a connection to the specified data source If the connection fails ensure that the settings are correct For example spelling errors and case sensitivity may be the cause of a failed connection Click OK to connect For more information about advanced initialization properties see the documentation provided with your OLE DB provider Use the All tab to view and edit all of the OLE DB initialization properties that are available for your OLE DB provider Rearranging the Data by Formatting If you have a Time Date or a DateTime TimeStamp column in your data set you can change what you actually filter on with the query devices just by changing the format of the column
131. Data Clustering gt gt Hierarchical Clustering gt Hierarchical Clustering on Keys gt Self Organizing Maps gt K means Clustering gt Principal Component Analysis Ctrl 8 Ctrl 9 Ctrl U Quick Reference Charts Creates a new heat map visualization See Heat Maps Creates a new table visualization See Tables Invokes the View Tip Dialog Thumbnail views of visualizations are presented and can be quickly analyzed Creates a duplicate of the selected visualization Description Allows you to incorporate new columns into your current data set See Add Columns Overview Allows you to sort your data into different groups or bins using different methods See the Different Binning Methods Creates a new column from the currently marked records See New Column from Marked Records Allows you to add a new column calculated from other columns in your data set See Workflow of the New Column from Expression Tool Allows you to standardize the values in selected columns using a number of different normalization methods See Column Normalization Overview Allows you to combine values from multiple samples into a single column See Performing a Row Summarization Allows you to rotate and aggregate your data in order to use it in a better way See Pivoting the Data Set Allows you to transform your data to a tall and skinny format See Depivoting the Data Set Arranges records in a
132. Data Conditioning dialog select a conditioning method if desired 5 Click Next gt to save this as a Favorite or simply click Finish 3 3 2 6 Importing Using a Favorite Using a Favorite requires that you have defined a data source and preprocessing methods in a previous session and have saved these settings see Creating Favorites gt To use a Favorite 1 Select File gt Import gt Import Data 2 Select a favorite from the list of data sources 3 Click Finish to load the data set or Next gt to edit data conditioning before loading 3 3 3 Data Conditioning 3 3 3 1 Data Conditioning Once you have specified a data source it is possible to manipulate the data in various ways Standard methods include the Tall Skinny gt Short Wide conversion described in What is Tall Skinny Short Wide Conversion as well as the Depivot Short Wide gt Tall Skinny conversion but custom methods designed by Professional Services or a third party may also be available You can also select the Normalize case filter This will cause the data to be imported non case sensitively This means Chrome chrome and CHROME will be interpreted as the same string The default when importing is to import case sensitively thus the examples above would be interpreted as three different strings Note When importing strings duplicates are removed In Spotfire DecisionSite version 7 0 and older comparison ignored differences in case Version 7 1 an
133. Different types of statistical calculations can be added to the data set or included in Guides for easy distribution to others The out of the box version of Computation Services supports connection to R S PLUS and SAS servers but other types of connectors can also be added For more information see Spotfire Developer Network Note This help file does not contain any information regarding how to write your scripts For specific information on how to write scripts see literature for the respective scripting language 8 2 2 Using Computation Services 8 2 2 1 Computation Services Quick Reference Action Instruction Start Computation Services Create a new configuration Open an earlier saved configuration Add an input parameter Add prompts From the main menu bar of DecisionSite select Tools gt Computation Services gt SAS or R or S PLUS or whatever type of server you want to connect to In Computation Services click File gt New Write or paste a script in the Script field add input and output parameters and result handlers Test the configuration See Suggested Workflow or Example Configuration for more information In Computation Services click File gt Open Browse to locate the configuration of interest and click Open Select the parameter in the script and click on the Add as Input Parameter button gt a Select the Data type of the parameter from the drop down list Tip You can also start by
134. In Analysis Builder select Guide gt Run Comment The Guide will be displayed in the Guides pane as any other Guide Save a Guide In Analysis Builder select Guide gt Save Publish a Guide to the In Analysis Builder select Guide gt Publish to Library Library See Publish to Library for more information Add a new page to a Guide In Analysis Builder select Add gt New Page Comment A flight view linking back to Contents as well as Next page and Back links are automatically added to each page in the Guide Minimize the Analysis Click on the top right x button This will hide the Analysis Builder Builder but both the Guide contents list and the Actions in DecisionSite list will be remembered when you reopen the tool Close the Analysis Builder In Analysis Builder select Guide gt Exit 9 5 2 4 How the Actions in DecisionSite List Works Adding Links to a Guide All actions in the right list called Actions in DecisionSite can be added as a link to the Guide Click to select an action in the list use Ctrl to select several actions and then click the lt Add Link button to create a link in the Guide Adding Actions to the List Actions are automatically logged in the Actions in DecisionSite list as you perform them in DecisionSite First load data and perform the analysis as you would normally do Your data the visualizations you create and the tools you start will appear as actions in the list Tip To edit a previo
135. Inc TIBCO Spotfire and Spotfire DecisionSite are either registered trademarks or trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc and or subsidiaries of TIBCO Software Inc in the United States and or other countries All other product and company names and marks mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners and are mentioned for identification purposes only This software may be available on multiple operating systems However not all operating system platforms for a specific software version are released at the same time Please see the readme txt file for the availability of this software version on a specific operating system platform THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT THIS DOCUMENT COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES OR TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS CHANGES ARE PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN THESE CHANGES WILL BE INCORPORATED IN NEW EDITIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT TIBCO SOFTWARE INC MAY MAKE IMPROVEMENTS AND OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT S AND OR THE PROGRAM S DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT AT ANY TIME Copyright 1996 2008 TIBCO Software Inc ALL RIGHTS RESERVED THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE MODIFIED AND OR QUALIFIED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY BY OTHER DOCUMENTATION WHICH ACCOMPANIES THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY RE
136. Indented Description Adds a number before the selected text link or comment item Subsequently following text link or comment items on the same Guide page get the next number 2 3 if this button is selected Adds a bullet before the selected text link or comment item Indents the selected text link or comment item Analysis Builder Help Menu The Help menu contains the following command Option Analysis Builder Help Description Opens this help file to the Analysis Builder Overview topic Analysis Builder Pop up Menu The pop up menu which is displayed upon right clicking on an item in the Guide contents list contains the following commands Option Move Up Move Down Delete Description Moves the currently selected text comment link or Page Break in the Guide contents list up one step Moves the currently selected text comment link or Page Break in the Guide contents list down one step Deletes the selected text comment link or Page Break from the Guide contents list You can also press Delete on your keyboard to perform the same function 309 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Text Properties Displays the Text Properties dialog Comments are directly opened for editing by double clicking on the comment Link Displays the Link Properties dialog Properties 9 6 Publish to Library 9 6 1 Publish to Library Overview The Publish to Library tool allows you to publish
137. Invalid argument In Mid Hello 0 1 this case because length must be positive and position cannot be zero ARG Conversion Real Hello Conversion failed Working with the Data Null Null values are usually only generated when retrieving a column value from the data set or by explicitly writing null in the expression Results that are null are displayed as NULL The IsNull Arg function can be used to determine if a sub expression results in null The SN Arg Arg2 function can be used to substitute null with a certain value e g 0 7 4 4 7 Compatibility The old expression language in DecisionSite Client 7 1 1 and earlier had a different syntax and a different set of functions and operators All the functionality of the old expression language is present in the new expression language and mapping the old onto the new is described here Quoted column names are now bracketed instead Column 1 is now Column 1 String literals can now contain escaped characters such as quotes backslashes new lines etc 22 22 I n2 n C TEMP file csv Constants are replaced by function calls PI is now PI E is now EXP 1 Concatenating strings is now supported via the amp operator instead of Operator is replaced by function POWER Operator precedence is now correct 1 2 3 is now evaluated as 1 2 3 instead of 1 2 3 Function Compatibility The old functions and their new counterparts are listed below O
138. Items of type Altens O Help Open Cancel Library tab Description options Library tab All Library Sections items and folders are listed in the Library View under the Library tab Each item is displayed with type title and description To open an item select it by clicking on it and click Open You can view your position with the flight view The flight view is seen between the Library tab and the item table Note Only the Library Sections that you have access to are listed Items of type Select the item type you want to view This filter allows you to see only the options you are interested in There are four alternatives All items Analyses Guides Posters Open Select the item you want and click Open to open it See the top of the page about the various responses Search tab Description options Search tab Use Search to search for the item you want to open Search for Enter the search string in the Search for field and click Search See Searching in the Library for information about search strings If you click a folder in the Search result you will be redirected to the Library View under the Library tab Look in Select which Library Section you want to perform your search in Either all Library Sections or one can be searched Only Library Sections you have access to are listed 17 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Items of type Select which type of Library item you want to pe
139. John 1300 Smith Anastasia 4400 Smith Jane 800 Smith George 750 In this data set the employee Henry Ford is missing and a person called Anastasia Smith is included who was not a part of the original data set 211 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual The Add Columns tool can add the Salary column with the following results depending on your selections in the Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog Matching columns Result Last name lt gt Last name Scott Alice Analyst 3200 Ford Henry Analyst Miller John Clerk 1300 Smith Jane Clerk 4400 Smith George Clerk 4400 All employees with the last name Smith get the value 4400 in the Salary column since that was the first record for the last name Smith in the new data set Anastasia Smith will not be added to the data set No value is added for Henry Ford since he was not present in the new data set Last name lt gt Last name First name lt gt First name Scott Alice Analyst 3200 Ford Henry Analyst Miller John Clerk 1300 Smith Jane Clerk 800 Smith George Clerk 750 With both last name and first name used as key pairs the identification is unique and the correct salary is entered for Jane and George Smith This would be the correct way of performing the merge 7 1 4 3 Example of Adding Columns with Empty Values If you have empty values in the ID column of the current data set and other records have empty values in the ID column of the new
140. LEASE NOTES AND READ ME FILES TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite is covered by U S Patent No 6 014 661 and U S Patent No 7 216 116 Other patent s pending TIBCO Software Inc Confidential Information Preface Table of Contents 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 5 15 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 PRE AGE isc vwistwe Sctrsiews is ee Sn ws we Ses ews is wwe Sis eames TE E I 3 What is Spotfire DecisionSite 20 00 cececcccee cece cece eeeeccaee cece eeeeeecaeaeceee sees sececaeeeeeeeeeeeceaueeeeeeeeeeeed 3 Third Party ComponenttS ssc 0 cehteies el aiia ai i i ede aeia ieaiaia iiaeiai 3 How to Contact Supporto ninina e Meee Aah eh aint ieee ie tE 5 INTRODUCTION oa cesses hose scassnsssnaysoncsncusntssnay ints seavinissnay ints seavsassstsvsniastavannasiastaausaaviads 6 Spotfire DecisionSite Overview ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeeseseaeaeeaeceeeeesessnanaeeeeeeesseenaeees 6 Installation and S tup 2 55 fice test scutes a Hever desea Bivens Bee hae Aired ee 7 GettING Stared rese tater ARES AA ERRA EAR EA aa EAAS ARA ATARE ANE AARE 8 LOADING DA TA a aa aaa ea aa A E AEAEE iaai 15 Loading Ua enen E Ae E O E 15 Decisionoite LDII eriari TNT ATA AT 15 anie ole DEE Ut ER EEA T EA AEE A A a E A S ereir errr 18 l tormatiom LINKS teksts nti a e a a a aa a a a a a oecesctetea 43 TEET AAD E ra E T A A A E EAE ETE 54 VISUALIZATIONS a ar r a arara vane vote vane vote r aaa aa e Eae ar Eaa iaa iaaa 58 S
141. New Folder Creates a new folder where you can publish your Guide A dialog will prompt you for the new folder name Note The New Folder button is only displayed inside a Library Section Members Lists all users with at least read access to the current Library Section Each Library Section has its own set of access permissions Note The Members button is only displayed inside a Library Section Guide title The name of the Guide as it will be displayed in the Library This title will be displayed as a link in the Guides pane It is important that the title is informative with regards to what the Guide actually does Note The title can be 50 characters at the most and the following characters are not supported Wea picar ern O a Aa Next When you have selected a location where you want to publish your Guide click Next to continue to Publish to Library Wizard Step 3 3 gt To reach the Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 2 3 dialog 1 Select Guides gt Publish to Library from the menu 2 Select which type of Guide you want to publish in Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 1 3 and click Next gt 9 6 2 3 Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 3 3 This dialog lets you to enter all properties of the Guide By using detailed properties the organization and search capabilities in the Library are greatly enhanced 312 Guides Publish Guide to Library Step3 3 x Guide title Footbal Description e Guide from P
142. One choice is to embed the data into the Poster That way the data is stored within the Poster and will not be altered if you later change the original data set The other alternative is only available if you have imported data into Spotfire DecisionSite by use of Information Links If created in this way you can choose to save the Poster with an active data link to the original data so that the Poster will always be based on the latest data and will be automatically updated every time a user opens the Poster If the range of the data should become larger after the publishing date the entire data set will still be opened in the Poster regardless of the initial query device settings etc Note It is not possible to use the linked data option if you have added a column binned add columns calculation etc to a data set imported via Information Links Also information about which records are currently marked cannot be stored in a Poster with linked data this is only possible using embedded data 10 4 6 6 Poster Background Images Scatter Plots Bar Charts Profile Charts and Pie Charts can display a background image behind the markers which can be useful when working with geographical maps etc Physicians map gt EE zip3_y zip3_x BMP PNG and JPG images that are used as background images in DecisionSite Client can be published in a Poster other formats are invalid Position properties set in DecisionSit
143. Overview Allows you to connect to a calculation server and add any type of statistical or mathematical calculations to your analysis This can be a server running R SAS S PLUS or Distance Calculator Decision Tree Statistics gt gt Box Plot gt Summary Table gt Normal Probability Plot gt Profile Anova gt Column Relationships Create Information Link Information Designer Administration gt gt DecisionSite Administrator gt DecisionSite Library gt DecisionSite Library Administrator gt Server Usage Quick Reference custom servers Calculates the distance between two markers in a scatter plot Explaining the behavior of one column as a function of other columns in a data set See Decision Tree Overview Helps to visualize key statistical measures such as median mean and quartiles See Box Plot Overview Displays statistical information numerically See Summary Table Overview Helps you to investigate to what extent a data set exhibits normal distribution See Normal Probability Plot Overview Provides a method for locating records where there is a significant difference between one group of columns and another group See Profile Anova Overview Helps you to investigate the relationships between different column pairs See Column Relationships Overview Launches the Information Builder tool where you can create and open information links This tool has its own
144. Property Edit Annotation SF eat ee i The query device pop up menu The currently selected query device is marked with a bullet gt To change the type of query device e Right click the query device to make the pop up menu appear Select the appropriate query device option from the pop up menu or e select the Columns tab of the Properties dialog This tab contains a list of all the columns in the data set Mark a column and select the type of query device to use for that column 5 8 Moving Individual Query Devices Working with data sets containing a large number of columns does not necessarily mean that you need to manipulate them all at once A more useful strategy is to select a few parameters to see how they interact with each other For this reason you may want to regroup them and rearrange their order so that you do not have to scroll up and down to keep track of the changes The initial order of the Query Devices depends on the structure of the data set loaded into Spotfire DecisionSite or the SQL query that was used to acquire data You can change this as needed by rearranging columns in the originating spreadsheet program or writing the SQL query in a certain order gt To change the order of the query devices 1 Right click on the query device to be moved A pop up menu will open 189 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Query Devices 9 ls PlatelD ALL Check Boxes Radio Buttons Ton Range
145. Quick Access to Color and Size Properties ccccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseccecaeceeeeeeesecenaeeeeeeneeetees 193 Initial Query Device Selection 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseneaeeeceeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeesenaeeeeeeaeees 194 DETAILS ON DEMAND AND LEGEND cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 195 DetailS on Demaniix waxterih sends kt at eee eaten ia aten deere deh eda ot eta ad 3 Lata 195 RIANA A eXtra eana a ae ae a a a a a aa a dtc a aaa aaa 195 Locking the Details on Demand Window sssssssssssissesrresterrtsttrrtsttrnsstttrnnsttnnasttnnnstennnttennnaten nnt 197 PUM EAEE EA E E EE TE A E E A EE E E T 198 Editing HEME Template Srei a E RERET ER ERA E R 198 Descriptive Statistics for HTML Templates ccccccecsecececeeeeeeeceecaeceeeeeeeesesecneeeeeeeeeseeseaeees 200 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 6 7 Editing ATM AM EXIDE oa ah eA a a RA AA T AA RE A A A 200 6 8 Information About the Data Set cccceececcecsececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeesecaaaeceeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeseesnceeeeess 201 6 9 LOGON ste POE EE E es tit tenors Corea at tes aia Ales iA cated ite Ceo Ach eh scene debe sda T E teers 201 T WORKING WITH THE DATA visa cicscciwctiesiixcdccantusdercatnsieaestssdtnsssusiucomudedetauensdbesmnses 203 7 1 Add Columns syani ade aaa eee ais ote ete et pies 203 7 2 New Column by Binning ieont ia tersaitbeatasaledeaaadudttadsatnadesasteedgavsteden
146. Reference Line Dialog This dialog is used to create vertical reference lines in a bar chart Reterencetine x m Line Position Expression x so Edit Result fiso m Line Settings Line style EE Sic 7 2 Transparency 4 Place line in Foreground T MV Show label expression value Templates w Horizontal Vertical Adjust data range to include line Help Cancel Option Description Expression Type the expression you want to be presented as a reference line in the 92 Edit Result Line style Transparency Place line in Show label Templates Horizontal Vertical Adjust data range to include line Visualizations text field If you want a line drawn at a specific number you simply type that number in the text field You can also type more complicated expressions including a number of functions and variables such as mean and median directly in the field For more information about the available functions and variables click on Edit see below Note that variables such as median and mean are always calculated on all data and not on the data filtered by the query devices or zooming Opens the Edit Expression dialog where you can combine different variables and functions into an expression as well as read a short description of all available functions Displays the result of the expression Allows you to change the c
147. Resets the set of marked records No records will be marked after you have executed this operation Inverts the set of marked records Marks all unmarked records and unmarks the set of marked records Sets the selection to the marked records Creates a temporary filter so that only the marked records are visible Opens the New Column from Marked Records dialog where you can add a new column showing whether records are included in the marked group or not Creates a new list with the marked records to the Portfolio The list is placed as the last item on root level Adds the marked records from the visualization into your currently active Portfolio list Sets all profile charts to use the same scale Same as the All columns use same scale scale mode option in the Properties dialog Opens the Properties dialog to the Annotations tab where you can provide the visualization with a description of your choice Copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format It also copies an image of the visualization to the clipboard which can be pasted into other applications by using a Paste Special option Creates a duplicate of the selected visualization Opens the Properties dialog n which parameters governing the appearance of the visualization can be set annotations made etc Description Resets the zoom bars to the original
148. Response The new columns are added and query devices representing the new columns are shown in Spotfire DecisionSite You may have to scroll down in the Query Devices window to see the new query devices Working with the Data 7 1 2 4 Adding Columns if Case Mismatches Since the matching of values in the ID columns is based on a case sensitive comparison adding a column where the IDs are in lower case to a data set where the IDs are in upper case will not result in any values being added to the existing data In this case it can be useful to add a new column with all values expressed in lower case or upper case prior to the merge of new columns gt To create an all lower case ID column in the current data set l oe ae NS Select Data gt New Column gt From Expression from the menu bar in Spotfire DecisionSite Response The New Column from Expression Enter Expression Step 1 2 dialog is displayed Click to select the column you want to convert to lower case In the Category drop down list on the right select Text Functions In the Function list box select Lower Click Insert Function Response The function Lower is inserted into the Expression box Click Insert Columns to use the column selected in step as an argument to the function Click Next gt Response The New Column from Expression Specify Column Step 2 2 dialog is displayed Type a suitable name for the new column Click Finish Re
149. Site 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 2 6 2 Edit Expression Dialog Edit Expression p x Variables thirdQuartile Insert Variable Insert Function Expression Target type Help Option Variables Function category Function 94 Function category All X Function Description Adds the two arguments Example 3 5 2 5 R eal Result 328 Recent expressions 1 4 Insert OK Cancel hi Description Lists the available variables which can be used to create your expression Insert a variable into your expression with the Insert Variable button Select a category of functions to limit the choices in the Functions list All Operators Math Functions Statistical Functions Text Functions Logical Functions Date amp Time Functions Conversion Functions Select a function by clicking on it and click the Insert Function button to insert it to the Expression field You can also double click on a function to insert it If you place the cursor at a specific location in the Expression field the function will be inserted there 4 8 3 4 8 3 1 Description Expression Target type Result Recent expressions Insert Visualizations Provides a brief description of the selected function For more detailed descriptions please see Spotfire Expression Language SXL This is the text field in which you build your expression You can insert variables and
150. Site 9 1 1 User s Manual TimeStamp Arg1 Arg2 Year Arg1 7 4 4 4 6 Conversion Functions Function Date Arg1 Integer Arg1 Real Arg1 SE Argl Arg2 SN Arg1 Arg2 234 Time 10 1 1 gt ARG conversion error Creates a TimeStamp The arguments are a Date and a Time See also conversion functions Example TimeStamp Date col Time col Extracts the year from a Date or TimeStamp The result is of type Integer Example Year 2002 03 04 gt 2002 Description Converts Argl to a date If the conversion fails an error is returned Argl can be of type String or TimeStamp and the result is of type Date Ifa TimeStamp is specified the time part is removed See also date amp time functions Example Date 2003 03 21 gt 2003 03 21 Date 10 gt ARG conversion error Date null gt NULL Date 2003 03 21 11 37 00 gt 2003 03 21 Converts Arg to an integer number If the conversion fails an error is returned Arg can be of types integer real or string and the result is of type integer Real numbers are truncated i e only the integer part is used Example Integer 123 gt 123 Integer 2 99 gt 2 Integer 0 gt ARG syntax error Integer 1e20 gt ARG overflow Integer null gt NULL Converts Arg to a real number If the conversion fails an error is returned Arg can be of types integer real or string and the result is of type
151. Smallest such that 1 0 FLT_EPSILON 1 0 1 192092896e 07F The minimum difference between numbers that are to be calculated as having different values Number of bits in mantissa 24 Maximum value 3 402823466e 38F Maximum decimal exponent 38 Maximum binary exponent 128 Minimum positive value 1 175494351e 38F Minimum decimal exponent 37 Minimum binary exponent 125 Exponent radix 2 Addition rounding near 1 3 3 7 OLE DB 3 3 7 1 Connecting to a Data Source Using OLE DB An OLE DB data provider allows native access to data such as a SQL Server or Oracle database Using an OLE DB provider Spotfire DecisionSite can retrieve and manipulate data from a wide variety of data sources not just relational databases When you create a data link you specify the OLE DB provider that is designed to work with your data For example you could access a flat file system using the CSV provider and display the data in Spotfire DecisionSite You can create data links for any Microsoft or third party OLE DB provider The following providers are included with the Microsoft data access components Microsoft Jet 3 51 OLE DB Provider OLE DB Provider for Oracle OLE DB Provider for SQL Server OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers 39 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 3 8 40 Note For more information about OLE DB providers see the OLE DB Programmer s Reference This documentation is available in the Microsoft Data Access S
152. String then all values in the column will be set to String Note Date format is determined in a similar way Please see Date for more information The following is a small database with personal data but no type information Here the first line is interpreted as name information and the types are set to STRING and INT Data Spotfire DecisionSite Interpretation Name Age Type guess STRING STRING Peter 26 Type guess STRING INT Susan 19 Type guess STRING INT John 35 Type guess STRING INT If 1 2 and 3 fail the column names are automatically generated as Column1 Column2 etc The program then makes a qualified guess of the types just as in section 3 above For example for a small database with personal data with no type or name information the type information is set to STRING and INT and the names are set to Column and Column2 Data Spotfire DecisionSite Interpretation Peter 26 Type guess STRING INT Susan 19 Type guess STRING INT John 35 Type guess STRING INT Note If a column is declared as being of one type but some values in the column are of a different type then the incongruous values will be set to null 3 3 6 3 3 6 1 3 3 6 2 Loading Data Data Types General Specifications for Data Types White spaces and ASCII control characters i e all code characters less than 32 are always ignored at the start of a string Type strings strings that declare the data type are not case sensiti
153. TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual D TIBCO The Power of Now Important Information SOME TIBCO SOFTWARE EMBEDS OR BUNDLES OTHER TIBCO SOFTWARE USE OF SUCH EMBEDDED OR BUNDLED TIBCO SOFTWARE IS SOLELY TO ENABLE THE FUNCTIONALITY OR PROVIDE LIMITED ADD ON FUNCTIONALITY OF THE LICENSED TIBCO SOFTWARE THE EMBEDDED OR BUNDLED SOFTWARE IS NOT LICENSED TO BE USED OR ACCESSED BY ANY OTHER TIBCO SOFTWARE OR FOR ANY OTHER PURPOSE USE OF TIBCO SOFTWARE AND THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF A LICENSE AGREEMENT FOUND IN EITHER A SEPARATELY EXECUTED SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT OR IF THERE IS NO SUCH SEPARATE AGREEMENT THE CLICK WRAP END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT WHICH IS DISPLAYED DURING DOWNLOAD OR INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE AND WHICH IS DUPLICATED IN TIBCO BUSINESSWORKS CONCEPTS USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO THOSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND YOUR USE HEREOF SHALL CONSTITUTE ACCEPTANCE OF AND AN AGREEMENT TO BE BOUND BY THE SAME This product includes software licensed under the Common Public License The source code for such software licensed under the Common Public License is available upon request to TIBCO and additionally may be obtained from http wtl sourceforge net This document contains confidential information that is subject to U S and international copyright laws and treaties No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the written authorization of TIBCO Software
154. Tools gt Administration gt DecisionSite Library Administrator This will open a Microsoft Internet Explorer window where Administrators can edit who is allowed to create new Library Sections configure DecisionSite Library and Poster settings See DecisionSite Analytic Server Installation and Upgrade manual for more information Server usage statistics can be reached by selecting Tools gt Administration gt Server Usage This will open the log file dssaccess sfs in DecisionSite for an easy analysis and overview This file contains information about all logins and logouts from all DecisionSite Clients to the DecisionSite Analytics Server It shows which user logged in out and when The log is always enabled and it is unaffected by Log Configuration File settings 283 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 Guides 9 1 What is the Guides Pane The Guides pane is a web browser fully integrated into the Spotfire DecisionSite environment It is used to connect to the Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server providing access to Guides as well as a location for a customized start page The Guides Pane is closed by default when you launch Spotfire DecisionSite You can close and open it by clicking the Guides Pane button to the far left of the Guides Toolbar The button on the right directs the page to the current start page The Guides Toolbar The Guides Toolbar is used to open the Guides pane or to launch your own cu
155. Trellis tab 2 Click Remove gt To modify an existing condition 1 Select a condition from the list 2 Click Edit 3 Inthe Trellis condition dialog make the desired changes 4 Click OK gt To change the order of conditions 1 Select a condition from the list 2 Click Move up or Move down Tip The settings in the Trellis condition dialog can also be reached and changed by right clicking on any trellis panel heading 105 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 4 4 Trellis Layout Edit gt Properties gt Trellis tab You can control the layout of the plots in terms of rows columns and pages There are two ways of doing this e Automatically by binding a dimension to each conditioning variable e Manually by specifying the exact dimensions of the Trellis plot ea Columns Example of three conditioning variables bound to rows columns and pages X Rons Pages gt To arrange the plots automatically 1 In the Properties dialog under the Trellis tab make sure the check box labeled Bind dimensions to conditioning variables is selected Click Add 3 Inthe Trellis Condition dialog select a variable and a dimension to bind it to Comment If Bind to Columns is selected all trellis panels will be displayed side by side with the title at the top If Bind to Rows is selected the trellis panels will be under each other with the title on the right hand side of all rows If Bind to
156. UI Guidelines the label for a drop down list should use sentence style capitalization and end with a colon Data types Select the data types of the columns you want the end user to see upon prompting for the specific parameter Regexp matching Type any kind of regular expression to limit the available columns in the prompt Example If you type Exp in the Regexp matching field only columns containing Exp somewhere in the column name will be visible e g Experimentl Experimental results Expression MyExperiments etc See Introduction to Regular Expressions in the Query Devices chapter for more information Resulting prompt for the example above Column name eye color x Prompt Settings Data Set Dialog Use this type of prompt when you want user input in the form of one or more columns from the current data set Tools Prompt Settings Data Set x Label Select a column containing heights Data types Date and Time Optional settings Minimum number of columns fi Maximum number of columns ji Option Description Label The text that will be displayed above the column selection in the prompt dialog when the configuration is executed Try to make the label as clear as possible to ensure that the end users of the script understand what the input parameter should be Data types Select the data types of the columns you want the end user to see upon prompting for the specific parameter Mi
157. Use this type of prompt when you want user input in the form of a string Prompt Settings String x Label Favorite color Default value green Maximum string length 1 999 20 Help OK Cancel Option Description Label The text that will be displayed above the text field in the prompt dialog when the configuration is executed Try to make the label as clear as possible to ensure that the end users of the configuration understand what the input parameter should be According to Spotfire UI Guidelines the label for a text field should use sentence style capitalization and end with a colon Default value If desired type a text for default display in the prompt dialog Maximum string If desired type the maximum length of the string to be used as input If length 1 999 an end user tries to provide a longer string an error message will be displayed upon execution Resulting prompt for the example above Favorite color green Result Handling Dialogs Add to Current Data Set Automatic Key Matching Use this result handler when you want the resulting columns to be added to your current data set using an automatic primary key matching Note This method requires that you actually have good primary keys available that is that there is a column on the server with exactly the same name as one in your DecisionSite data set and that some of the values are matching If not you should probably use the Add to Current
158. You are prompted to save open documents 11 1 2 Edit Menu Option Copy Copy Special gt gt Marked Records gt Selected Records gt All Records gt Visualization Paste Reset to All Mark Selected Marked Record s gt Unmark gt Invert gt Select gt Undo Select gt Delete Hotkey Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl R Ctrl A CtrI E Ctrl I Ctrl M Ctrl Shift M Del Quick Reference Description Copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format It also copies an image of the visualization to the clipboard which can be pasted into other applications by using a Paste Special option Copies the set of marked records to the Clipboard Data in all the records that have been marked is copied to the Clipboard in text format Copies the selected records to the Clipboard Data in the records that fulfill all query device constraints is copied to the Clipboard in text format Copies all records to the Clipboard Copies the current visualization to the Clipboard An image in vector graphics format of the active visualization is copied to the Clipboard This image can be pasted into another application as a Windows Metafile Inserts Clipboard contents The contents of the clipboard are pasted into a new Spotfire DecisionSite visualization The Clipboard should contain data as text in o
159. _atoms lt 41 and Nitrogen in 0 1 2 5 6 wild oe 10 11 Export Legend Image This option will place an image of the legend describing the columns that are used for size color rotation etc on the Windows Clipboard To make this option available you must first display the Legend in Spotfire DecisionSite There are three ways to do this e Select Legend command from the View menu e Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl L e Click the button on the toolbar 344 Saving and Exporting Data RT Scatter Plot Color by Dipole moment Gast 2 1536 11 1961 Size by class Vasodilator Rotate by Polarizability 22 7143 66 9768 aaOeoun The legend in Spotfire DecisionSite above and the bitmap exported below Color by Dipole moment Gast 2 1536 11 1961 Size by class Vasodilator Rotate by Polarizability 22 7143 66 9768 EF LAAJ When you select the File gt Export gt Legend option a Save As dialog opens and you can browse to where you want to save the legend image you are able to choose BMP or JPG format 10 12 Export Data All the data loaded into memory and used by Spotfire DecisionSite can be exported using this option Records that have been removed by deleting marked markers will of course not be among the exported data All other records even those not currently portrayed in visualizations or those deselected by query devices will be exported The format of the data is
160. a bright red and mid range values to black with a corresponding transition or gradient between these extremes 65 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 66 Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 gt Tocreate a Heat Map 1 Press Ctrl 8 or click the New Heat Map button on the toolbar or select Visualization gt New Heat Map 2 Go to the axis selector of the Y axis and select the columns you wish to order the rows by 3 Use the Properties dialog to adjust the various properties of the chart Order of rows By default the order of the rows in the heat map is set to None meaning that they are in the same order as they were before the data set was imported However you may want to sort the rows differently such as if a certain column was pre generated to contain a relevant sorting order The order of the rows is shown numerically in the X axis selector of the Heat Map Click on the vertical axis selector to select which column or None to order the rows by D Type to search WX Integer bs Y Integer Year Integer Cadmium Integer Chrome Integer InChrome Integer Copper Integer InCopper Integer Nickel Integer Lead Integer InLead Integer Vanadin Integer Zinc Integer Visualizations Activating and Marking Records Making a record active or marking several records in a heat map plot differs somewhat from other plots In a heat map one row always equals one record Consequently you always select or mark
161. a column has already been used in a matching it will not be available in the Columns in new data set list Select a column pair in the Matching columns list and click on Remove to make the columns available in the two selection lists again Click to select a column from the Columns in current data set Comment This should be some kind of ID column preferably containing unique identifiers For information about how non unique values are handled see Details on how data are added Click Add Match Comment The selected column pair is moved to the Matching columns list box If desired it is possible to use multiple key pairs In this case only records that have identical values in all of the selected column pairs will be added to the data set For more information see Details on how data are added Click Next gt Response The Add Columns Select Columns dialog is displayed Comment Clicking Finish in the second step of the wizard will perform the addition of columns by adding all columns from the new data set that were not selected among the Matching columns above to the current data set Click to select the columns to actually include in your data set Comment If a column to include has the same name as one of the columns already in the data set it will be added with the suffix 1 2 etc Click Finish Response The new columns are added and query devices representing the new columns are shown in Spotfire DecisionSite You may
162. a straight typeface lt style gt td font 10pt Helvetica lt style gt Note This should be placed above the body of the template to affect the entire presentation Notice also the use of curly brackets Further down in the body change the background color of the body to light blue by changing the color definition from ffffff white to light blue bgcolor ddeeff Add the following line of code above the titles to make the title line appear with a light yellow background lt tr bgcolor ffff77 gt Details on Demand and Legend Edit Details on Demand x lt font size 2 gt lt l Create a table with one line for each marked row gt lt table border 2 cellpadding 5 gt lt l set title background to light yellow gt lt tr bgcolor HFFF FR 7 gt lt td gt lt b gt lt font size 1 gt P1 lt font gt lt b gt lt td gt lt td gt lt b gt lt font size 1 gt P2 lt font gt lt b gt lt td gt lt td gt lt b gt lt font size 1 gt Element lt font gt lt b gt lt td gt lt td gt lt b gt lt font size 1 gt Atomic Number lt font gt lt b gt lt td gt lt td gt lt b gt lt font size 1 gt Atomic Mass lt font gt lt b gt lt td gt lt td gt lt b gt lt font size 1 gt Atomic Radius lt font gt lt b gt lt td gt 4 gt Load Save As Default Cancel 7 Click OK Select View gt Details on Demand External Brows
163. ab Edit gt Properties gt Columns tab 95 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 96 Properties The deposit of heavy metals over Sweden xi Trellis Annotations Column goum Tope li L isbity index Quen Devi Hidden 4 Full text se In teger Chrome Integer Copper Integer Lead Integer InChrome Integer InCopper Integer InLead Integer Nickel Integer VYanadin Integer Integer Intener Annotation Axes 3D Markers Data and Background Columns Details Columns gt Query device type Check boxes Radio buttons 1 Visible 5 Radio butto Wee eee 133 Visible 7 Range slide c j 444 Visible 10 Range slide Item slider 45 Visible 6 Range slide Full text search 33 Visible 8 Range slide 43 Visible 11 Range slide 80 Visible 3 Range slide Show empty values 124 Visible 12 Range slide 120 Visible 1 Item slider Show Hide 93 Visible Ra aail Rename Column Format Scale ha New Column Indicators MV Show indicators in query devices Delete Columns This dialog is used to set column properties columns how they are viewed what query device to associate with the column annotations name scale etc Option Column Annotation Show indicators in query devices Query device type Show empty values Show Hide Rename Column Format Description Lists all the existing columns in the data set Select a column
164. ab in the Properties dialog select an SFM file which has a coordinate system matching the coordinates in the axes file HTML Details on Demand Edit gt Properties gt Data and Background tab The information of each record can be displayed in an external or internal HTML browser Properties Pie Chart x Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Pies Axes Labels IV X axis Grid I X grid lines Data Range IV Y axis IV Y grid lines M Zaris F Zaridlines Labels m Background image File Browse Position HTML Details on Demand Template P Pie Edit V Limit maximum number of records shown 29 I Statistical measures Add Edit Average 2 0 standard deviations for Xx axis using selected r Vertical Error Bars Curve y x x HTML Details on Demand templates are accessed through the Data and Background tab Statistical Measures Statistical Measures Edit gt Properties gt Data and Background tab Some statistics and curves can be visualized directly in 2D scatter plots This section of the Edit gt Properties gt Data and Background dialog offers control of several kinds of statistical measures Average and Standard Deviation X axis and Y axis average and standard deviation marking lines The standard deviation is an indication of how dispersed the probability distribution is about its center Error
165. accessed by all users 15 Click Finish Response The Poster is published and the confirmation dialog for the wizard will appear asking if you want to send an email notification to your colleagues This dialog also includes a hyperlink to the Library folder containing the Poster you just published which you can click on to view the final result Publish Poster to Library Wizard Step 1 3 Using this wizard you can publish a DecisionSite Poster of your Analysis enabling your colleagues to participate in the decision process from a Microsoft Internet Explorer window Use Spotfire DecisionSite Client to create the visualizations you want and adjust the query devices to filter out the data you want in your Poster Launch the Publish Poster wizard by selecting File gt Publish Poster to Library Note Your need a license for DecisionSite Posters to use this feature Use the dialog to specify which parts of the Analysis you want to include in the Poster Publish Poster to Library Step 1 3 x Visualizations Query devices Genre vs Income Actress ltem Slider 2 Add Remove Details on Demand Visualization default layout Table Configure O tiea f Scrollable ist Eram Ee E Option Description Visualizations Select the visualizations of your Analysis you want to include in 10 4 3 Saving and Exporting Data your Poster See Poster Visualizations for more information Visuali
166. achine Data Source tab 21 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Select Data Source dBASE Files User dBase Files Word User DeluxeCD User ECDCMusic System Personal music CD titles Excel Files User FoxPro Files Word User MS Access Database User Visual FoxPro Database User Visual FoxPro T ables User 5 Select the source from which data should be loaded Click OK 7 Enter login name and password to log on to the database Database Specify Tables and Columns 8 Determine which database fields to import by selecting the corresponding check boxes 9 Edit the SQL statement manually if required This may be necessary for example when joining tables 22 Loading Data 10 Click OK 3 3 2 5 Importing a Spotfire Text Data File The Spotfire Text Data format uses a method which enables quick opening of text files The file is saved as Unicode which makes it possible to read all alphabets This format is useful when you have data that can be imported wrongly e g if you have strings that contain semicolons or tabs which would otherwise cause the imported file to be split up into the wrong number of columns gt To import a Spotfire Text Data File 1 Select File gt Import gt Import Data 2 Select Advanced gt Spotfire Text Data Format from the list of data sources 3 Inthe Spotfire Text Data Format dialog select the file containing the data Click Open In the
167. advven dendasteataesstedensatade 213 7 3 New Column from Marked ReCOrds ccccccceeceecceeeeeeeeeceeaeceeeeeeeseccacaeceeeeeeeesecsccaeeeeeeeeesensiaeess 218 7 4 New Column from Expression ccccceceeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeecneaeeeeeeeeeseccaaeceeeeeseseccueaeeeeeeesessnsieaeess 219 7 5 PIVOU Dales attra Beers screenees ee eh etc atas ss ea et etl E AA ets Sahara eee oo 239 7 6 Depot Data nites oitec ntti feet bet eeet teat Meee eesti etter Mat rem isate ta taba cee meters aisha ofa a a a ie 243 7 7 ikranspose ie A A E TT a A AN le TTT 248 GB TPOQOES E E TTA E E ET TE E T 253 8 1 Web LINKS urairi e al en an en aed ieee eee a 253 8 2 Computation Services sncch teva eel oh Menriistetien Mind endl ac ees He a eee ee 257 8 3 Distance Calculator tociens eel natal tare deta ol eee elie dare 282 8 4 Administration TOOS Teie ae Abe aes ea ee eee ee a eee 283 e GQUUID ES a a A A Canssous funvinesdudebuasbuduscavdedecunussasdvavtedudesusoutveusxect 284 9 1 Whatisthe Guides Pane icccccss viet snzvaesdacvasiel tact ae aate ana aaia eedan daaar Enean y AADEL Edah ts Ete needed re 284 9 2 LETN E E A E AE heat ain a he ethan AE E T 284 9 3 G ides Pane Option Sasian tiina a a ated a aa a aa a aiaa 285 9 4 Run from Library ern aden EA E eae ee A A 286 9 5 Create and Edit Guide saeir a aea aa a aa E a a a a a a aa E aaa teed 288 9 6 Publish to CIDA Eer a E E AE A A 310 10 SAVING AND EXPORTING DATA ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
168. affect the expression but will allow the Legend to display it over several rows Displays the data type of the result This field displays the result of applying the current expression to the first row of the data set If this field shows an error message there is a problem with the expression Clicking on the field will display an explanation of what is wrong Pressing F5 will also display the error description Pressing F4 will move the cursor to the position in the expression where the error lies There are three kinds of error messages EXPR there is a problem with the syntax of the expression NUM the row evaluates to infinity or other illegal number ARG there is a problem with one or many arguments This list contains the twenty most recent expressions you have created Inserts the selected recent expression to the cursor position of the expression field Visualizations 4 8 7 7 6 Customize Labels Dialog Customize Labels x Layout Maximum label size m Appearance Background he _ Border he J M Use marker color Frame width _____ Line width i Text gt 7 Transparent Solid Option Maximum label size Background Border Use marker color Frame width Line width Text Cancel Description Allows you to change the maximum label size that you wish to allow Allows you to change the color of
169. affected by transformations but the mapping onto the plot will be affected This means that a straight line equation such as y x x will turn into a curve if the X axis column uses a Log transform Limitations on data All types of input data cannot be used to calculate curves using all different types of models All models require e more than one data point to use in the calculation e that not all data points have the same x and y values lie on top of each other e that not all data points have the same x value 85 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual In addition the logarithmic model the power model and the logistic regression model require that all data points have positive x values The power model also requires that all y values have the same sign positive or negative The logistic regression requires that no values are lower than the specified min value or higher than the specified max value and that not all data points have the same y value If any of the above limitations occur no curve will be drawn and an error message will be displayed in the Legend User Interface I x Model Logistic Regression Properties r Base calculation on Line Selected records Color E 4 M C All records Width 2 v m Trellis plot options Create separate statistics for each trellis panel Create statistics based on entire visualization View Result Help Apply Canc
170. al 2 2 2 2 Arg must be in the interval 1 0 1 0 otherwise NaN is returned The argument and the result are of type real Returns the arctangent of Arg as an angle expressed in radians in the interval z 2 n 2 The argument and the result are of type real Rounds Arg up to the nearest natural number The argument and the result are of type real Example Ceiling 1 01 gt 2 0 Ceiling 1 99 gt 1 0 Returns the cosine of Arg where Arg is an angle expressed in radians The argument and the result are of type real Returns e 2 718281 raised to the Arg power The argument and the result are of type real Rounds Arg down to the nearest natural number The argument and the result are of type real Example Floor 1 99 gt 1 0 Floor 1 01 gt 2 0 Returns the natural logarithm of Arg The arguments and the result are of type real If Arg is negative the result is a NaN error If Arg is zero the result is Infinity error Returns the logarithm of Arg expressed in the base specified by Arg2 Equivalent to Ln Arg Ln Arg2 The arguments and the result are of type real See function Ln for the definition of valid arguments Returns the 10 based logarithm of Arg Equivalent to Ln Arg Ln 10 The arguments and the result are of type real See function Ln for the definition of valid arguments Returns the reminder of the division of Arg by Arg2 The arguments and the result are of t
171. allas Scott 1300 Dallas Jones 1200 Dallas 45 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 46 Chicago Chicago As the information link is opened Salary will be filtered first the order is set using Information James 800 Turner 1000 Builder Lower Upper 1100 1300 The user enters the limits 1100 to 1300 After the first filter the following remains Name Salary Prompt None Range Miller 1300 Ford 1100 Scott 1300 Jones 1200 Location Check Boxes New York Dallas Dallas Dallas Several rows including all Chicago employees have been filtered out This means that when the Location filter is shown Chicago will not be presented as an option T DALLAS T NEW YORK Loading Data 3 4 3 User Interface 3 4 3 1 Information Library Dialog x Information Links H ActivityBase_Pivoted_Stored_Information_Links C ActivityBase_Stored_Information_Links C ScottT ables ugl oiL UGI_actbase_spotlab ai UOl_dblink_1 1 4 Element details No description Help Open Cancel Part Description Information Links Displays the information links to which you have access organized in a folder structure Information Link details Describes the selected information link click an information link once to select it The pane will show the data elements that are included and a description if one exists gt To reach the Information Library dialog Select File g
172. alog to the end user of the Guide To add a tool which you have created using Computation Services you must first open the configuration in Computation Services and select File gt Send to Analysis Builder This will create the action Start Data computation in the Actions in DecisionSite list which can be included in your Guide as any other action Multiple action links It is possible and also often recommended to include several actions in a single link For example if you want the Guide to open an information link and also display one or more visualizations upon clicking the link you can combine these actions to one link Make sure you have performed all actions that you want to include Then click to select all of the actions that should be included and click lt Add Link The actions will be performed in the order that they appear in the Actions in DecisionSite list i e the order you performed them in your analysis Running Guides Locally While you are developing a Guide or if you create Guides that are for your own use only you may want to run a Guide locally on your own computer without giving other users access to it on the server gt Torun a Guide locally 1 Inthe main menu bar of DecisionSite select Guides gt Run from File Response An Open dialog is displayed 2 Browse to the Guide file that you want to run Comment Spotfire Guide files SFG or HTML files may be opened 3 Click Open Response The Guide th
173. amp Numbers Fonts amp Numbers Visualization Settings Advanced Options Category Sample Details on Demand Headers and Footers Legend AaBbCoXx yZz Query Devices Title Visualizations Change Fort Reset This font is used for the annotation when printing or exporting Reset All Default numeric format Integer columns Format Decimal columns Format Cancel Apply Help 2 Click on either the Integers or Decimals button and select either None formatting or a custom one under Number 175 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 9 6 9 176 Number Format x Number of decimal digits Negative numbers I Scientific notation eo a 123 z Use thousands separator m Currency symbol Left Right m Example 1234567 12 Help Cancel 3 Specify the Number of decimal digits how to display Negative numbers and whether or not to Use thousands separators Note The symbol used for thousands separators and decimal separator is determined by the Windows Locale setting 4 Click OK Advanced Options Tab The Advanced Options tab of the Tools gt Options dialog provides some options for fine tuning your Spotfire DecisionSite environment Use the check boxes to enable or disable any of the following features the first four only take effect after Spotfire DecisionSite is restarted Opti
174. an being included in the continuous coloration Applies a two color arrangement to your data in which all values before median 2 stddev are colored the first color red and all values after median 2 stddev are colored the final color blue Outliers are colored either red or blue Values close to the median are easily distinguished Imports a color arrangement from a file Exports a color arrangement to a file This enables you to save a color arrangement and reuse it Switches you to the Advanced Coloring dialog where you can have more control over the way you color your values and ranges gt To change a color in Continuous mode 1 Click on the square of the color that you want to modify 2 Select a color from the palette or click More colors to see the complete color palette gt To change the Marked Empty or Deselected color 1 Click the button of the color that you want to modify 2 Select a color from the palette or click More colors to see the complete color palette gt To switch between the Compact and Extended color views Right click in the Continuous Coloring dialog and select either Compact color view or Extended color view Compact color view is useful when you are creating a connected gradient i e when there are overlaps or holes If for example you have a connected gradient through the points min gt median gt max and you wish to change median to average you only need to change one item in t
175. ancel 8 2 3 10 4 8 2 3 10 5 Tools Constant Boolean x Value C iue false Help OK Cancel DecisionSite Data Set Definition Dialog This dialog defines what data to use in the calculation when the Input Data set option has been chosen for an input parameter DecisionSite Data Set x Records to include from DecisionSite data set C Allrecords Marked records C Selected records Help OK Cancel Click the appropriate radio button to select whether the calculation shall be performed on all records marked records or on records selected using the query devices or zooming only Computation Services Result Dialog This is a dialog containing the results from a Computation Services calculation It displays the input parameters and the output parameters of the executed configuration You can copy selected results by using the pop up menu in the dialog Computation Services Result x Name value input x green input b eye color inputa 1 inputk 33 input m 1 65 inputo True input q Spotfire ComputationServices Dataset FilteredD ataReader inputs D Data testfile txt input u System __ComObject output Y green output 2 eye color output c 1 output 33 output p Spotfire ComputationServices D ataset lmportAgent rapper x Help Close 281 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 2 3 10 6 8 3 282 Open Resulting Data Set in DecisionS
176. ange 1 Right click the zoom bar and select Reset Data Range Axis Labels Axis labels are by default displayed along both the horizontal and vertical axes These can be adjusted in several ways gt To adjust the axis label width height 1 Position the mouse pointer over the axis The mouse pointer changes as seen below 2 Press down the mouse button and drag the axis to the width or height desired Note If the axis labels are hidden simply grab the axis and drag it to make the labels visible again Visualizations Label options By right clicking in the axis label area a pop up menu appears It contains several options Hide Hides the vertical or horizontal axis labels Drag the axis see above to make the labels visible again Fewer Labels Fewer labels are displayed on the axis More Labels More labels are displayed on the axis Label Orientation Sets the label text orientation to either Horizontal or Vertical see below Properties Opens the Properties dialog in which you can set Label spacing and density hs i Scatter Plot 4 9 4 Applying Templates If you open many data sets of a similar nature in DecisionSite Client you may wish to create a template of the usual visualizations you always create certain query device settings you always initially make etc For information on how to save a template see Saving Spotfire Files A template file is basically a standard Spotfire
177. appear in the heading of printouts The annotation will appear as a ToolTip when you place the mouse pointer over the paper clip at the bottom left corner of the visualization This is the research done on the samples taken in 2004 03 Ld 2 64 3 12 gt To set title and annotation 1 Go to the Annotations tab of the Properties dialog 2 Type a title and or an annotation 3 Select the check box Append axes names to visualization title if you want the current axes to be appended to the title 71 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 2 4 8 2 1 72 You can type in a lot of text in the Annotation field as well as cut and paste to and from other Windows applications this can only be done with text however This is a good place for adding information about the purpose and methods used in the visualization features to look for and other helpful information concerning the data The annotation can be printed together with the visualization by selecting the Include annotation option available in the Print Layout Wizard on the File menu Data and Background Tab Data and Background Tab Edit gt Properties gt Data and Background tab Properties Pie Chart xi Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Pies Axes Labels IV X axis Grid IY X grid lines Data Range IV Y axis IV Y arid lines I Zaris I Z gid lines Labels m Background image Fil
178. arance of the visualization can be set annotations made etc 11 4 Toolbar Buttons Quick Reference The following tables describe the toolbar and shortcuts that you can use to create open close save and manipulate your visualizations Look up the action you want to take and perform one of the alternatives shown Most actions can be performed with hot keys from the keyboard Keyboard Shortcut from the menu Menu Command or Mouse or by clicking a toolbar button Toolbar The menus can be reached by pressing the Alt key in combination with the underlined letter key Subsequent underlined letter keys activate the menu items Open an existing file or import a database Import data from file clipboard or database and perform data conditioning Save the present visualization in the same format as when opened Print the active visualization Copy the marked records to the clipboard as text Paste the clipboard contents into Spotfire DecisionSite Reset all query devices and zoom bars Create a new 2D scatter plot Create a new 3D scatter plot Create a new bar chart Create a new pie chart Create a new line chart Create a new profile chart Create a new heat map Create a new table Auto tile visualizations Place all visualizations so they partially overlap each other Place all visualizations next to each Hotkey Ctrl O Ctrl D Ctrl S Ctrl P Ctrl C Ctrl V
179. are of type boolean See also unary operator Example Not true gt false Not false gt true Returns the logical Or of the arguments If any argument is true the result is true Otherwise if any argument is null the result is null If all arguments are false the result is false The arguments and the result are of type boolean Example Or false true false gt true Or true null gt true Or false null gt NULL Returns the logical Xor of the arguments If exactly one argument is true the result is true otherwise false If any or both arguments are null the result is null The arguments and the result are of type boolean Example Xor true false gt true Xor true true gt false Xor true null gt NULL Description Concatenates appends all the arguments into a string The arguments can be of any type but are converted to strings The result is of type string Null arguments are ignored Example Concatenate April 20 1 st gt April 21st Concatenate null Ape gt Ape Concatenate null null gt NULL Returns the 1 based index of the first occurrence of the string Argl in Arg2 If not found 0 is returned The search is case sensitive The arguments are of type string and the result is of type integer If Arg is the empty string 0 is returned Example Find lo Hello gt 4 Find a Hello gt 0 Find Hello gt 0 Find null gt
180. arking records may be to view details or to distinguish records in order to copy erase or in other ways manipulate them gt To mark one or more records 1 Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse the pointer will delineate a rectangle 2 Enclose the markers of interest in this rectangle When the mouse button is released the marked objects will be given a different color and outline Note Marking a pie or bar is equivalent to marking all the records that are included in that pie or bar gt To add more records to the marked set 1 Press and hold Ctrl 2 Click on markers you want to add one by one Alternatively use the mouse to draw a rectangle around several markers while still pressing Ctrl Marking with the lasso A set of graphical objects be they pies bars or scatter plot markers can be lasso selected i e be surrounded by a line drawn in an arbitrary shape Press the Shift key and the left mouse button then draw a line capturing the markers Note that a straight line connects the beginning and the endpoints of the lasso marquee The line delineates the area that will be included in the selection Note For a record to be marked its exact coordinates must be within the bounds of the selecting line Just slicing through part of an enlarged marker will not suffice Setting colors for marked objects Marked records will be given an identifying color in all visualizations You can define this colo
181. arks on the X axis Click on Create Binned Column to add a new column to the data set containing the binned values Create Binned Column can also be reached from the right click menu of the axis selector Bar Charts Color Edit gt Properties gt Bars tab Visualizations Fixed Coloring If fixed coloring is selected one color is assigned to all bars If you are displaying Multiple Columns the bars of each column will by default be a different color gt To Specify the Fixed Color for a Column 1 Select Edit gt Properties Select the Bars tab Select the radio button called Fixed Click on the Customize button Select a column from the list and pick a color for it in the palette to the right Click OK Sy We GB Categorical Coloring In single column mode you can use categorical coloring for the bars which means that each bar is divided into differently colored sections representing another column of your data set See Bar Chart Layout Details for more information about different layout options gt To Specify Categorical Coloring 1 Select Edit gt Properties 2 Select the Bars tab 3 Select the radio button called Categorical Note You cannot set Categorical coloring when using Multiple Columns Select the column you want to color the sections by 5 Optionally you can also click the Customize button to set the specific colors used 1333 1500 v Avg of Revenue 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2 Frist
182. ashi Takahashi Takahashi Olsen Olsen Olsen Ottosson Ottosson Ottosson Olsson Olsson Olsson James James James Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Florida Florida Florida Japan Japan Japan Japan Japan Japan Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe Florida Florida Florida Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Working with the Data 24 31 30 29 29 32 33 24 26 25 45 38 39 47 40 45 26 25 29 25 24 26 23 22 28 32 The resulting data set can easily be displayed as a bar chart showing the total sum of sales for each year categorically colored by region 245 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 246 Query Devices Name All v Sum of Sales Region lv Europe Wily Florida OF Japan WJ New Jersey BV New York Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 DF Texas ee H vea gt Year Scatter Plot lil Bar Chart M Sales 2003 gt How to do it 1 Select Sales 2005 Sales 2004 and Sales 2003 as Columns to transform 2 Select Region and Name as Columns to pass through 3 Type Year as the Category column name and make sure String is
183. at to a tall skinny format Consider the following short wide table containing sales data for a fictive company 243 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Name Region Sales 2003 Sales 2004 Sales 2005 Connelly New Jersey 23 22 25 Fallon New Jersey 34 37 38 Smiths New York 21 30 32 Bergman New York 35 35 35 Taylor Texas 24 23 24 Roberts Texas 31 30 29 Miller Texas 29 32 33 Hanegan Florida 24 26 25 Suzuki Japan 45 38 39 Takahashi Japan 47 40 45 Olsen Europe 26 25 29 Ottosson Europe 25 24 26 Olsson Europe 23 22 28 James Florida 32 If you want to view how the sales figures from the different regions vary during the years in a bar chart the current format is not always optimal By depivoting the data set to a tall skinny format with all sales figures in a single column you will be able to create a suitable bar chart with minimal effort Name Region Year Sales Connelly New Jersey Sales 2003 23 Connelly New Jersey Sales 2004 22 Connelly New Jersey Sales 2005 25 Fallon New Jersey Sales 2003 34 Fallon New Jersey Sales 2004 37 Fallon New Jersey Sales 2005 38 Smiths New York Sales 2003 21 Smiths New York Sales 2004 30 Smiths New York Sales 2005 32 Bergman New York Sales 2003 35 Bergman New York Sales 2004 35 Bergman New York Sales 2005 35 Taylor Texas Sales 2003 24 Taylor Texas Sales 2004 23 244 Taylor Roberts Roberts Roberts Miller Miller Miller Hanegan Hanegan Hanegan Suzuki Suzuki Suzuki Takah
184. at type of information is included in the new value column For instance Sales would be a good name for a column containing sales figures for several different years Specify the data type for the respective column A column containing names should be set to string whereas a column containing figures should be decimal or integer gt To reach the Depivot Short Wide gt Tall Skinny dialog Select Data gt Depivot Data Transpose Data Transpose Data Overview The Transpose Data tool is used to rotate a data set so that columns become records and vice versa Transposing may be necessary if you want to be able to use your data in a certain type of visualization or if you just want to get a better overlook the data Using Transpose Data Transposing Columns Transposing a data set means rotating it so that columns become records and vice versa gt To transpose columns 1 Select Data gt Transpose Data Response The Transpose Data wizard step 1 is opened 2 Select an identifier column from the drop down list Comment Each value in the selected column will become a column name in the transposed data set 3 Select whether to create columns from All records or just Selected records Comment The transposed data set will have the same number of columns as the number of records selected The upper limit is 5000 4 Click Next gt Response Step 2 of the wizard is shown 5 Select the columns you want to include
185. at you have selected is opened in the Guides pane Follow the instructions in the Guide as usual Tip If you want to test the Guide during development select Guide gt Run in Analysis Builder This will immediately display the Guide inside the Guides pane It is not necessary to save the Guide prior to testing Prompting Guide Users for Input All properties are saved with their respective visualization when you add that visualization to the Guide However there may be occasions when you want the end user of the Guide to be able to specify which columns to use on different axes which column to color the markers by etc upon running the Guide Guides gt To prompt for input to visualizations 1 10 In the Actions in DecisionSite list click to select the visualizations that you want the new link to create Comment See How the Actions in DecisionSite list works for more information on how to populate the list Make sure that Edit gt Show Add Link Dialogs is selected with a check mark Click lt Add Link Response The Link Properties dialog is displayed Click on the visualization action that you want to add prompting to in the Actions performed when clicking the link list Response The Prompts button is activated Comment Prompting is not supported for multiple color bands in pie charts Click Prompts Response The Prompt for dialog is displayed Comment This dialog varies depending on which type of
186. ates a record A persistent ring surrounds the object Information about the record corresponding to the marker that was clicked displays in the Details on Demand window Left drag Marks the records that are inside the rubber band box delineated by the pointer s diagonal movement These markers will be given another color A table of details will be displayed in the Details on Demand window If no markers are surrounded all previously marked objects will be unmarked Shift left drag Marks records using the lasso tool Draw an arbitrary shape around the markers you want to mark If none are surrounded all objects will be unmarked Ctrl left drag Adds markers to the set of marked records using the rectangle rubber band box tool Ctrl Shift left drag Adds markers to the set of marked records using a lasso function Ctrl Shift left drag Adds markers to the set of marked objects using a lasso function to the set of marked records Quick Reference Mouse wheel Zooms in and out in the visualization Ctrl right click Zooms in from the visualization Ctrl Shift right click Zooms out from the visualization Right click in visualization Brings up the visualization context pop up menu 11 5 2 Mouse Shortcuts 3D Scatter Plots Mouse over marker Identical to 2D scatter plots Left click on marker Identical to 2D scatter plots Ctrl drag using the right mouse button or drag using the middle mo
187. ation 2 ee Scatter Plot Details on Demand e aiee ii Window 5 Connected to ewtactary dutrduhon al f The Peod ia Cnet 4l 4 Tje fT dk a Visualizations Visualizations are the key to analyzing data in Spotfire DecisionSite A variety of visualization types can be used to provide the best view of the data Scatter Plots Bar Charts Pie Charts Line Charts Profile Charts Heat Maps Tables Different types of visualizations can be shown simultaneously They are linked and are updated dynamically when the query devices are manipulated see below Visualizations can be made to reflect high dimensional data by letting values control visual attributes such as size color shape rotation and text labels Introduction The Query Device window Query devices are used to filter your data Query devices appear in several forms and you can easily select a type of query device that best suits your needs e g check boxes sliders etc When you manipulate a query device by moving a slider or selecting a check box all visualizations are immediately updated to reflect the new selection of data The Details on Demand window The Details on Demand window can be used to show the exact values of a record or group of records By clicking a record in a visualization or marking several records by drawing a rectangle around them you can study their numerical values and textual data in a tabular fo
188. ation on its own tab A click on a tab activates the corresponding visualization and allows manipulation and modification of its attributes To put Spotfire DecisionSite into Workbook mode select Workbook from the View menu a a 2000 4000 141 O si Scatter Plot Bar Chart f Pie Chart You can change the order of the tabs by right clicking on a tab and selecting Move gt First Left Right Last from the pop up menu Combining Workbook with Auto tile With Windows gt Auto Tile off pages in the Workbook retain the size that they had been given decreasing the size of the application window will crop portions of some visualizations With the Auto Tile function on clicking on a Workbook tab gives the chosen visualization priority position and size Duplicate Visualization By selecting Visualization gt Duplicate Visualization you can create a copy of the currently selected visualization This is useful if you have created a visualization with different settings and you wish to create an identical copy in which you then want to change some aspect and compare the two Visualizations 4 9 6 6 Customizing Visualizations The Tools gt Options gt Visualization Settings tab allows you to control certain aspects of the visualizations Hiding axis selectors Axis selectors can be made to automatically disappear when the visualization size is less than a certain threshold value Click Auto Hide Axis Selectors and set threshold
189. ay the categories in four different ways e Stacked bars e Side by side bars e 100 stacked bars e 100 side by side bars If you want to compare the proportions of different categories for e g different time periods you can use either of the 100 layout options in the Properties dialog With 100 stacked bars all bars will be of equal height 100 unless some negative values exist in the data Visualizations jx o 5 5500 4000 4500 Bar Chart The height of a bar represents z the of the sum of Revenue z Color by City v HB Boston E Dallas O Seattle Total value 1999 2000 2001 2002 The labels show the height of A 7 E a In the example above one can see that the Seattle revenue yellow has affected the total revenue more during 2002 than in previous years whereas the Dallas revenue blue has decreased in importance See Bar chart layout details for more information If the categories are split to several columns categorical coloring can also be shown via differently colored bars in multiple columns see below gt Make a new bar chart in one of the following ways e Press Ctrl 4 on the keyboard e Click the New Bar Chart button on the toolbar W e Select New Bar Chart from the Visualization menu Count Sum Average The height of the bars can be set to represent three different aggregation methods Count Sum or Average You select this by clicking on the Axis Selector for th
190. be the relationship between response to drug treatment and drug dose or concentration These type of curves are often semi logarithmic with log drug concentration on the X axis On the Y axis one can show measurements of enzyme activity accumulation of an intracellular second messenger or measurements of heart rate or muscle contraction 89 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 90 The current implementation of the logistic regression fit uses the following equation max min x where min and max are the lower and upper asymptotes of the curve Hill is the slope of the curve at its midpoint and X50 is the x coordinate of the inflection point x y This model requires that x gt 0 for all data points and that you use at least four records to calculate the curve inflection point Note The logistic regression model of DecisionSite does not assume logarithmic values of x and X50 unlike some other curve fitting software Hence if your input data is logarithmic you might want to create a column that is not logarithmic before you apply the logistic regression curve fit in order to obtain similar results to the ones you are used to For example by using Data gt New Column gt By Expression If you want the curve to be displayed on a logarithmic form right click in the Query Devices window and select Set Property gt Log Scale 2nd order Polynomial The second order polynomial fit or quadratic curve calc
191. be used for continuous coloring Any values not included in the range are given a specific color Colors representing minimum and maximum values are set with the Customize dialog Begin and End categories define the color limits When one of the categories is selected you can choose which color will represent that end of the value range A line with the color scale is displayed below the corresponding query device Categorical Categorical coloring means that each value in the chosen column is given its own color However categorical coloring makes most sense if there are less than ten unique values To control which color is assigned to each value click Customize Customize Colors Regardless of coloring mode the choice of colors can be controlled by clicking Customize on the Markers tab of the Properties dialog Depending on the current coloring mode the top most list will display the fixed color Begin and End colors continuous mode or the color associated to each category categorical mode The other list displays colors associated with deselected empty and marked records Empty refers to records for which no value is specified in the column used for coloring Overlapping Color Ranges It is possible to specify overlapping color ranges This means that the value of a marker can be inside several ranges but the marker will always only have one color DecisionSite uses the following method to determine which color range will be
192. bin A list of all values in the column is shown Cherry picking is useful when you want to be very specific with how you group your values It is not recommended to use cherry picking when loading data sets from external sources linked data as the new values will become empty values gt To bin a column by Cherry Picking 1 Select Data gt New Column gt By Binning Response The New Column by Binning dialog is launched 2 Select a Column to bin 213 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 Select Cherry Picking as method and click the Settings button Response The Cherry Picking dialog is launched 4 Tocreate anew bin click New Bin Select the desired values in the Available values field and click Add gt gt to add the values to a bin Use the Rename Bin button or F2 to rename bins When all values have been assigned a bin click OK Type a New column name for the binned column or use the default name Click OK O ANGA Based on Standard Deviation This method works for numeric columns The range is divided into sections as described by the selected standard deviation multipliers Bins are created using standard deviations 0 5 1 2 3 6 In the example below the range is divided into the following six subsections u denoting the average value for the column and s the corresponding standard deviation lower limit gt u 3s u 3s gt p s a s gt u H gt uts uts g
193. ble visualizations This exports the Spotfire DecisionSite visualizations to a new PowerPoint presentation This appends pictures of the selected visualizations as new slides at the end of an open presentation If several presentations are open select one from the drop down list box Select a visualization output format from the drop down list Choose from PNG JPG or EMF formats Select whether to use a Small Normal Large or Extra Large font size when exporting to PowerPoint The selection made here affects all labels in the visualization including the axis labels and the legend The image in the dialog shows what the PowerPoint presentation might look like gt To reach the Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation dialog Select File gt Export gt Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation 339 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 10 6 10 6 1 10 6 2 340 Microsoft Word Presentation Exporting Visualizations to Word The Microsoft Word Presentation tool exports the selected visualizations to Microsoft Word Each visualization is added to a new page in a Word document along with the annotation legend and title Tip Also note other Export options can be found under the File menu gt To export visualizations to Word 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Create visualizations in Spotfire DecisionSite If necessary edit the titles and annotations of the visualizations Sel
194. bracket and the dollar sign will be placed before each ID in the query Similarly anything placed between the dollar sign and the right bracket will be placed after each ID in the query 4 Select the ID column which contains the information you want to use as input to the web search Note If you intend to link to an ISIS database use the column with the Compound ID 5 Enter a Name for the custom Details on Demand you have just configured This is the name which will appear in the drop down list 6 Click OK gt To configure a previously created Web Search 1 Select the Web Search you want from the drop down list 2 Click on the Configure button 3 The dialog opens and you can configure the web search 4 Click OK when you are done 10 4 6 4 Poster Supported Features Not all functionality available in Spotfire DecisionSite Client can be used in a Poster When you create a Poster and your Analysis contains unsupported features a notification dialog will be displayed with information about unsupported features Note Only unsupported features used in your Analysis are shown e Publish Poster to Library Unsupported Features x Some visualizations or settings in your analysis are currently not supported by Spotfire DecisionSite Posters and cannot be included in the new Poster Visualizations not included Table Plot type not supported Custom Plot Scatter Plot Plot type not supported 3D Scatter Plot Columns that
195. cal coloring is applied you have the option to display the categories in four different ways e Stacked bars e Side by side bars e 100 stacked bars e 100 side by side bars The categorical coloring layout is changed in the Properties dialog Edit gt Properties gt Bars tab Different layout modes are more or less useful for different types of aggregations Sum Average and Count Below is a description of what you will see when you use the different layout options and aggregations Count With Count the height of a bar represents the number of records with a particular value All layout options will display positive bars and show the contribution of each category to the total of the group Example In a data set containing personal data the different eye color categories contain a different number of people 4 5 5 Also by using the 100 stacked bar option it is easy to see that women are slightly over represented in the blue eye color category 134 Visualizations Type here to search eye color a IV blue M brown IV green 4 Count gender WIV female EIV male height rm blue brown green 1 47 1 92 ae EM iad la eye color Ho weight kg a 769 Sum With Sum the height of the bar indicates the total sum of the values of all records in that bar The various categorical coloring layout options show the contribution of all categories to the total sum Option Height of each ca
196. category The length of each bar is proportional to the count sum or the average of the values in the category it represents such as age group or geographical location In DecisionSite it is also possible to color or split each bar into another categorical column in the data which enables you to see the contribution from different categories to each bar in the bar chart 59 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 60 3 Year City Revenue 1999 Boston 3000 s 1999 Dallas 2000 3 1999 Seattle 500 2000 Boston 2000 2000 Dallas 3000 2000 Seattle 1000 2001 Boston 2500 2001 Dallas 1000 AD Yea v 2001 Seattle 500 la Bar Chart 2002 Boston 3000 2002 Dallas 500 2002 Seattle 1000 The above picture demonstrates how bar charts can be used Say for example that you want to show the total yearly revenue of a company with offices in three different cities The bar chart sums the revenue for the three cities and displays them per year Bar charts can also be categorically colored which means that the partial sums of the bars are colored differently Expanding the Legend shows the meaning of each color zzi Bar Chart The height of a bar represents the sum of Revenue Color by City m Boston Dallas C Seattle 4 7 Sum of Revenue Total value 1999 2000 2001 2002 The labels show the height of A each bar Py Te Yer When categorical coloring is applied you have the option to displ
197. catter Plots iinn o d a ea a a ee ae ee he ea ee 58 B r Chanso re A deed oda dae eee eee ee ae tee 59 Pie Charts vie tacewhe tied nina tied 4 Mor tee titi aig neta bee 62 ne La ep SE eee eT 63 Profile Charts sivscnutacet ate datedee aorta ned eo aerial ative ladies 64 Feat Mapes evessheiiiges he oien iy ietags ees eieioh a ara Haein de a eee 65 Table Siela teehee ati a aie el hace aig tidied eed Mania aint iene eee 68 Properties Dialog eei ed aa eee A ae ne ed T EEEE 70 Working with VisualiZation S eraa sane ETE santa cd sine ERAAI E AAA sine ONEKA TES 164 QUERY DEVICES irisi a ete etait aes a iniedi 180 Whati a Query DeVICG aeien aa E A AAEE AE EES 180 Range SGTS e E ENS 181 Item Sliders s a etn a a a ete aa ete A A a a ia an ag 183 AlE ES anete ae g REEE T E T A T cibtdateacheestena atads 184 Cheek m10 CEEE E cast E eas A E A T 187 Radio BUOM eiiie oea a a na aaaea e e aa A a aaa Dias aa EE aE 188 Changing the Type of Query Devices 00 00 eee eceneee ee enne ee ee etteeeee tates ee eaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeeenenaeeeeseaes 188 Moving Individual Query DeVICES reodere A EA EE 189 Sorting the Query Devices saoiri koiriin iori einni Re Era ENEE AE bende eh tande NE ESA E AE 190 Hidinga Query Devices eessen celebs oniani taai ladies ides Se ides et hides AE Airi A r S 191 Entering a Value for a Slider morser iieii i i a o E 192 IIGICATONS Aa a a eed de eee 193 Changing Column Name i 20 420eticeeieel eect aevene n i ia ai aerieni arii i ei 193
198. ch laa _ Blue indicates active Query Device Lae Ca C Radio buttons o C4 You can also navigate between the query devices using your keyboard F3 up arrow or F3 down arrow will move you up or down one query device F3 home or F3 end will move you to the first or last query device 5 2 Range Sliders Range sliders allow the selection of a range of values The left and right drag box can be used to change the lower and upper limit of the range meaning that only records with values within the chosen range are selected and therefore visible in the visualization Labels above the slider indicate the selected span The range can also be adjusted with the arrow keys when the query device is active left and right arrows move the lower limit left drag box and up and down arrow keys move the upper limit The slider automatically jumps to values in the data set not necessarily the visible or selected records The currently selected interval of the range slider can be grabbed and moved to pan the selected range this provides a powerful way of sweeping over different slices of a data set Click and drag the yellow portion of the range slider to do this Observing the reactions the other sliders to such a sweep can give some interesting clues to correlation between parameters in the data set Range of selected objects Unemploym nt ppm 12 285 gt Selected range An important feature of the range slide
199. ch Guide do you want to publish Guide saved in file from Analysis Builder SFG File Browse C Guide with custom developed code Source code folder m Bach Next gt Cancel Option Description Guide saved in file To publish a Guide created with Analysis Builder click Browse to from Analysis Builder locate the SFG file containing the Guide SFG File Tip You can publish Analysis Builder Guides directly in Analysis Builder Guide with custom To Publish a custom made Guide click Browse to locate the folder developed code in which it is stored Custom made Guides are Guides not created Source code folder with Analysis Builder Next gt Proceeds to Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 2 3 gt To reach the Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 1 3 dialog Select Guides gt Publish to Library from the menu 9 6 2 2 Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 2 3 This step lets you specify where in the Library your Guide should the published Navigate in the Library by using double click on Library Sections and folders 311 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Publish Guide to Library Step2 3 x Home gt General DecisionSite New Folder XX Delete f Properties Members Type Title Description e zj Actresses and film popularity Example Do a drill down on interesti Guide title Football Help lt Back Next gt Cancel Options Description
200. check box is cleared the current column name will be unchanged after import gt To reach the SAS Data Import Columns Selection dialog 1 Select File gt Import gt Import Data 2 Inthe Select Data Source dialog select File 3 Inthe Open dialog select the SAS data file Click Open SAS Column Formatting Spotfire DecisionSite allows you to import SAS Data files of the format sas7bdat and sd2 into DecisionSite It is also possible to open sd7 files if they are first renamed to have a sas7bdat extension Other file formats are not supported at this time If the Map data to Spotfire compatible types check box is selected in the SAS Data Import Column Selection dialog or if a SAS file is opened without the data import dialog Spotfire DecisionSite attempts to reproduce the data type that SAS would for the same data If it is not selected raw data will be read from the SAS data file and columns will be of the type string or decimal The table below shows how the SAS formats are used to map the data to Spotfire DecisionSite specific data types SAS Format date dateampm datetime day ddmmyy downame dtdate dtmonyy dtyear dtyyqe hour julian mmddyy mmyy monname Spotfire Type Date DateTime DateTime Integer Date String DateTime DateTime Integer DateTime Integer String Date Date String month monyy octal qtr qtrr timeampm tod weekdate weekdatx weekday worddate worddatx xyymmdd yea
201. ckground Image Position 2D Scatter Plot Markers Fixed Color Continuous Color Categorical Color Yes No Saving and Exporting Data Simple Search will be interpreted as Regular Expression Shown as a tooltip icon in the Poster query devices Also note that Categorical Coloring on a transformed column is not supported In such a case the coloring will be changed to Fixed color Will be transformed to Original Scale and the selection is set to All Must be a BMP PNG or JPG image Note Only continuous color schemes with two gradients ranging from min to max are supported by Posters Three color gradients or advanced coloring is not supported See Advanced Color below for more information Categorical Coloring on a transformed column is 333 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 334 Advanced Coloring Shape Size Size By Drawing Order Jitter Rotate Line Connection Bar Chart Properties X Axis Column Background Image Bar Chart Bars Fixed Color Categorical Color Show deselected Width Outline Bars Labels Stacked bars Side by side bars 100 stacked bars 100 side by side bars Drop empty bars not supported In such a case the coloring will be changed to Fixed color The scatter plot in Posters only supports purely categorical color schemes or continuous color schemes with one range from min to max If there is a mixture of ranges and categorical valu
202. cking on the hyperlink The address must begin with either http or file gt To reach the Hyperlink Properties dialog 1 In the Text Properties dialog select the word that you want to create a hyperlink from 2 Click on the Hyperlink button 5l Link Properties Dialog The Link Properties dialog is specific to each link in your Guide Here you can edit the link text and view which actions will be performed upon clicking the link This is especially useful if you have created links performing multiple actions Link Properties x Text to display Create visualizations M Actions performed when clicking the link 1 Original data Signal for SO1_Embryonic_1 txt Signal for SO2_Embryonic_2 Prompts 2 Row summarized data Embryonic Average Neonatal Average 1 Week lt 3 z score normalized data Embryonic Average Z Scores Neonatal Average 7 Close all previous visualizations before performing the actions in this link I Don t show this dialog again Help Option Text to display Actions performed when clicking the link Prompts Close all previous visualizations before performing the actions in this link Don t show this dialog again OK Cancel Description Edit the default text to display a link text of your choice in the new Guide Displays the actions that are part of the current link If multiple actions are included in the link the actions are ordered i
203. configuration using Computation Services l If Computation Services is not already open select Tools gt Computation Services gt SAS or R or S PLUS or whatever the type of computation server you are running against Select File gt Connector Settings and specify the address to your Server Select whether to Keep session open until manually closed or not See Connector Settings dialog for more information about this option Create the script by either typing or pasting existing script code in the Script field of Computation Services Add the desired input parameters to the Input Parameters tab and specify whether they should be prompted or not Add the desired output parameters to the Output Parameters tab Specify how you want to present your results on the Result Handling tab Test the configuration by selecting Execute gt Run View the Execution Log to see if there were any errors during execution If there were any problems go back to fix them Select File gt Send to Analysis Builder and add the Start Data computation R action or whatever the type of computation you have created to a suitable Guide 8 2 2 3 Example Configuration Below is the creation of a very simple configuration shown in detail to exemplify how you can work with Computation Services The workflow would be exactly the same for S PLUS and SAS servers Note For information on how to write scripts please refer to any literature for the
204. contain unsupported features Binned Length Contains synonyms values and selection might differ M Show this message at startup Help Close Option Description Visualizations not included All unsupported visualizations in your Analysis are listed here with the details of the reason You will not be able to use these visualizations in your Poster Columns that contain Each column with a formatting not supported is listed here unsupported features The columns can be used in the Poster However no formatting will be applied Also some binned columns from older versions are not supported The table below explains which features and settings can be transferred to a Poster 331 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 332 Note Since version 8 0 DecisionSite Client includes a new type of Bar Chart which replaces Bar Charts and Histograms version 7 x Bar Charts and Histograms of version 7 x must be converted to 8 x bar charts in DecisionSite Client before being published as a Poster Note All Spotfire DecisionSite users can launch Spotfire DecisionSite Client from within a Poster This will provide full DecisionSite functionality Tip Move the mouse pointer over the visualization template in the Create Poster dialog to display a ToolTip text which states any unsupported properties of the visualization Aspect Visualizations 2D Scatter Plot 3D Scatter Plot Bar Chart Bar Chart version 7 x Histogra
205. create your own coloring arrangement Removes a selected value Ctrl click to select multiple items for deletion Shows the color of the records that have been marked Shows the color of the empty records Empty refers to records that have at least one empty field These records are not shown at all in visualizations where an axis corresponds to the missing field Other Deselected Templates gt gt Two color gradient for all records gt Three color gradient for all records gt Two color gradient for visible records gt Three color gradient for visible records gt Two color gradient highlighting outliers gt Two color gradient resisting outliers Import Export Advanced Visualizations Shows the color of values that are not included in a range continuous Shows the color of the deselected values Deselected refers to records that do not fulfill the constraints of the query devices Applies a two color color arrangement to your data one color as your minimum value and one as your maximum value Applies a three color color arrangement to your data one color as your minimum value one as your maximum value and the third color as a central value Applies a two color color arrangement to your visible data Applies a three color color arrangement to your visible data Applies a two color color arrangement to your data but outliers are highlighted in another color rather th
206. ct one of the following alternatives Add to Current Data Set Automatic Key Matching Add to Current Data Set Row by Row Replace Current Data Set or Open in Other DecisionSite Instance Note The result handlers for adding columns will only be visible in the Add menu if you have defined at least one output parameter of the type Dataset Make sure that you have defined at least one output parameter as the data type File On the Result Handling tab click Add From the menu select the Launch File option Note The Launch File result handler will only be visible in the Add menu if you have defined at least one output parameter of the type File In Computation Services select Execute gt Run In Computation Services select File gt Save Test your configuration to make sure it is fully functional In Computation Services select File gt Send to Analysis Builder In Analysis Builder select the action Start Data computation SAS or R S PLUS etc Click lt Add Link Complete the Guide in Analysis Builder and Save it Tip For more information about how to create Guides see Analysis Builder Overview Tools Minimize Computation Click on the top right x button This will hide Computation Services Services but the current configuration will be remembered when you reopen the tool Close Computation Services In Computation Services select File gt Exit 8 2 2 2 Suggested Workflow gt Tocreate a new script
207. d CSV values are separated by the default list separator This is a Regional Setting property of your system Comma is used in the US TXT values are separated by tabs SKV values are separated by semicolons All these file formats are simple and text based they do not contain any formatting or product specific information The CSV and SKV formats can be exported from many spreadsheet and database programs Many research tools produce output in these formats as well Note Spotfire Text Data Format is also available see Spotfire Text Data Format Specifications for more information Column Separators Individual fields column names type strings and values are delimited by column separators usually commas semicolons or tabs but the pipe symbol is also recognized Spotfire DecisionSite automatically decides which character is interpreted as separator To do this Spotfire DecisionSite checks the first line in the database for the following characters Loading Data Separator Name ASCII code tab Horizontal tab invisible on screen 9 Comma 44 Semicolon 59 Pipe 124 The most common character of the ones above is selected as separator characters enclosed in quotation marks are not considered All following lines are assumed to use this most common character as column separator Note e To load text data that uses a column separator different from those mentioned above use the Import Data option
208. d select New Column gt By Binning 7 2 3 2 Cherry Picking Dialog xi Available values Bins lt lt Remove New Bin Rename Bin OK Cancel Option Available values Add gt gt lt lt Remove New Bin Rename Bin Description The values available for use in the binning Click a value in the list to select it To select more than one value press Ctrl and click the values in the list Moves selected columns from the Available values field to the selected bin in the Bins field Removes a column and brings it back to the Available values field Creates a new bin into which you can add values from the Available values field Allows you to rename the bins with names of your choosing 217 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 2 3 3 Edit Bin Names Dialog xi A new column has been created Binned Carbon Double click to change the bin names in the new column Bin Name Name to Display lt 15 Lower Values 15 lt x lt 19 19 lt 8 lt 23 23 lt 8 27 27 lt u Option Description Bin name Displays the default names from the New Column by Binning dialog New name Allows you to rename the bins with names of your own choosing Double click on a bin to change the name Note You are not required to change the names of the bins If you feel the default names are sufficient simply click OK 7 3 New Column from Marked Records 7
209. d after you have executed this operation gt Invert Ctrl I gt Select Ctrl M gt New Column gt Create New Portfolio List gt Add to Portfolio List Same Scale for All Cascade All Maximize All Show Markers Annotate Copy Ctrl C Duplicate Visualization Properties Alt Enter Profile charts Option Zoom gt Hotkey gt Zoom to Selection gt Reset Zooming Trellis Quick Reference Inverts the set of marked records Marks all unmarked records and unmarks the set of marked records Sets the selection to the marked records Creates a temporary filter so that only the marked records are visible Opens the New Column from Marked Records dialog where you can add a new column showing whether records are included in the marked group or not Creates a new list with the marked records to the Portfolio The list is placed as the last item on root level Adds the marked records from the visualization into your currently active Portfolio list Sets all line charts to use the same scale Same as the One for all scale mode option in the Properties dialog Sets the Scale and Position of all columns so that each of them will occupy a separate slot of the window height Set the Scale and Position on every column so they utilize the whole height of the window Displays or hides markers in the line chart Opens the Properties dialog to the Annotations tab where you can pro
210. d in the lower right corner of the main window It can of course be moved to another location if desirable The details for a single active record are presented in a vertical table those for several marked records in a horizontal table Adjusting column width The width of the columns in the Details on Demand text display can be adjusted By default the width is as wide as the header of the column To change the width place the mouse pointer on the separating line in the column header The mouse pointer will change shape as shown in the illustration below Click and drag the separator to the desired position If you double click on the separator the column width will collapse or expand to fit the longest value in the table 195 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Os Pd Pt Re Ah Ru Atomic Numbesh gt Atomic Mass 76 190 46 106 78 195 T9 186 45 102 44 101 Note Columns can be completely hidden from view To find a column that accidentally has been minimized move the separator along the column headers until it is changed into a double separator as seen below then click and drag to resize the hidden column Element 54 Atomic Number Os Pd Pt Re Rh 76 46 78 75 45 Sorting values in columns The values in all columns in the Details on Demand window can be sorted alphabetically and or numerically You can use either increasing or decreasing sort order gt To sort a Details on Demand col
211. d in the table Note You can right click on the Name header to get a pop up menu where you can select other attributes you would like to be visible Columns in table These columns are included in the table The order of this list corresponds to the order the columns are shown in the Table visualization Add gt gt Select a column from the left list and press the Add gt gt button to move it to the right list and include it in the table lt lt Remove Select a column from the right list and press the lt lt Remove button to move it back to the available columns list and remove it from the table Remove All Removes all columns from the right list and moves them to the available columns list Move First Select a column from the right list and press the Move First button to move it to the top This changes the order the columns are displayed in the table Move Up Select a column from the right list and press the Move Up button to move it a step up This changes the order the columns are displayed in the table Move Down Select a column from the right list and press the Move Down button to move it a step down This changes the order the columns are displayed in the table Move Last Select a column from the right list and press the Move Last button to 163 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual move it to the bottom This changes the order the columns are displayed in the table 4 9 Working with Visualizatio
212. d later treats two strings as different if they contain the same sequence of characters but not the same case Selecting the Normalize case filter will mimic the old behavior gt To apply a conditioning method 1 Select a data source 2 Click Next gt 3 Select a method from the drop down list 4 Make the required settings 5 Click OK 23 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 24 Applying Multiple Conditioning Methods When applying several transformations on top of each other it is important to decide in which order the methods should be applied Once one conversion has been applied the next conversion will apply to the output from the previous one and so on gt To apply multiple conditioning methods l 2 3 Select a method from the drop down list Configure the method and click OK Repeat from step 1 as many times as required Tall Skinny Short Wide Conversion Tall Skinny to Short Wide Conversion Tall Skinny to Short Wide conversion is a method for modifying the format of a data table during import It can be used for pivoting and aggregating data Note You can also reach this dialog via Data gt Pivot Data if you want to apply pivoting to an already opened data set See Pivot Data for more examples gt To apply Tall Skinny to Short Wide conversion to your original data 1 ye ee 9 Select File gt Import gt Import Data Select a da
213. d press ENTER Atomic Number 89 gt K gt To enter a minimum value 1 Click on the left drag box 2 Type the desired minimum value 192 Query Devices gt To move the full text search slider 1 Click on the drag box 2 Type the desired value Country Ireland Note the difference between entering a value in the full text search field which filters out a subset of the data set in this example all countries containing the letters land and entering a value on the drag box which moves the slider in this example the first country containing the letters Eng Note Note that no edit field will appear in which to type the value Simply type the value after clicking and the slider will adjust itself Note An item slider or full text search slider will adjust itself to the existing value nearest possible to the value you typed where as a range slider will adjust to the exact value you typed 5 12 Indicators The Query Devices can display two types of indicators a paper clip icon which indicates that the column has an annotation and a letter e which indicates that the column contains empty values In order to see these indicators you must switch on this option Do this by opening the Columns tab of the Properties dialog Then select the check box marked Show indicators in query devices Annotating columns See Annotating Columns for more information Empty values By default the query devic
214. d the dollar sign will be placed before each ID in the query Likewise anything placed between the dollar sign and the right bracket will be placed after each ID in the query The preview shows you what the query will look like The separator that should be used between the IDs in a query with more than one record Click on a web link in the list of Available web links to edit the delimiter in this field Adds the default web links that Spotfire DecisionSite Statistics is shipped with to the list of Available web links The current links are not updated instead copies of the links are added This allows you to have two different versions of the default links For example one version could contain your own personal settings Adds a New web link to the list of available web links and lets you edit its name URL and Delimiter in the fields to the right Deletes the selected web link s in the list of Available web links Tools Preview Shows you a preview of the URL with three IDs Apple Orange and Pear instead of the placeholder dollar sign within curly brackets gt To reach the Web Links Options dialog Select Tools gt Web Links to display the Web Links dialog Then click on the Options button to the lower left in the Web Links dialog 8 2 Computation Services 8 2 1 Computation Services Overview The Computation Services is built to allow you to add any specific type of computation or tool to your analysis
215. d to create a more compact table Consider the following table based on a series of temperature measurements Loading Data City Month Day Temp London February 1 5 London February 15 8 London May 1 15 London May 15 22 New York February 1 9 New York February 15 7 New York May 1 18 New York May 15 24 Tall Skinny gt Short Wide conversion lets us pivot and aggregate this table producing the following City avg Temp for February avg Temp for May London 6 5 18 5 New York 8 21 A smaller table has been created summarizing the original table In the Tall Skinny gt Short Wide dialog the following settings would be made Identity City Category Month Values Temp 3 3 4 Favorites 3 3 4 1 Creating Favorites Favorites are combinations of data sources and data conditioning methods A favorite stores all settings made during a session with the Import Data dialogs A favorite may for example specify a database all the information required to log on and a data conditioning method Favorites can also specify just a data source or just a preprocessing method gt To create a favorite 1 Define a data source as described in Selecting a Data Source 2 Define a data conditioning method as described in Data Conditioning 3 In Save Session dialog specify a name for your favorite e g Average temperature 1961 1991 You can also add a description 4 Under Favorite options select both Include reference to data
216. d to specify which file that is the start page of the Guide Note Only visible if you selected to publish a custom Guide in Publish to Library Wizard Step 1 3 Finish Click Finish to publish your Guide and proceed to the Publish to Library Guide Published dialog where you can find information on 313 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual notify your colleagues gt Toreach the Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 3 3 dialog 1 Select Guides gt Publish to Library from the menu 2 Select which type of Guide you want to publish in Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 1 3 and click Next gt 3 Specify the location in the Library in Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 2 3 and click Next gt 9 6 2 4 Publish Guide to Library Guide Published As soon as you have saved your Guide in the Library a dialog window will appear with a confirmation that your Guide is published This dialog will also include a hyperlink to the Library folder containing the Guide you just published which you can click on to view the final result Guide Published i x My Guide has been published fou can access the Guide from this location in the DecisionSite Library Copy Link D ocumentation gt My Guide d 4 Send an email to notify users about the Guide Send Email Help Example of a confirmation from DecisionSite Library about a published item Option Description Link Click on the link t
217. data If the first line contains only type information Spotfire DecisionSite will use that line for type information The column names are automatically generated as Column1 Column2 etc Note The type determined by the type declaration line has the highest priority when determining the type of each individual data line If a value cannot be converted into the relevant type it will be set to empty For example a string appearing in a column defined as integer cannot be converted and will therefore be set to empty 31 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 32 Data Spotfire DecisionSite Interpretation STRING INT type info Peter 26 data Susan 19 data John 35 data Spotfire DecisionSite tries to find type information in lines one and two If it cannot line one is used as name information and the program makes a qualified guess of the types contained by analyzing the type of the following first non empty 100 values in each column If more than 80 of the values can be interpreted as one and the same type other than String the column will be set to that type Any values not corresponding to that type will be set to null If there are the same numbers of records for two different types among the 100 analyzed values then the type guessing will be done according to this priority list 1 Integer 2 Decimal 3 Date 4 Time 5 TimeStamp If more than 80 of the values cannot be interpreted as a type other than
218. data for any number of molecules SDFiles can be imported into ISIS for Excel Selected Records The records explicitly chosen for display by manipulating the query devices and zoom bars Do not confuse with the Marked Records The option Work on Selected records in the calculation dialogs means that only the records selected via the query devices are included in the calculations Selecting Data Using the query devices to control which data is visualized glossary SFS The file extension that Spotfire DecisionSite applies when saving data set in its proprietary format Short Wide A data table format with relatively few rows and many columns suitable for analysis The identifier column in a short amp wide data table has a unique value for each row in other words all data associated with a specific ID is available on one row in the table Similarity Measure Methods for calculating the similarity between data SQL Structured Query Language a common language used for formulating queries when investigating databases Tall Skinny A data table format with many rows and relatively few columns commonly used for automatically generated data but often not suitable for analysis The identifier column in a tall amp skinny data table contains multiple values which means that the same ID and information associated with it appear on many rows Toolbar The bar at the top of the application or tool window that contains b
219. dd Promet Daa se SI Bemove Move Up Moye Down 1 Computation Services menus The File Execute and Help menus contain menu commands used to work with Computation Services 2 Toolbar Owe Wola n YY Includes shortcuts for some of the most common commands in Computation Services See Computation Services toolbar for a description of the different buttons 3 Script This pane displays the contents of your current script This is where you create a new script or modify an existing script Depending on what type of computation server you have selected the scripting language should be R SAS S PLUS or some other type of script This help file does not contain any information regarding how to write your scripts 4 Input Parameters The Input Parameters tab contains the selected input parameters and handles any type of prompt settings for these parameters The prompt settings determine what the end user of the configuration will see upon execution All defined prompts will be shown in a single prompt dialog The title of the prompt dialog is defined on the Input Parameters tab along with a field with room for a more thorough description of what the configuration does 5 Output Parameters The Output Parameters tab contains the selected output parameters 264 Tools 6 Result Handling The Result Handling tab is where you specify what kind of result you want to receive when running the configuration 7 Exec
220. dialog which handles the connection to the computation server Closes all sessions currently open on the computation server This option may be necessary to use if you have selected the option to Keep session open until manually closed in the Connector Settings dialog and you encounter any problems due to data left on the server from earlier computations Closes Computation Services Description Runs the current configuration Defines the level of details to be shown in the Execution Log tab when a configuration is run The log level is saved in the registry per user and 265 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 2 3 3 8 2 3 4 connector gt Inform Use this log level if you just want to view warnings and errors gt Debug Use this log level if you want to display all log information available Help menu Option Description Computation Launches the online help system Services Help Computation Services Toolbar The Computation Services toolbar includes shortcuts for some of the most common commands in the menus Click on the buttons on the toolbar to activate the corresponding functions Oo E RE etek 2 of Empties Computation Services so that you can start a new configuration Any information you have currently open in the Script pane or in any of the tabs will be cleared Opens a configuration earlier saved using Computation Services This configuration contains the actual script along with
221. e Browse Position HTML Details on Demand Template Pie X Edit MV Limit maximum number of records shown 29 I m Statistical measures Average 2 0 standard deviations for X axis using selected r Add z Vertical Error Bars Curve pfx x Edit Remove Option Axes Background image HTML Details on Demand Statistical measures Description The Axes section allows you to control axis labels data range and grid lines for bar charts pie charts line charts and heat maps This section does not appear for scatter plots since these have a separate Tab for more advanced settings see Axes for Scatter Plots Background image lets you select a file to use as background You can also specify how the background image is positioned Details on Demand lets you choose templates for formatting the HTML display of record details Statistical measures offers control over the standard deviation marking lines error bars and different types of curves and curve fits Available for 2D scatter plots and pie charts only In bar charts you can select to add a vertical reference line from the Visualizations Add menu under Statistical measures 4 8 2 2 Axes Edit gt Properties gt Data and Background tab The Axes section of the Data and Background dialog appears in all plots except for Scatter Plots Scatter Plots can handle more advanced axis labels and
222. e Logging into Spotfire DecisionSite will give you access to the Guides and Tools that are specific for your profile Pressing Cancel will start Spotfire DecisionSite but will not provide access to these Guides and Tools See also Working Offline below Depending on the configuration of your DecisionSite Analytics Server some of the following options may be available in the login dialog Remember me If you select this check box when you log in you will not be prompted to log in when you start Spotfire DecisionSite the next time Your User ID and Password will be saved on your computer and will be used automatically each time you start Spotfire DecisionSite Introduction Register a new user If you are not a registered user of Spotfire DecisionSite click on the Register a new user link This will display a new window in which you can register You will then be able to access the specific features of Spotfire DecisionSite that you have a license for Working Offline If you have no network connection to the DecisionSite Analytics Server you can still use most features of Spotfire DecisionSite Start DecisionSite as usual and log in when prompted Even though you are working offline without any connection to the Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server or the internet you will still be able to use most of the Guides and Tools if these were cached locally on your computer the last time you were connected to the server The exceptions are those Gu
223. e Client are carried over to the Poster to align the image properly Background Images are particularly useful when running Spotfire Map Interaction Services This product gives users an easy way of linking data that includes both longitudinal and 337 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 10 5 10 5 1 latitudinal information to geographic images and data It also provides a means to dynamically interact with geographic data within Spotfire DecisionSite Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Exporting Visualizations to PowerPoint The Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation tool exports the selected visualizations to PowerPoint Each visualization is added as a new slide along with the annotation legend and title Tip Also note other Export options can be found under the File menu gt To export visualizations to PowerPoint 1 2 3 Create visualizations in Spotfire DecisionSite If necessary edit the titles and annotations of the visualizations Select File gt Export gt Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Response The Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation dialog is displayed Click to select the visualizations you want to export Comment To select all visualizations click Select All For multiple selection press Ctrl and click on the desired visualizations or click one visualization and drag to select the subsequent ones Select if you want to Create a new presentation or Add to an open pre
224. e Y axis e Count the height of a bar represents the number of records with a particular value e Sum the height of the bar indicates the total sum of the values of all records in that bar e Average the height of the bar indicates the average value of all records in that bar Multiple Columns You can display multiple columns as side by side bars This is useful if you want to compare many parameters at the same time and the categorical data exist in different columns When the categorical data is included in a single column you should instead use one of the side by side options in the Layout section of the Bars tab see Categorical Coloring Layout below 61 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Count Z Sum i Average Avg 500000 v Multiple Columns Select Columns 400000 Customer age 300000 Total Age group 200000 Number of purchases W Groceries 100000 Garden W Furniture E 10 30 50 70 90 Electronics E E Don a a a Age group Toys Receipt average la Bar Chart gt To Display Multiple Columns 1 Click on the Axis Selector for the Y axis 2 Select Multiple Columns Response The Multiple Columns option will be selected with a check mark the next time you open the list 3 Click on the Axis Selector for the Y axis Select an additional column to display Selected columns will be indicated by a colored square Note You can also click on the Select Columns
225. e format to the default setting Tip If you want to change the time formatting for a single column you can also reach the Time Format dialog from the pop up menu of the Query Devices panel Right click on the column of interest and select Set Property gt Format gt Time from the pop up menu Trellis Tab What is a Trellis plot Trellis plots enable you to quickly recognize similarities or differences between different subsets Trellis plots provide the means to create a systematic layout for scatter plots bar charts profile charts and heat maps Each individual pane in a Trellis plot displays a subset of the original data set where the subset is defined by certain conditions By this we mean that all the records in a particular subset have the same value for one or more attributes A condition specifies one attribute Visualizations A Trellis plot is a way of breaking up a visualization scatter plot profile chart or heat map into several panels each one displaying a particular sub set of the data The example above displays a Trellis plot with two conditions Sex and Dead Alive gt To create a Trellis plot l 2 3 4 5 6 Create a new scatter plot profile chart or heat map Open the Properties dialog Go to the Trellis tab In the Conditions box click Add In the Trellis condition dialog select the variable column name by which you want to separate the plots Click OK 4 8 4 2 Trellis Tab Edit
226. e last gt Individual Sets the Min Mid and Max values for the range automatically to the lowest auto range median and highest values respectively that exist in each individual column All selected columns will be colored according to their own individual Min and Max values gt Shared Lets you specify an exact Min Mid and Max value for the color range instead custom of having these values being automatically determined All selected columns range will be colored according to these values regardless of their own individual Min and Max values Import Imports a color arrangement from a file Export Exports a color arrangement to a file This enables you to save a color arrangement and reuse it Basic Returns you to the basic Categorical or Continuous or Heat Map Coloring dialog gt To change a color of the Values or Ranges 1 Click on the square of color that you want to modify 2 Select a color from the palette or click More colors to see the complete color palette gt To change the Marked Empty or Deselected color 1 Click the button of the color that you want to modify 2 Select a color from the palette or click More colors to see the complete color palette 157 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 17 4 Color Expression Dialog x Variables Function category firstQuartile fal markedFirstQuartile markedM ax Function markedMedian markedMin markedT hirdQ
227. e maximum number of iterations might be reached before the best possible curve has been calculated In that case a message will inform you of this in the Legend select View gt Legend to display it In some cases for example if the data is widely scattered or too few data points are available the iterative process might also result in a curve that converges on a false minimum When a model is applied during data analysis it is important not only to look at the R2 value and how well the curve fits the current markers in the scatter plot It is also good to consider 91 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual what the curve would look like for more extreme values and determine if the model is reasonable in a scientifical or statistical context The number of unique x values must be larger than or equal to the number of degrees of freedom in order to obtain a unique curve If the curve can be solved in an infinite number of ways it is not sure that the presented curve will be relevant to your data References Heath M T 2002 Scientific Computing An Introductory Survey 2nd ed McGraw Hill New York Anderson E Bai Z Bischof C Blackford S Demmel J Dongarra J Du Croz J Greenbaum A Hammarling S McKenney A Sorensen D 1999 LAPACK Users Guide 3rd ed Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics Philadelphia PA ISBN 0 89871 447 8 4 8 2 6 Reference Lines in Bar Chart 4 8 2 6 1
228. e new column You cannot edit this field Click the lt Back button if you want to modify the expression Preview This table provides a preview of how the first rows in the data set will be evaluated using the current expression It displays the columns that are used in the expression and the resulting column You can resize the window to show more rows Move the mouse pointer over the column headings to display a ToolTip stating the Type of the columns Working with the Data If the resulting column shows an error message there is a problem with the expression for that row Moving the mouse pointer over the field or clicking on it will display an explanation of what is wrong There are three kinds of error messages EXPR there is a problem with the syntax of the expression NUM the row evaluates to infinity or other illegal number ARG there is a problem with one or many arguments 7 4 4 Spotfire Expression Language SXL 7 4 4 1 General Syntax Spotfire DecisionSite uses an Expression Language which is described in this chapter Some notes on the general syntax are Variables functions and keywords are case insensitive SUM C1 Sum C1 sum C1 Column references are case sensitive The default null handling behavior is that operations on null return null 7 4 4 2 Data Types The data types with built in language support are e Integer e Real e Boolean e String Integer Integer values are wri
229. e polygon set being defined After that a number of polygons are defined A polygon is defined by a fill color an origin point a border color the number of points and the X Y and Z coordinates of the points The Z coordinates are ignored but they must be included The format of the file as follows with variables in italics COORDSYS xmin xmax ymin ymax zmin zmax ADD POLY filicolor xorigin yorigin zorigin lyes numberofpoints xl yl zl x2 y2 z2 A sample file could look as follows Saving and Exporting Data COORDSYS 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 ADD POLY LimeGreen 0 0 0 0 0 02 0 0 lyes 5 0 677419 0 976261 0 0 0 680645 0 977745 0 0 0 680645 0 983680 0 0 0 677419 0 985163 0 0 0 677419 0 988131 0 0 The env sfm file in the Spotfire DecisionSite distribution serves as an example of this background map format To map a data file to a Spotfire mapping file In your visualization select the two axes from the data that serve as coordinates In the Data and Background tab in the Properties dialog select an SFM file which has a coordinate system matching the coordinates in the axes file 10 3 Publish Analysis to Library 10 3 1 Publishing Analyses to the Library Using the Library you and your colleagues can collaborate on the same Analysis keeping everyone up to date When publishing your Analysis everything you save in a DecisionSite file SFS is stored in the Library Note The Open from Library functionality i
230. e shows records with null or empty values When a column contains empty values a black colored letter e is displayed in the upper right corner of the query device You can choose to hide records with empty values by clearing the check box Show Empty values from the Columns tab of the Properties dialog or by deselecting the menu item Show Empty Values from the query device pop up menu The e will then turn red 5 13 Changing Column Name You can easily change the name of a column and its corresponding query device by double clicking on the query device gt To change the column name 1 Double click on the name of the query device you wish to rename 2 Type anew column name in the text field that appears and press Enter 5 14 Quick Access to Color and Size Properties A quick way of setting the color or size property in the current visualization is to right click on the query device representing the column and selecting the appropriate property from the Set property sub menu that appears 193 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 5 15 Initial Query Device Selection Spotfire DecisionSite s default choice of query devices is based on the column content and the number of unique values present in the data set for that attribute If a column contains 10 unique values or less check boxes will be assigned as query device For columns containing more than 10 values an item slider is chosen for alphanumeric string att
231. e the middle mouse direction of view button button Roll Shift Ctrl drag Shift Ctrl Rotation is in the using the right drag using the plane of the screen mouse button middle mouse down wards and button right cursor motion rotate clockwise Zoom in on a Click on a marker Ctrl drag using Keeps the selected specific marker and use the mouse the middle mouse marker in the same wheel button place on screen Note Clicking the Reset Navigation button on the 3D tab of the Properties dialog will undo all navigation adjustments Zoom bars Dragging the end arrows of the zoom bars along the edges of the visualization window zooms in on a portion of the visualization Dragging the bar itself by placing the mouse pointer on the yellow bar and dragging pans across different areas of the entire visualization e e E Altering the length of the X axis zoom bar The pale yellow area represents the selected range of values whereas the bright yellow area represents the range of existing values within the selected range The zoom bar can be adjusted to encompass only the currently selected data gt Setting the zoom bar span to the current selection 1 Double click on the bright yellow area 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 et Scatter Plot Response The scatter plot and the zoom bar are now adjusted to focus on the selected markers 0 36 0 34 032 03 b 4 ter Plot Tip You can also right click on the Zoom bar and select Zoom
232. e where each column has a Y axis of its own One for all In this mode there is a single Y axis scale for all columns The range of 146 Visualizations this axis is automatically adjusted to fit all the columns currently being visualized Note Since the values of the plotted columns may be of different magnitude some lines might not be visible due to their low amplitude in relation to the scale of the Y axis Select Individual scale mode or use the zoom bar on the Y axis to zoom in on curves with low amplitude Individual In this mode each column has a Y axis scale of its own This is useful when you want to visualize data of different types and magnitude in one plot or when the shapes of the curves are more interesting than the absolute values In Individual mode you can control the vertical position and scale of each plotted column using the sliders on the Lines tab Labels For line charts labels show the values of the column being plotted Functionality is otherwise the same as for scatter plots Markers The markers check box determines if markers should be drawn or not The size of markers is controlled with the Size slider The shape and color of the markers are controlled on column basis on the Lines tab Jitter Jittering has the same functionality as for scatter plots That is the X and Y coordinates are slightly moved to make it possible to tell data points with the same coordinate apart The slider sets the amount of rando
233. east one axis has to be in use 4 8 11 2 Pie Charts Color Edit gt Properties gt Pies tab A pie chart can consist of one or more bands each reflecting the distribution of values in a certain column Set Number of color bands to the desired number then select one band at a time using Color band Color settings are set for each band individually The image shows a pie chart with multiple color bands 1 29 For whole pies or bands three coloring modes are available e Fixed One color is assigned to the entire pie or band e Pies The normal way of coloring the band to be colored is divided into sections whose size is determined according to the distribution of the selected column e Average Assigns one color to each band or pie The color is given according to the average value of the records in the chosen column for that pie band Use the Customize button to choose color Customize Colors x Settings for P2 Special colors MY Deselected Empty E Marked 141 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual gt To change a color l 2 Select the category that you want to modify Select a color from the palette gt To revert to default coloring click Default Colors gt To select a color from the complete palette click Other Note Empty refers to records that have at least one empty field These records are not shown at all in visualizations where an axis corresponds to
234. ect File gt Export gt Microsoft Word Presentation Response The Microsoft Word Presentation dialog is displayed Click to select the visualizations you want to export Comment To select all visualizations click Select All For multiple selection press Ctrl and click on the desired visualizations or click one visualization and drag to select the following If desired select a different type of Picture format Comment The visualization can be exported in a EMF JPG or PNG format If desired change the Font size of the exported labels Click OK Response Word is started and a new document including the selected visualizations is displayed Note Microsoft Word must be installed on the machine for this tool to be used Microsoft Word Presentation Dialog xi m Select visualizations Scatter Plot Bar Chart My Data Table Select All Picture format Portable Networks Graphics png Font size Normal X OK Cancel Saving and Exporting Data Option Description Select The list box shows the titles of all visualizations available for Word visualizations export Click a visualization name to include the visualization in the Word report For multiple selection press Ctrl and click the desired visualizations Select All Click this button to select all available visualizations Picture format Select a visualization output format from the drop down list Choose from PNG
235. ected by using the query devices from the heat map clear the Show deselected check box Note If you have had a dendrogram associated to the heat map this will no longer be valid after hiding the deselected values In this case the dendrogram tree will be removed You can show the dendrogram again by selecting the Show deselected check box Show hide row labels To show row labels next to the heat map select a column where appropriate labels are located from the Row labels By drop down list Choose the location of the labels by clicking the Left or Right radio button Tip If you want to include information from more than one column in the row labels use the New Column from Expression tool to concatenate the columns prior to applying row labels on your heat map To remove the row labels select None in the drop down list Create Edit Heat Map Coloring Edit gt Properties gt Heat Map Tab gt New Edit Color Range Visualizations Continuous Coloring Name Default Color mode x Preview Column P1 v Continuous Categorical Ranges m sharedMin zlo Add BBB sharedMiddle may 525 Delete E sharedM ax 1050 Marked l Empty l Other l Deselected Templates Import Export Help Advanced Close Type a Name of the new color scheme in the text field at the top Then select Categorical Coloring or Continuous Coloring Categorical Coloring Ca
236. ed in a data set do not allow you to perform all necessary operations or to create the visualizations needed to fully explore the data set Still in many cases the necessary information can be computed from existing columns Spotfire DecisionSite provides the option to calculate new columns by applying mathematical and logical operators to existing values The following section explains the basic workflow of using the New Column from Expression tool More detailed explanations on how to use the user interface and specifications of the various functions follows later in the chapter gt How to use the New Column from Expression tool 1 Start DecisionSite and load a data set 2 Select Data gt New Column gt From Expression The first step of the wizard is displayed You can also reach the tool by right clicking a query device 3 Ifyou have previously created a suitable expression you may select it from the Recent Expressions list and click the Insert button 4 Ifyou need to create a new expression proceed to specify the expression by either typing it directly into the Expression text area or by selecting columns and functions from the lists By selecting columns and functions and clicking the Insert Columns or Insert Function buttons you can gradually build the expression you want You can always modify the expression by editing the text in the Expression field using cut amp paste or typing text An example of an expression co
237. ed line Trellis plot options Specifies whether the curve fit displayed in each trellis panel will be calculated based on only the records specific to that trellis panel or if the fit will be based on all records regardless of trellis condition and therefore be the same for every trellis panel View Result Opens the Curve Fit Result dialog where detailed results from the fit is shown and can be copied into other applications Apply Applies the curve fit to the visualization Allows you to test one or many curve fits in your visualization without having to close the Curve Fit dialog Curve Fit Result Dialog The Curve Fit Result dialog displays detailed information about all curve fits that were enabled when you clicked on the button Click on a specific curve fit in the Visualizations tree to view its details Tip Select all text in the gray part of the dialog and copy the information if you want to include the results in a report 87 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 2 5 6 3 88 User Interface Curve Fit Result x E Visualizations 4 Scatter Plot Curve Fit Straight Line using selected records only Straight Line 2nd order y 11 35 46 76 Polynomial Scatter Plot Logistic Regression The left pane shows a tree view of the different visualizations that have one or more curve fits applied Click on the desired curve fit to view the details in the right pa
238. ed with quide 3 Create Profile Chart of original data Page Break Click the link to create some other useful visualizations Create visualizations To Filter the data click the link below Set Query Device Filters To open a browser and search the internet Google http www google com How to add links 1 Analysis Builder menus The Guide Edit Add Format and Help menus contain menu commands required to work with the Analysis Builder 2 Toolbar Oe Halas Includes shortcuts for some of the most common commands in the Analysis Builder See Analysis Builder toolbar for a description of the different buttons aan i i 3 _ 3 Guide contents This window contains the contents of your current Guide This is where you create a new Guide or modify an existing Guide Text is added by double clicking were it says Double click to edit text or by selecting Add gt Text from the menu Links to actions are added from the Actions in DecisionSite list see below You can move text items comments links and page breaks in the Guide contents list to the desired position using a simple drag and drop operation 4 Actions in DecisionSite This list contains all actions that you have performed in DecisionSite during the latest session A session is defined as the time from when you have opened your current data set until you close it The Analysis Builder does not have to be started to log
239. eeeeccccaeeeeeeeeecenaeaeeeeeeesescaaeaeeeeeeesesecaeaaeeeeseeeeeeesneaees 355 11 3 Visualization Pop up MeNnu cccccceceeeeeeeecee cece cece secaeaeceeeeesecceaeaeeeeeeeeseseccaaeeeeeeesesecniaeeseeess 357 aae T Kee lor T BUMOMS s itere sistent tesco cars sas acks eg Seaties saa ceti ra coh abaceoneespeccuuas AE TE AE ATTE 365 ATS MOUSE SNOMCUIS 223 teste ts abet eccteacets ited o a ean G 366 12 GLOSSAR Y airone aaaea te aeaa eaa aai a aaa a e aaa aa dee eanadatavaencetaied 370 13 MINED T T dtd tte at tact ea taehatatagid at 376 Preface 1 Preface 1 1 What is Spotfire DecisionSite TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite is a solution for accessing analyzing and reporting on data It enables you to rapidly identify trends anomalies outliers and patterns in your data Spotfire DecisionSite can access data residing in databases in a local or networked file system or on the desktop It is database independent and extracts data several hundred thousand records or more depending on computer performance from commercial data sources such as Oracle SQL Server Informix and Sybase Spotfire DecisionSite uses the patented Spotfire DecisionSite visualization technology allowing you to interactively query data and instantly visualize results as scatter plots bar charts profile charts and a number of other modes Spotfire DecisionSite stores data internally in a proprietary data format allowing for rapid response times to user i
240. eft drag Adds bars or pies to the set of marked objects using a lasso function to the set of marked records Mouse wheel Zooms in and out in the visualization Ctrl right click Zooms in from the visualization only works for pie charts when an axis different than None has been selected Ctrl Shift right click Zooms out from the visualization only works for pie charts when an axis different than None has been selected Right click in visualization Brings up the visualization context pop up menu Mouse Shortcuts Profile Charts Mouse over profile A thin contour highlights the profile record as well as all markers associated with the record in other visualizations Left click on profile Activates A persistent contour surrounds the profile Information about the profile appears in the Details on Demand window Left drag Marks the profiles that are fully or partially inside the rubber band box delineated by the pointer s diagonal movement These profiles will become thicker A table of details will be displayed in the Details on Demand window If no profiles are surrounded all previously marked objects will be unmarked Shift left drag Enables marking of profiles with the lasso tool Draw an arbitrary shape around the profile you want to mark If none are surrounded all profiles will be unmarked Ctrl left drag Adds profiles to the set of marked profiles using the rectangle rubber band box tool
241. egory All X Function Pi P2 Element Atomic Number Atomic Radius lonic Radius lonization Energy Electronegativity C1 C2 Selected columns Types Atomic Mass integer Insert Columns Expression Atomic Mass Ionic Radius Recent expressions v Insert Sample result fi 8015873015873 Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Columns Select a column by clicking on it and click the Insert Columns button to insert it to the Expression field You can also double click on a column to insert it You can select several columns by pressing Ctrl or Shift Working with the Data If you place the cursor at a specific location in the Expression field the column will be inserted there If you have many columns you can use the scrollbar to find them or click on any column and type in the first letter of the desired column name to jump to it You can see the Type of the selected column in the field below the list Category Select a category of functions to limit the choices in the Function list e All e Operators e Math Functions e Statistical Functions e Text Functions e Logical Functions e Date amp Time Functions e Conversion Functions Function Select a function by clicking on it and click the Insert Function button to insert it to the Expression field You can also double click on a function to insert it If you place the cursor at a specific l
242. el Model Specifies the type of curve to display in your visualization Choose from Straight Line y a bx Logarithmic y a blnx Exponential y ae Power y ax Logistic Regression y min max min 1 X50 ix ti 2nd order Polynomial y at bx cx 3rd order Polynomial y atbx cex dx 4th order Polynomial y atbx cex dx ex 5th order Polynomial y atbx cex dx ex fx See Curve Fit Models for more information 86 4 8 2 5 6 2 Visualizations Properties Available for Logistic regression only Lets you specify values for max and min If no values are specified they will be automatically calculated Note If you specify max and min values within the range of your data you must filter out all data points outside of your specified range using the query devices or zooming in order to obtain a curve For example no curve will be calculated if the min value equals the lowest value of y in your data set unless you filter out this value and base the calculation on selected values only Base calculation on Specifies whether the statistical measure should be calculated based on all records in the data set regardless of any filtering done with the query devices or whether the calculation should be based on the selected records so that filtering with the query devices will affect the result Color The color of the displayed line Width The width in pixels of the display
243. element and can make selected parts of my text bold It is also possible to add hyperlinks to external web pages to the text To open a browser and visit the Spotfire home page click on the following link Spotfire com B Applies bold formatting to the selected text Also available using the short command Ctrl B E Opens the Hyperlink Properties dialog where you can create a hyperlink to an external web page from the selected text Also available using the short command Ctrl K gt To reach the Text Properties dialog The Text Properties dialog is displayed when a new text element is added to the Guide in Analysis Builder e g via Add gt Text It can also be displayed by double clicking on a previously entered text element 9 5 3 4 Hyperlink Properties Dialog The Hyperlink Properties dialog is used to insert hyperlinks to external web pages in the Guide To add links that perform actions in DecisionSite opens data creates visualizations etc see How the Actions in DecisionSite list works Hyperlink Properties x Text to display fs potfire com URL to external web page http www spotfire con Help OK Cancel Option Description Text to display The text that will be displayed as a hyperlink green and underlined 297 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 5 3 5 298 URL to external web page The address to the external web page where you want to go when cli
244. em in the Scatter plots or Histograms list or use the arrow keys to quickly browse either list When you have found an interesting visualization that you want to investigate further click Create View to generate the corresponding visualization in Spotfire DecisionSite Click Close Note Selecting a Histogram will create a Version 7 x Histogram View Tip Algorithms Ordering of scatter plots View Tip calculates the correlation between different combinations of columns and orders the suggested visualizations according to the degree of linear correlation The most common measure of correlation is the Pearson Product Moment Correlation called Pearson s correlation for short When computed in a sample it is designated by the letter r and is sometimes called Pearson s r Pearson s correlation reflects the degree of linear relationship between two variables Pearson s ranges from 1 to 1 Positive correlation A correlation of 1 means that there is a perfect positive linear relationship between variables This scatter plot depicts such a relationship It is a positive relationship because high scores on the X axis are associated with high scores on the Y axis Negative correlation A correlation of 1 means that there is a perfect negative linear relationship between variables This scatter plot depicts such a relationship It is a negative relationship because high scores on the X axis are associated with low scores on the Y a
245. en in Other DecisionSite Instance dialog Open Resulting Data Set in DecisionSite dialog 282 Opening data in DecisionSite Operator overview precedence Order Favorites of tabs in workbook mode query devices table columns table rows Original scale Orthogonal straight line fit applying description Overview Add Columns Analysis Builder Pivot Data Tools overview Transpose Data User interface Web Links P Panning Password logging in Pasting data from clipboard Personal settings Perspective Pictures adding as background background formats Spotfire DecisionSite mapping files Pie charts color creating description jitter labels size Pivot Data dialog example launching overview what is pivoting Plain Text Pop up menu 10 15 16 18 43 225 227 28 172 190 162 161 97 78 81 203 288 239 7 248 6 253 164 241 239 240 239 239 26 195 for query devices in Analysis Builder in visualizations Position background image Poster background images Details on Demand query devices supported features PowerPoint Presentation dialog exporting visualizations Precision Printing from DecisionSite Profile chart color columns creating jitter labels lines scale mode what is it Profile Columns Tab Profile Tab Prompt for dialog Prompt Settings dialogs in Computation Services Boolean Column Name Data Set File Integer List Real String Prompting i
246. enter Unit labels in the Left or the Right text field Comment This could be a currency symbol or any other unit The maximum length is 12 characters 9 Click OK Selecting Format gt None from the Format drop down menu resets the options to the default settings 4 8 3 5 Date and Time Format You can specify how you want DecisionSite to display date and time formatting for time stamp columns You can set the date and time to be shown either according to regional settings with or without milliseconds or according to a number of other date and time formats By changing the date format for a date or time stamp column you can obtain a whole new set of factors to filter your data by See Rearranging the Data by Formatting for more information gt To set Date and Time Formatting for a column 1 Open the Properties dialog by selecting Edit gt Properties and click on the Columns tab Select one or more columns you wish to set time formatting for 3 Click on the Format button 99 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 3 6 100 4 Select Date and Time which opens the Date and Time Format dialog Date and Time Format Type According to regional settings According to regional settings long format According to regional settings with milliseconds if available ISO formatted ISO formatted with seconds MAr h 5 ISO formatted with milliseconds ny MM DD H MM SS fff ISO formatted wit
247. ents Returns true if Arg is greater than or equal to Arg2 The arguments are of type real and the result is of type boolean See operator lt for the definition of valid arguments Returns true if Arg is equal to Arg2 The arguments can be of any type but must both be of the same type The result is of type boolean If any argument is null the result is null See function IsNull for comparing nulls For arguments of type real see operator lt for the definition of valid arguments Example Hello hello gt false null gt NULL null null gt NULL Returns true if Arg is not equal to Arg2 The arguments can be of any type but must both be of the same type The result is of type boolean If any argument is null the result is null See function IsNull for comparing nulls For arguments of type real see operator lt for the definition of valid arguments 7 4 4 3 4 7 4 4 3 5 7 4 4 4 7 4 4 4 1 Working with the Data Evaluates both expressions and returns Expr2 The expressions can be any valid expression including expressions that evaluate to null Exprl Expr2 Trinary Operators A trinary operator takes three arguments Description Returns Arg2 if Arg1 true and Arg3 if Arg false Argl is of type boolean usually the result of a comparison Arg2 and Arg3 can be of any type but must both be of the same type or null If Arg is null the result is also null See also function If Opera
248. er Each time you mark a number of records the details will be presented in a horizontal table in your web browser 6 8 Information About the Data Set The record meter in the status bar at the bottom of the Spotfire DecisionSite gives continuous information about visualization statistics You can see at a glance what portion of all the data is currently visible marked etc The same information is displayed as text 275 out of 379 records visible 72 56 117 marked 7 Selected Deselected Colors should be read as follows Green Records that are selected and marked Yellow Records that are selected and unmarked Gray Records that are selected but lack a value required for representation on the current axes and hence are invisible The sum of the above makes up the set of selected records The length of the record meter in relation to the box in which it sits is an indication of the relative size of the current selection To display or hide the status bar use the Status Bar command in the View menu 6 9 Legend The markers of various plots can be colored to indicate a certain parameter By showing the Legend window you can easily see what the color of a marker means For Scatter Plots the 201 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 202 Legend also explains the significance of other visualization settings that is which columns are used for size rotation etc For other plots
249. er all properties of the Analysis By using detailed properties the organization and search capabilities in the Library are greatly enhanced Publish Analysis to Library Step 2 2 xj Analysis title The periodic table Description pere A reference of the periodic table Keywords periodic chemistry For multiple keywords use semicolon as separator Data content Linked Load data from the data source Embedded Save the current dataset in the Analysis lt Back Finish Cancel Option Description Analysis title The name of the Analysis as it will be displayed in the Library This is the title you provided in the previous step Description A description of the functions of the Analysis The description could contain detailed information about the Analysis enabling quick overviews Keywords Keywords specific to the content of the Analysis Keywords are separated by a semicolon i e if you write primary screening quality this will be two keywords primary screening and quality Keywords are used to enhance organization and search capabilities Data content Use the Data content radio buttons to specify how you want to include your Analysis data The options are Linked Load data from the data source Use this option when your data resides in a data source always accessible to all users with read access of your published Analysis 321 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manua
250. er of entire group AVgca AV8group 100 categories as a percentage x AvVgca AVEgroup 100 n Active bar at Year 1999 Contains 3 records The average of Revenue is 1833 333333333 Height 100 0 For City Boston Contains 1 record The average is 3000 Divided by City Value Average Percentage Boston 3000 163 6 Dallas 2000 109 1 1999 2000 2001 2002 Seattle 500 27 3 100 Represents the average of the values The exact percentage of the selected side by in that category divided by the category s average compared to the total side bars average of the group average of the entire AVgcat AVS eroup 100 group AVgcat AVeroup 100 Details on Demand __ x Active bar at Year 1999 Contains 1 record The average for City Boston is 3000 Height 163 6 All bars in group Contains 3 records The average of Revenue is 1833 333333333 1999 2000 2001 2002 Example When you are using Average to represent the height of the bars the 100 side by side bars option will display the percentage of the category average compared to the group average That means that if the average for the specific category is higher than the average for the whole group the bars will reach a height of more than 100 see below 137 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 5 Query Devices MRE S 200 ype here to search o 5 150 7 v 1999 g 100 4 2000 gt 50 Iv 2001 0 Jv 2002 50 City 100 l
251. er plots line charts profile charts bar charts and pie charts Formats of background images and maps Supported background image formats Windows bitmap images bmp JPEG images jpg jpeg PNG bitmap images png TGA files tga PCX files pex Supported background map formats MapInfo Interchange Format files mif These are typically tagged with for example with zip codes which Spotfire DecisionSite can use to position visualization markers Spotfire mapping files sfm Adding a Background Image Edit gt Properties gt Data and Background tab gt To add a background image to the current visualization l 2 In the Properties dialog open the Data and Background tab Enter the path and name of the image file to use in the file box Tip The Browse button can be used to search the file system for appropriate files You can also enter an URL to an image available on a server Click Position in the Background Image section to adjust the positioning of the image relative to the markers 75 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 2 3 3 4 8 2 3 4 76 Tip If desired adjust the Data Range in the Axes section to increase the visible area of your visualization This might be necessary if you want the picture area to be larger than the area covered by markers Position a Background Image Edit gt Properties gt Data and Background tab gt Position On the Da
252. erations are well defined for Infinity and will work as expected e g 2 5 lt 1 0 returns true When generated these errors are grouped together as numeric errors displayed as NUM If the argument for a function or operator is invalid an error is also produced For example functions expecting an index might produce an error because the index is negative and conversion functions produce an error if the argument cannot be converted When generated these errors are grouped together as argument errors displayed as ARG The IsError Arg function can be used to determine if a sub expression results in an error The SE Arg Arg2 function can be used to substitute errors with a certain value e g null or 0 When generating a result data set from the expression errors are converted to null Wrap the expression with a call to the SN Arg Arg2 function to override this behavior Error Details Example Description NUM NaN 0 0 atan 2 sqrt 1 Not a Number means that the result is undefined All subsequent math operations on NaN produce NaN NUM Infinity 1 0 1e200 1e200 Infinity means that the number is too big to store in the real data type Many math operations treat this as a huge number NUM Infinity 1 0 1e200 1e200 Negative infinity means that the number is too big to store in the real data type Many math operations treat this as a huge negative number ARG Invalid Argument Left Hello 1
253. es in the scatter plot or if it uses more than one color range or if the scatter plot uses one color range with starting ending points that are not min and max respectively then the coloring is not supported This will give a warning when trying to publish the scatter plot The scatter plot can still be published as a Poster but the colors will most likely be wrong Squares Circles and Triangles are supported All other markers will be transformed to filled squares Must be a BMP PNG or JPG image Categorical Coloring on a transformed column is not supported In such a case the coloring will be changed to Fixed color No text labels above the bars however bar chart tool tips displays the information found in DecisionSite Client bar labels Binning Sort bars Profile Chart Properties Numeric Columns Date DateTime Time Columns Same Scale for All String Columns Background Image Profile Chart Profiles Fixed Color Continuous Color Categorical Color Individual Scale Same Scale Labels Line Width Line Width By Break on Empty Pie Chart Properties X Axis Column Y Axis Column Background Image Pie Chart Pies Fixed Color Categorical Color Show deselected Average Color Number of Color Bands Size Saving and Exporting Data The number of bins in DecisionSite Client will be the same in DecisionSite Posters Supported although not together with Date DateTime Time Supported althoug
254. es are relative to the scale used in the current visualization Look at the scale used in the current visualization and determine how large you wish your markers to be Note The horizontal and vertical scale may be different which means that a perfect square might not have the same Width and Height values Note Use Reverse sorting if you want the markers to be drawn in the opposite order Right click in the Query Device you wish to sort by select Set Property and Reverse sorting Rotation Rotate By Age group Ss g The rotation of markers can be made to reflect the value of a column Using asymmetrical markers and rotating them according to a chosen variable takes advantage of the human ability to visually detect regions with different surface structure The maximum rotation is 90 and so the most useful shapes for this effect are the arrow the minus and the bar In 3D plots the marker rotation is implemented around the Z axis 4 8 7 5 Jitter Edit gt Properties gt Markers tab Jitter None Max E Jittering displaces markers slightly and randomly thereby making aggregations stand out visually below right Attention is brought to areas where many records overlap Such regions can then be investigated further by zooming changing axes etc Use the slider to increase or decrease jittering Scatter plots line charts profile charts and pie charts support jittering 117 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9
255. es the order the columns are displayed in the details on demand Move Last Select a column from the right list and press the Move Last button to move it to the bottom This changes the order the columns are displayed in the details on demand 4 8 9 Bars Tab 4 8 9 1 Bars Tab Edit gt Properties gt Bars tab Properties Bar Chart x Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Trellis Bar Chart Columns Bars Color Layout By Rein YS Stacked bars C Fixed Categorical Side by side bars a C z Customize Ere 100 stacked bars C 100 side by side bars Pas J Drop empty bars C None Customize C Marked x ais Visible max 90 bars Date of Sale IV Bar labels V Segment labels IV Use binned values Horizontal Horizontal Number of bins Vertical Vertical C Manual 10 Width Automatic 11 bins Min Max SS aa M Show outline on bars Create Binned Column Option Description Color If fixed coloring is used one color is assigned to the entire bar or if you are using multiple columns to the part of a bar that originates in a single column When using categorical coloring for bar charts the bars are divided into sections according to the column selected in the drop down menu Categorical coloring is not available for multiple columns display Labels You can select to display labels for the bars in the bar chart to see the exac
256. escription Matching column Use the drop down list to select the column in the current data set from which to get the values Get values from Select whether to use Marked records or Selected records as filter values or range limits gt To reach the Get Values from Data Set dialog l 2 Open an Information Link with run time filters When the Set Filter for Column dialog for the desired column appears click Get Values or Get Range Import SAS Data Importing SAS Data Files In order to open SAS data files in Spotfire DecisionSite you will need the SAS OLEDB driver More information on how to get this can be found at http www spotfire com sr gt To import SAS data files l Ds 3 File gt Import gt Import Data In the Select Data Source dialog select File In the Open dialog select the file containing the SAS data Click Open Response The SAS Data Import Column Selection dialog is opened In the Available SAS columns list click to select the columns that you want to import Comment For multiple selection press Ctrl and click on the desired columns in the Available SAS columns list You can sort the columns in the list alphabetically by clicking on the Column name bar Click on the Add gt gt button to send the selected columns to the Imported columns field Select whether you want to map your data to Spotfire compatible types Comment See SAS Column Formatting for more information on
257. esented you can obtain new views of the data Right click on the date column in the Query Devices panel and select Set Property gt Format gt Date to display the Date Format dialog Here you can select Day of week Monday first day name to show the different weekdays instead The language is determined by your current locale 41 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Date JV Monday IV Tuesday IV Wednesday IV Friday IV Saturday This way you can get a completely different view of the data and spot whether the stock prices tend to be higher or lower on a certain day of the week oxi b Y 2 ie x a i a Monday Tuesday Wednesday Friday Saturday K Date v According to this scatter plot it looks like it would be a good idea to buy new stocks on Tuesdays This example does not contain any real data and the advice should therefore not be taken literally Example 2 Another example of how the data interpretation can be changed via formatting is if you have a time column where hours minutes and seconds are displayed and then change the formatting to a HH MM format Data values Represented in a scatter plot Original data 3 1 11 59 00 gt 2 11 59 30 1 3 12 00 00 11 59 00 11 59 30 12 00 00 Formatted data 3 1 11 59 gt 2 11 59 1 312 00 11 59 12 00 Hence the number of unique values is reduced from three to two The following formats change the perceived data
258. et in the Poster Use this option when your data cannot be accessed by all users The Linked Load data from the Information Link option will be disabled unless an Information Link was used to open the data See Poster Data for more information Click Finish to publish your Poster When your Poster has been published Publish Poster to Library Wizard Poster Published is shown in which you can send emails inviting colleagues to join your analysis gt To reach the Publish Poster to Library Step 2 2 dialog 1 Click File gt Publish Poster to Library 2 Design your DecisionSite Poster in Publish Poster to Library Wizard Step 1 3 and click Next gt 3 Edit the Poster properties in Publish Poster to Library Wizard Step 2 3 and click Next gt 10 4 5 Publish Poster to Library Poster Published As soon as you have published your Poster in the Library a dialog will appear asking if you want to send an email notification to your colleagues This dialog will also have a hyperlink to the item you just published which you can click on to view the final result Poster Published x Movie Analysis has been published You can access the Poster via this link Sales and Marketing gt Entertainment gt Movie Analysis Copy Link Send an email to notify users about the Poster Help Close Option Link Copy Link Description Click the link to open your Poster and view the result Copies the
259. ettings of the query devices both selected values and the query device types e Visualizations e Coloring schemes e Information on how to regenerate derived columns i e those created by calculation and binning e Attached background image files e Data either as a reference to a data source or embedded in the Spotfire Analysis File By saving your current session as an Spotfire Analysis File you can pick up your work later exactly where you left it off The handling of Spotfire Analysis Files differs depending on whether you include the data set in the Analysis static SFS file or reference the data with a link dynamic SFS file 10 2 2 SFT Files SFT Template files are like Spotfire Analysis Files but are used as templates for quickly applying a whole range of visualization settings to a new data set gt To create a template 1 Open a data file 2 Make the required visualization settings query devices coloring multiple visualizations etc 3 Select File gt Save As 4 Enter a name for the template 5 From Save as type select Spotfire Template Files 6 Click OK For a template file to work properly it should only be applied to data with the same column names as the data set used to create the template If applied to a data set with different column names only those settings that are independent of column name will be used e g visualization types fixed color fixed shape size and jittering but not
260. f the selected column pairs will be added to the data set For more information see Details on how data are added Click Next gt Response The Add Columns Select Columns dialog is displayed Comment Clicking Finish in the second step of the wizard will perform the addition of columns by adding all columns from the new data set that were not selected among the Matching columns above to the current data set Click to select the columns to actually include in your data set Comment If a column to include has the same name as one of the columns already in the data set it will be added with the suffix 1 2 etc Click Finish Response The new columns are added and query devices representing the new columns are shown in Spotfire DecisionSite You may have to scroll down in the Query Devices window to see the new query devices Adding Columns from the Clipboard Note The matching of values in the selected ID columns is case sensitive If existing record IDs are missing in the file which is merged into the data set the values in the new column will be empty for these records Records with IDs that do not exist in the original data set will not be added at all gt To add columns from the clipboard to an open data set 1 Copy the columns that you want to add e g from an Excel data sheet together with one or more ID columns to be used in the matching against the current data set Select Data gt Add Columns Response
261. f you also want size to reflect some attribute Orthogonal projection where markers retain size irrespective of distance may be preferable 4 8 6 3 3D Navigation Edit gt Properties gt 3D tab m Navigation M Show bounding box IV Show axes Quick navigation if more than fioo visible records Reset Navigation Option Description Show bounding box This draws a dotted cube around the edges of the visualization volume which often aids in locating a marker in the 3D space Show axes This draws the arrows representing the X Y and Z axes Quick navigation if This lets you speed up rotation zooming etc by drawing markers as more than visible dots while navigating Markers are restored to their normal shapes as records soon as you stop navigating Use this feature if the lag times become too great during 3D navigation Reset Navigation This button resets the orientation of the visualization X horizontal Y vertical and Z depth but does not affect zooming or perspective 111 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Note The Reset button in the toolbar will reset not only navigation but also all query devices 4 8 7 4 8 7 1 Edit gt Properties gt Markers tab Markers Tab of the Scatter Plot Markers Tab of the Scatter Plot Properties Scatter Plot Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Trellis Axes 3D Markers Color Size By gender
262. follows Applicant Experience Grades Creativity Lisa 85 95 60 Joe 70 75 95 Anne 100 80 80 For each applicant it is now possible to plot a personality profile This will give a good if somewhat simplified overview of characteristics and a possibility to visually match an applicant against a model profile for the job The profile chart would look as follows Visualizations Experience Grades Creativity OE e E CEE gt To create a profile chart 1 Press Ctrl 7 or click the New Profile Chart button on the toolbar or select Visualization gt New Profile Chart 2 Go to the axis selector of the X axis and uncheck columns that you do not want to include in the chart such as identifier columns 3 Use the Properties dialog to adjust the various properties of the chart By right clicking in a visualization a pop up menu appears This context menu lets you access many features in a fast and easy way Heat Maps Heat Map plots are also known as Intensity plots or Matrix plots A Heat Map can be likened to a spreadsheet where the values in the cells are instead represented by colors Heat Maps can be used to identify clusters of records with similar values as these are displayed as areas of similar color The easiest way to understand a heat map is to think of a table or spreadsheet which contains colors instead of numbers The default color gradient sets the lowest value in the heat map to bright green the highest value to
263. functions to it from the lists or enter text as in any standard text editor Cut Copy Paste works in the field using standard Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Highlighting a section of the expression and clicking Insert Function will add the selected function to the expression with the highlighted section as an argument Also Undo Redo functionality is available by pressing Ctrl Z Note Very long expressions will be displayed truncated in the Visualization Legend To avoid this insert a blank space with suitable distance This will not affect the expression but will allow the Legend to display it over several rows Displays the data type of the result This field displays the result of applying the current expression to the data set If this field shows an error message then there is a problem with the expression Clicking on the field will display an explanation of what is wrong Pressing F5 will also display the error description Pressing F4 will move the cursor to the position in the expression where the error lies There are three kinds of error messages EXPR there is a problem with the syntax of the expression NUM the expression evaluates to infinity or other illegal number ARG there is a problem with one or many arguments This list contains the fifteen most recent expressions you have created Inserts the selected recent expression to the cursor position of the expression field Columns Tab Columns t
264. g text str sfString Remarks Matching pairs of quotation marks at the beginning and end of the string are removed Column separators appearing within outermost quotes are not interpreted as separators see the last example below Columns beginning or ending with empty noise control characters except the separator currently being used will be stripped of that noise Strings are by default case sensitive e g a12 is treated as different to A12 Sorting Spotfire DecisionSite handles Strings case sensitively Strings are sorted based on ASCII see also Unicode and Character Encodings which means that all uppercase characters will be sorted before any lowercase characters A B C a b c For example strings would be sorted as seen below 1 1005 34 Arizona Beethoven Zebra anaconda bakery Be mindful of this when using Query Devices since setting a Range Slider to include everything between Arizona and Zebra will not include anaconda or bakery The reason for handling sorting this way and not according to the locale setting on the computer is to insure that a Spotfire DecisionSite file looks exactly the same where ever it is opened Therefore country specific characters may be sorted in other ways than according to the locale setting Examples String Interpreted as Hello Hello Hello Hello Hello Hello 3 3 6 6 3 3 6 7 Loading Data Hello there Hello there DEUN SM 3n 5 one two three one two
265. gap in the profile or by connecting the values on each side with a straight line To leave a gap select Break on empty 149 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 16 4 8 16 1 150 Profile Columns Tab Profile Columns Tab Edit gt Properties gt Profile Columns tab Properties Profile Chart x Annotations Details Columns Available columns Data and Background Columns Trelis Profile Columns Profile Columns in profile chart Name Type Customer age Integer Total Integer Date joined Date Age group Integer First buy Date Add gt gt Number of purchases Integer Business loca String Groceries Integer Toys Integer lt lt Remove Garden Integer Receipt aver Integer Furniture Integer Remove All Electronics Integer Move First Move Up Move Down Move Last LEE Wil Option Available columns Columns in profile chart Add gt gt lt lt Remove Remove All Move First Description These columns are not included in the profile chart Note You can right click on the Name header to get a pop up menu where you can select other attributes you would like to be visible These columns are included in the profile chart The order of this list corresponds to the order the columns are shown in the Profile Chart visualization Select a column from the left list and press the Add gt gt button to move it to the right list and include it i
266. ge which DecisionSite Analytic Server you are connected to but merely provides a way to access other pages from DecisionSite The Custom Start Page will be displayed each time you start Spotfire DecisionSite Finally click OK to make the changes take effect If the new Custom Start Page is not on your local intranet or among the Trusted Spotfire sites see below a pop up dialog will appear in which you are asked if you would like to add the URL to the list of trusted sites Trusted Spotfire Sites Only sites on your local intranet or present in the list of Trusted Spotfire sites are allowed to access Spotfire DecisionSite using scripts or active content Each time you enter a new 285 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Custom Start Page you will be prompted whether or not you want to add that site to the list of Trusted Spotfire sites If you want to remove a site from the list select it and then click on the Remove button Some sites in the list may be grayed out and cannot be removed These are sites that are predefined for your installation and needed by Spotfire DecisionSite 9 4 Run from Library 9 4 1 Open Guide from Library The Library introduces convenient sharing of analysis material The Open Guide from Library link in the Guides pane allows you to access Guides located in the Library with a single click Using this link Guides located in the Library can be run in the Guides pane as any other Guide
267. h milliseconds if available YYY MM DD HH MM SS ffl Excel compatible formatted with milliseconds YYY MM DD HH MM SS 1 Two digit year Y MM DD HH MM Two digit year with seconds Y MM DD HH MM SS Two digit year with milliseconds Y MM DD HH MM SS fff Compact YMMDD HHMM x Canem he omm ee de ARR LIIL Sample 2007 08 4 7132132 Help Cancel 5 Click on a format type Response An example of what the selected date and time format would look like is shown in the Sample field 6 When you are satisfied with the selected format click OK Selecting Format gt None from the Format drop down menu resets the format to the default setting Tip If you want to change the date and time formatting for a single column you can also reach the Date and Time Format dialog from the pop up menu of the Query Devices panel Right click on the column of interest and select Set Property gt Format gt Date and Time from the pop up menu Date Format You can specify how you want DecisionSite to display date formatting for time stamp columns You can set the date to be shown either according to regional settings or according to a number of other date formats By changing the date format for a date or time stamp column you can obtain a whole new set of factors to filter your data by See Rearranging the Data by Formatting for more information gt To set Date Formatting for a column 1 Open the Properties dialog by selec
268. h not together with Numeric Only supported when all columns are of the same type of scale that is either Original scale or Log scale Must be a BMP PNG or JPG image Categorical Coloring on a transformed column is not supported In such a case the coloring will be changed to Fixed color Not on String Columns 335 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 336 Fixed Size Yes Size by Records Count Yes Size by Average Yes Only for Numeric columns Size by Sum Yes Only for Numeric columns Labels No DecisionSite Posters uses ToolTips to display this information instead Jitter No Heat Map Properties Column colors Yes Color range Yes Advanced colors No If the heat map uses a mixture of continuous color ranges and categorical values it cannot be published by the Poster Designer Show deselected Yes Row labels Yes Dendrogram Yes Differences between DecisionSite Client and DecisionSite Posters Bar Charts e In DecisionSite Client labels are used to display information about bars In DecisionSite Posters this information is displayed using ToolTips when hovering over a bar Pie Charts e In DecisionSite Client labels are used to display information about sectors In DecisionSite Posters this information is displayed using ToolTips when hovering over a sector e In DecisionSite Client marking is displayed as a continuous line around the edge of a pie In DecisionSite Posters marking is indicated as
269. h the query devices or whether the calculation should be based on the Selected records so that filtering with the query devices will affect the result Number of standard Specifies how many standard deviations away from the bolder deviations average line the deviation lines will be drawn Trellis plot options Specifies whether the average displayed in each trellis panel will be calculated based on the records specific to that trellis panel only or if the average will be based on all records regardless of trellis condition and therefore be the same for every trellis panel Color The color of the displayed line Width The width in pixels of the displayed line Error Bars Error bars are used to indicate the estimated error in a measurement In other words they indicate the uncertainty in the x and or y values Unlike other statistical measures in Spotfire DecisionSite no calculations are performed to produce the error bars Instead the data needed is assumed to be in the data set in the form of three columns representing an average value a high error and a low error The marker itself shows the average value and the high and low error values make up the error bar Visualizations yAverage Low Error 36 28 3 33 1 User Interface 40 35 High Error a 4 30 t 2 2 I x Column containing main values LogRatiol bi Column containing upper errors LogRatio6 z Column containing lower errors LogRatio
270. h you can specify which font should be used for different categories of the application e Annotations the font used for the annotation when printing e Details on Demand on screen e Headers and Footers shown when printing e Legend on screen when printing or exporting e Query Devices on screen e Title when printing e Visualization labels and texts in visualizations on screen when printing or exporting Select one or more categories and click on the Change Font button This displays the Font selection dialog in which you can select which font font style and font size should be used for the selected categories 174 Visualizations gt To reset the fonts e Select one or more categories and click on the Reset button to reset the font for these categories to the default font e Click on the Reset All button to reset all categories to the default font You can specify how you want DecisionSite Client to display number formatting for all Integer type values and Decimal type values You can set the Number of decimal digits how to display Negative numbers and whether or not to use Thousands separators The settings you make in this dialog will be set as default and take effect when you load a new data set in to DecisionSite Client You can set other number formatting for specific columns later if you want to See Number Format for Columns gt To set Number Formatting 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Fonts
271. haracters Certain Unicode characters may take up 6 character spaces in this regard Keywords Keywords specific to the contents of the Guide Keywords are separated by semicolon i e if you write bar chart binning it will be interpreted as a single keyword To produce two keywords the words must be separated with semicolon Hence bar chart binning will result in the two keywords bar chart and binning Keyword are used to enhance organization and search capabilities Use keywords for precise searches ToolTip A short description of the Guide to be displayed as a ToolTip when you hover with the mouse pointer over the Guide title in the Guides pane Example Creates a bar chart by binning data into even 9 5 3 11 3 9 5 3 12 9 5 3 12 1 Guides intervals Author The name of the Guide author Company Here you can specify the company that owns the Guide Finish Click Finish to publish your Guide and proceed to the Publish to Library Guide Published dialog where you can find information on notify your colleagues gt To reach the Publish to Library Wizard Step 2 2 dialog 1 In Analysis Builder click Guide gt Publish to Library 2 Inthe Publish to Library Wizard Step 1 2 select Library location enter a title and click Next gt Publish to Library Guide Published As soon as you have saved your Guide in the Library a dialog window will appear with a confirmation that your Guide is published This dialog w
272. hart Name Type Customer age Integer Integer Total Integer String Gender String Integer Add gt gt Age group Integer Integer Recency Date Integer lt lt Remove Date joined Date Integer Integer Remove All Integer String Move First Move Up Move Down Move Last PHI Hil Option Available columns Columns in line chart Add gt gt lt lt Remove Remove All Move First Move Up Description These columns are not included in the line chart Note You can right click on the Name header to get a pop up menu where you can select other attributes you would like to be visible These columns are included in the line chart The order of this list corresponds to the order the columns are shown in the Line Chart visualization Select a column from the left list and press the Add gt gt button to move it to the right list and include it in the line chart Select a column from the right list and press the lt lt Remove button to move it back to the available columns list and remove it from the line chart Removes all columns from the right list and moves them to the available columns list Select a column from the right list and press the Move First button to move it to the top This changes the order the lines are displayed Select a column from the right list and press the Move Up button to 145 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual move it a step up This changes
273. hart was introduced For legacy reasons it is still possible to create a version 7 x bar chart Select this check box and restart DecisionSite Client to display a toolbar button which lets you create a version 7 x bar chart Select this option to use the current formatting of all columns upon export See Export Data for more information e The default width of the query device window e Vertical or horizontal auto tiling e Default file location this is the directory you want Spotfire DecisionSite to open when you select File gt Open Entering a single period character in this field means that Spotfire DecisionSite s Spotfire DecisionSite Data directory will be the default 177 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 9 7 4 9 7 1 4 9 7 2 178 View Tip What is View Tip View Tip is a tool for rapid assessment of potentially interesting visualizations It suggests visualizations based on the correlation between data in the columns the number of unique values and the distribution of data In some cases the View Tip also suggests colors where this is appropriate View Tip is a convenient way of quickly getting to know a data set As you browse through the different miniatures plots you realize that View Tip is a natural first step when you start exploring unknown data To use the View Tip function Open the data set in Spotfire DecisionSite and select View Tip from the Visualization menu Click on an it
274. have a separate properties tab for this see Axes tab for Scatter Plots For all other plots please continue below The Axes section of the Data and Background tab lets you define attributes for labels axes and grids The check boxes allow you to control which labels and grid lines to display Data Range In the Data Range dialog the minimum and maximum values of the axes can be set This allows you to get more space around the data whose range is otherwise set to the range of the records of the data set Data Range H E x m Data range High 2521 5 Low 61 5 Low High X Low 0 215909 x High 24 78409 Default Cancel Labels If you click the Labels button you can set the label orientation the label spacing and the maximum number of labels for each of the axes 73 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 74 CT x m Label Orientation Axis Horizontal Vertical YAris Horizontal Vertical Tick spacing Axis At Even Values Y Y Axis at EvenValues Y Z Axis At Even Yalues vY Max no of ticks a X Axis 11 Y Axis 11 Z Axis l1 kk The actual number of displayed ticks might be considerably lower and will not always change when the max number of ticks is changed Reset Option Label Orientation Tick spacing Max no of ticks Reset Cancel Description
275. he Compact color view whereas you would have to change two items min gt median and median gt max in the Extended color view 121 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Compact Extended Ranges Ranges E min v Boston J min x median v _ I median m Los Angeles Boston Los Angeles nesses E maz S Seattle _ median X max v Los Angeles Seattle 4 8 7 7 3 Categorical Coloring Dialog Categorical Coloring x Values Add Delete i Marked l Empty Other l Deselected Bis Mion d Import Export Help Advanced Option Description Values Displays the values in the chosen column and the color for each value Note When the dialog is opened the values are sorted If new values are added the order is changed but you can restore the order by right clicking and selecting Sort gradients 122 Add Delete Marked Empty Other Deselected Import Export Advanced Visualizations Adds a new item to the list of Color values Using this you can assign specific colors to values and create your own coloring arrangement Removes a selected value Ctrl click to select multiple items for deletion Shows the color of the records that have been marked Shows the color of the empty records Empty refers to records that have at least one empty field These records are not shown at all in visualizations where an axis corresponds to t
276. he Function list in the dialog Examples y x 10 x y x Average x 100 y x 10 sin x PI 5 You can also select the color and width of the curve In the Status field there is also a syntax verification of the entered expression where you can easily see if the expression is correct If the expression is valid and the Redraw curve while typing check box is selected the curve will be drawn and immediately updated on screen when you edit your expression so you can always check to see if it looks like you intended Transformations The x and y values are unaffected by transformations but the mapping onto the plot will be affected This means that a straight line equation such as y x x will turn into a curve if the X axis column uses a Log transform 83 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 84 User Interface CT ij x m Functions Category Description All v Adds the two arguments z Example 3 5 2 5 Function Insert Function r Curve Expression yf IV Redraw curve while typing 30 Cos x 10 10 x width 2 se Status OK Cancel Category Select a category of functions to limit the choices in the Function list e All e Operators e Math Functions e Statistical Functions e Text Functions e Logical Functions e Date amp Time Functions e Conversion Functions Function Select a function by clicking on it and click the Inser
277. he box in which it sits is an indication of the relative size of the current selection To display or hide the status bar use the Status Bar command in the View menu 4 9 6 Organizing the Desktop 4 9 6 1 Arranging Visualizations There are several ways to reposition windows the commands governing these functions all reside in the Window menu Auto Hide Axis Selectors when the visualization is small enough this option automatically hides the zoom bars and the axis selectors Hide Window Frame hides the title bar giving more space to the visualizations only available when several visualizations have been tiled Auto Tile arranges all the windows on screen according to an internal algorithm The active visualization will be made the largest and placed in the upper left hand corner Cascade arranges the visualization windows so that they partially overlap each other leaving each window accessible by clicking on the title bar Tile Horizontal splits the window area horizontally giving each visualization equal area Tile Vertical splits the window area vertically giving each visualization equal area Tip An alternative way of organizing visualizations is to use a Trellis plot This allows you to split an existing plot into panes and organize these in a grid Note that this feature is currently available only for scatter plots 2D and 3D bar charts profile charts and heat maps See What is a Trellis Plot for more
278. he columns from the new data set to add to your data Last name First name Help Finish Cancel The list box shows the columns available for import All columns in the new data set are listed Per default all new columns that are not included among the Matching columns in the previous dialog will be selected Click the name of the column you want to add For multiple selection press Ctrl and click on the desired columns You can also use Shift or drag the mouse over the desired columns gt To reach the Add Columns Select Columns dialog 1 Select Data gt Add Columns 2 Make your choices in the Add Columns Select Source dialog and click Next gt 3 Make your choices in the Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog and click Next gt 210 Working with the Data 7 1 4 Theory and Methods 7 1 4 1 Details on How Data are Added The merging is based on the selected ID fields of the current and the added data sets The matching of names is case sensitive If existing record IDs are missing in the data which are merged into the data set the values in the new column will be empty for these records Records with IDs that do not exist in the original data set will not be added at all If multiple IDs exist in the data to be added the value in the added column will be the first record from the top in the data columns used for adding See Example of adding columns with multiple IDs for more information If multiple
279. he first string to the last Individual auto range With this option the Min Mid and Max values for the range are automatically set to the lowest median and highest values respectively that exist in each individual column All selected columns will be colored according to their own individual Min and Max values Visualizations 4 8 17 3 Advanced Coloring Dialog xi Name Default Preview Column P1 Values Add All Delete Delete All Ranges J shareaMin v sharedMiddle E add 0 525 Tae 1050 E sharedMiddle v sharedM ax v _ Delete All 525 _ Delete Other Color Deselected Empty From palette Edit m Marked C Fixed E N Templates Import Export Help Basic Close Option Description Name Displays the name of the coloring arrangement Type to enter a new name Preview Lists the columns from which you can add values to the Values list Column Values Displays the values in the chosen column Preview Column and the color for each value If a value has a defined categorical color this color will be used even if the value is also defined within a color range Add Adds a new item to the list of Values Using this you can assign specific colors to values and create your own coloring arrangement Add All Adds all available values from the selected Color by column to the Values list 155 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual
280. he missing field Shows the color of values that are not specified in the Values list Shows the color of the deselected values Deselected refers to records that do not fulfill the constraints of the query devices Imports a color arrangement from a file Exports a color arrangement to a file This enables you to save a color arrangement and reuse it Switches you to the Advanced Coloring dialog where you can have more control over the way you color your values and ranges gt To change a color in Categorical mode 1 Click on the square of color that you want to modify 2 Select a color from the palette or click More colors to see the complete color palette gt To change the Marked Empty Other or Deselected color 1 Click the button of the color that you want to modify 2 Select a color from the palette or click More colors to see the complete color palette 123 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 7 7 4 124 Advanced Coloring Dialog Advanced Coloring x Name Default Preview Column P1 v Values Add All Delete Delete All Ranges J sharedMin v sharedMiddle E add 0 525 Gene BBM sharedMiddie sharedMax gt Delete All 525 1050 Other Color Deselected Empty From palete ee C a Marked C Fined es E Templates Import Export Help Basic Close Option Description Name Displays the name of the co
281. he selected column or columns when mapped to an axis in the visualization Scale options Original Ln 1 x Log Exp Exp10 Inverse Scale and Reverse sorting New Column Adds a new column either by Binning or from an Expression Delete Columns Deletes the selected column from memory The underlying file is not affected unless you save the data set This dialog can also be accessed by double clicking in the upper right corner of any query device 4 8 3 2 Annotating Columns Edit gt Properties gt Columns tab It is possible to annotate individual columns This text will appear when you place the mouse pointer over the paper clip next to a query device gt To enter an annotation for a column 1 Go to the Columns tab of the Properties dialog 2 Select a column 3 Enter your text in the Annotation field You can also edit annotations for a column by double clicking the paper clip next to the corresponding query device or by selecting Edit Annotations from the query device pop up menu 4 8 3 3 Transforming Axis Scale A numerical column can be set to display its values using a variety of scales instead of the linear scale which is default Natural Log Scale Ln x 1 Logarithmic Scale Log Exponential to the bases of e Exp and 10 Exp10 Inverse Scale 1 x and Reverse Scale The last option changes the sort order for the selected column This is accomplished by right clicking on the query device representing the co
282. help file To see Information Builder help start the tool and select Help Launches the Information Designer tool where you can set up database connections This tool has its own help file To see Information Designer help start the tool and select Help Only available for users with Administrator privileges Launches the DecisionSite Administrator tool where you can manage DecisionSite users and groups You can organize users into groups define profiles for the individual user and group and assign licenses to groups and users To see DecisionSite Administrator help start the tool and select Help Only available for users with Administrator privileges Starts DecisionSite Library which provides easy to access publishing of Analyses Guides and Posters See What is DecisionSite Library Only available for users with Administrator privileges Edit who is allowed to create new Library Sections configure DecisionSite Library and Poster settings Only available for users with Administrator privileges Opens the log file dssaccess sfs in DecisionSite for an easy analysis and overview This file contains information about all logins and logouts from all DecisionSite Clients to the DecisionSite Analytics Server It shows which user logged in out and when The log is always enabled and it is unaffected by Log Configuration File settings 353 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 11 1 7 11 1 8 354 Custom
283. his dialog from there You can also double click the Guide to open it Description Use Search to search for the item you want to open Enter the search string in the Search for field and click Search See Searching in the Library for information about search strings If you click a folder in the Search result you will be redirected to the Library View under the Library tab Select which Library Section you want to perform your search in Either one or all Library Sections can be searched Only Library Sections you have access to are listed gt To reach the Open Guide from Library dialog e Click Open Guide from Library in the Guides pane or e select Guides gt Run from Library from the menu or e in Analysis Builder click Guide gt Open from Library Note Opening a Guide in Analysis Builder will open the Guide for editing in Analysis Builder and not to the Guides pane as in the previous cases 287 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 5 Create and Edit Guide 9 5 1 Analysis Builder Overview With the Analysis Builder you can capture your commonly performed analysis processes into Guides Creating your own Guides does not require your having to write a single line of code 9 5 2 Using Analysis Builder 9 5 2 1 Guides Created with Analysis Builder Guides created with the Analysis Builder can contain text and links However the Guides can also be extended with any number of complex tasks if you ha
284. ick Finish 3 3 2 3 Importing from the Clipboard gt To import data from the Windows clipboard 1 2 3 4 5 Mark a number of cells in a text window a spreadsheet program or another program providing a tabular presentation of data such as Statistica Microsoft Excel Word etc Select Edit gt Copy or hit Ctrl C to copy them to the clipboard In Spotfire DecisionSite select File gt Import gt Import Data From the Common folder select Clipboard Click Next gt This triggers the same dialog as when importing text files Tip If your clipboard data is formatted using a standard column delimiter and if no preprocessing is required you can paste it directly into Spotfire DecisionSite Press Ctrl V 3 3 2 4 Importing from a Database By default Spotfire DecisionSite connects to external sources of data by means of ODBC Open Database Connectivity This allows you to import data from virtually any kind of database commercially available To learn how to set up an ODBC data source please refer to the database vendor s documentation and the Windows documentation on ODBC It might be necessary to install ODBC driver software particular to the database used before being able to utilize the ODBC option gt To import from a Database 1 2 3 4 Select File gt Import gt Import Data Select Database from the list of data sources Click Next gt In the Select Data Source dialog go to the M
285. ide in Analysis Builder by adding links and text to the Guide contents list By adding actions links to your Guide simultaneously when you perform the analysis you can make sure that you capture the settings used this very moment This way you can also add links that update the same visualization to several places in the Guide Test the Guide by selecting Guide gt Run The Guide will be displayed in the Guides pane Note that if you are testing Guide steps that include opening a data set you will clear the current Actions in DecisionSite list Make sure that you have added all steps of your current analysis to the Guide before testing the parts of the Guide that involve switching data sets When you are finished with the Guide select Guide gt Save As or publish it to the Library with Guide gt Publish to Library 6 You can now send the Guide to a colleague or to your IT department for extended functionality or deployment 9 5 2 3 Analysis Builder Quick Reference Action Start Analysis Builder Create a new Guide Open a Guide from the Library Edit an existing Guide Add text to a Guide Add new actions to the Actions in DecisionSite list Add links to a Guide Instruction From the main menu bar of DecisionSite select Guides gt Create and Edit Guide In Analysis Builder click Guide gt New Edit the Guide by adding text and links In Analysis Builder click Guide gt Open from Library Browse the Lib
286. ides and Tools that need to connect to databases etc which obviously cannot do so while working offline Note Working offline requires at least one previous successful login to the Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server Each time you log into the server it checks to see which Guides and Tools that should be available to you and if there are any new updates Spotfire DecisionSite automatically downloads these to your computer so that they are available the next time you log in whether you are connected to the server or not Unsupported Software If your computer does not have the proper software installed for example an Internet Explorer version that is too old a dialog will appear This dialog will state exactly what is wrong and also ask you to contact your Administrator for further help 2 3 2 Welcome to Spotfire DecisionSite When you have logged in to Spotfire DecisionSite you will be presented with a Welcome screen Getting Started Welcome to TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite for Lead Discovery What do you want to do Get an introduction Open a sample file Open data How to switch to another DecisionSite for example Lead Discovery Functional Genomics Reservoir Analytics Close this window don t Show this window at Startup re open from View setting Started This will help you get started with the application by providing some useful options Get an introduction This option gives you a five minute to
287. ign will be placed 253 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 1 2 3 8 1 2 4 254 before each ID in the query In the same way anything placed between the dollar sign and the right bracket will be placed after each ID in the query Enter the Delimiter to use to separate the IDs in a query Comment The identifiers in a query with more than one record are put together in one search string separated by the selected Delimiter You can use AND OR or ONLY as delimiters Click OK Response The new web link is saved and is displayed together with the other available web links in the user interface Editing a Web Link gt To edit a web link 1 Select Tools gt Web Links Response The Web Links dialog is displayed Click Options Response The Web Links Options dialog is displayed Click on the web link you want to edit in the list of Available web links Response The Web link name URL and Delimiter for the selected web link are displayed and can be edited directly in the corresponding fields Comment All changes that are made are reflected in the Preview which helps you see what the finished query will look like Make desired changes to the web link and click OK Response The web link is updated according to your changes and the Web Links Options dialog is closed Removing a Web Link gt To remove a web link 1 Select Tools gt Web Links Response The Web Links dialog is d
288. ill also include a hyperlink to the Library folder containing the Guide you just published which you can click on to view the final result Guide Published x My Guide has been published fou can access the Guide from this location in the DecisionSite Library Copy Link Documentation gt My Guide d 4 Send an email to notify users about the Guide Send Email Help Example of a confirmation from DecisionSite Library about a published item Option Description Link Click on the link to open the Library folder containing your published Guide Close Closes the notification dialog gt To reach the Publish to Library Guide Published dialog 1 In Analysis Builder click Guide gt Publish to Library 2 Inthe Publish to Library Wizard Step 1 2 select Library location enter a title and click Next gt 3 Enter properties in Publish to Library Wizard Step 2 2 and click Finish Menus Analysis Builder Guide Menu The Guide menu contains commands used when working with Guide files 307 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Option Description New Creates a new empty Guide This resets the Guide contents window but not the Actions in DecisionSite list Open Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved Guide file SFG that you can continue to work on or modify and save as a new Guide Save Saves the current Guide as an SFG file Save As Saves the current Guide to a
289. ils on Demand DoD shown for marked records in all types of plots Marked Records Body the body part of the DoD shown for marked records in all types of plots Marked Records Footer the footer part of the DoD shown for marked records in all types of plots When some records have been marked or activated the details of those records are presented according to the three marked records templates The Edit button brings up an edit box in which you can edit the selected template In the HTML editing window you have several possibilities for creating and modifying the template 198 Details on Demand and Legend Edit Details on Demand y x lt l This HTML code is generated by Spotfire gt lt head gt lt title gt Spotfire D BNAME lt title gt lt head gt lt l Set colors to white background black text blue links gt lt body bgcolor tfftff text 000000 link 000088 vlink 000055 alink 0000ff gt lt font size 2 gt lt l Create a table with one line for each marked row gt e 4 b Load Save As Default Cancel The HTML Edit window for the Marked records Header The Load button allows you to browse for an external file and use it as the template Here you can also load a template file that you previously have edited for the current or for a different data set The Save As button saves the changes in an external HTML file that can be
290. in the Guides pane It is not necessary to save the Guide prior to using this command in Analysis Builder Therefore it is useful for iterative testing of the design of the Guide Note If you are testing Guide steps that include opening a data set you will clear the current Actions in DecisionSite list Make sure that you have added all steps of your current analysis to the Guide before you test the parts of the Guide that involve switching data sets Adds a new text element below the currently selected item or if no item is selected at the bottom of the Guide contents list The Text Properties dialog is displayed with the default text Enter text here Creates a new page in the Guide The beginning of the new page is labeled Page Break in the Guide contents list Adds a number before the selected text link or comment item Subsequently following text link or comment items on the same Guide page get the next number 2 3 if this button is selected Adds a bullet before the selected text link or comment item Indents the selected text link or comment item Text Properties Dialog The Text Properties dialog is used to enter and edit the text of a text element Multiple paragraphs can be written within the same text element bold formatting and hyperlinks can be applied to selected text Guides xi B E The text that want to display in my guide is entered here can add multiple paragraphs to the same text
291. in the appropriate region of hits drag the fine tuning lower portion to locate the specific value you want Query Devices As with other sliders once activated they can be adjusted with the keyboard arrows Keyboard selection is always fine grained value by value generic name ox amp pine S inn amp zep ALL E Let s look at the example in the figure above Note that the brackets must be preceded by a backslash since brackets have a special meaning in regular expressions see Regular Expressions below carb ox amp pine inn amp zep Spotfire DecisionSite will evaluate the search expression in the following way carb OR ox AND pine inn AND zep In plain English this means Show me all items where the column Generic Name contains names that include the sub strings carb or ox and also contains the full string pine inn as well as the sub string zep This means that OXCARBAZEPINE INN would be matched but not AMOXAPINE U INN or CARBAMAZEPINE U INN Note The scope of a full text slider is dependent on the settings of other query devices This means that the slider range constantly changes as you manipulate the query devices Items that fall outside of the current selection or zooming become unavailable and will be grayed out 5 4 3 Introduction to Regular Expressions Regular expressions constitute the standard pattern matching language used heavily for searching and parsing text in most UNIX and Perl
292. in the current data set that are available for data set use in a column pair A column can only be used in a single column pair matching at a time and will therefore be grayed out in this list box after it has been included in the Matching columns list box Add Match Select an ID column in both list boxes above and click Add Match to add the pair to the Matching columns list box 209 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Remove Select one or more column pairs in the Matching columns list box and click this button to remove the pairs from the list This will return the columns to the list boxes of available columns above Matching columns Displays the selected column pairs that specify how the merge between the two data sets will be made If more than one pair is selected only records that have identical values in all of the selected column pairs will be added to the data set For more information see Details on how data are added Finish If Finish is clicked in the second step of the wizard all columns in the new data set that are not used as identifiers in the Matching columns list will be added to the data set gt To reach the Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog 1 Select Data gt Add Columns 2 Make your choice in the Add Columns Select Source dialog make sure that you have selected Manual as the Column match method and click Next gt 7 1 3 3 Add Columns Select Columns Dialog x Select t
293. in the matching of identifiers explicit primary key matching Use this option if you want to make sure that the matching is correct Click Next gt Response The Import Data Select Data Source dialog is displayed Click to select whether to add data from a File a Database or the Clipboard or use one of the Advanced options Click Next gt Response The Import Data Data Conditioning dialog is displayed If you have selected one of the Advanced options you may be Guided through other wizards prior to reaching this dialog See the online help for the wizard you are using for more information If desired select a data conditioning method from the drop down list Comment It is possible to pivot data using a Tall Skinny gt Short Wide converter or to use the Case normalizer to remove duplicate strings based on case insensitive comparison For more information about the conditioning methods see Data Conditioning Click Finish Response The Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog is displayed Comment If you have selected Automatic as the Column Match method you will go straight to the Add Columns Select Columns dialog where you can select which columns to add Click to select a column from the Columns in new data set that you want to use to map against your current data Comment This should be some kind of ID column preferably containing unique identifiers If a record in this column is missing in the current data set
294. in the transposed data set and click Add gt gt Working with the Data Comment Each selected column will become a separate record in the transposed data set 6 Click Next gt Response Step 3 of the wizard is shown 7 Ifrequired select annotation columns Comment Each transposed column will be annotated with the value of this column 8 Click Finish Response A message box appears prompting you to save your previous data set 9 Click Yes to save the previous data set Response The new transposed data set replaces the original data set Example of Transposing Transposing a data set means rotating it so that columns become records and vice versa Consider the following table describing a series of meteorological observations Day Temperature Wind Humidity Monday 16 5 75 Tuesday 19 8 70 Wednesday 17 10 70 Thursday 24 9 65 Friday 26 2 iS Saturday 27 2 80 Sunday 25 4 80 As we add more observations the table grows taller but remains four columns wide While useful during data collection this format may not be appropriate for certain types of calculations or visualizations By transposing this table the following can be produced Transposed Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday columns Temperature 19 17 24 26 Humidity 70 70 65 75 gt To produce this result 1 Ina visualization select using the query devices the records Tuesday Wednesday Thursday and Friday Launch the Transpose Data tool Select Day a
295. information 4 9 6 2 Showing and Hiding Windows Spotfire DecisionSite consists of several windows It can be desirable to rearrange the application s layout to organize visualizations and information for more effective analysis The View menu displays a list of the Spotfire DecisionSite windows Each window can be shown or hidden by selecting or clearing the check mark next to the name of the window respectively The windows are listed and described below Toolbars the row of clickable buttons right below the menus See Toolbar Buttons for more information Status Bar the information field at the bottom of the application window The status bar displays information about pointer position number and portion of records that are visible and marked etc Full Screen by selecting this option all Toolbars are hidden and the Visualization Query Device and Details on Demand window are maximized to fill the whole screen By clicking on the small icon below the Toolbars are returned You can also go to Full Screen mode by pressing F11 Workbook when this option is selected each visualization is given a separate tab Details on Demand Text the window where information about the marked records the highlighted scatter plot marker bar or pie object etc appears Details on Demand HTML information about the highlighted or marked scatter plot marker s bar or pie object s etc formatted according to the HTML temp
296. ing and Highlighting in the Visualizations chapter for more information By turning Auto Switch on the Details on Demand window automatically updates the Details on Demand window if you mark new records or make one record active However if you turn Auto Switch off the Details on Demand window will only show information about a certain category of your choice Example You choose to display only Selected records by turning Auto Switch off and selecting the Selected Records option Then you click on a record which makes it Active This will not cause the Details on Demand window to show information about that particular record but instead it continues to display information about the currently Selected records gt To always show selected records 1 Right click in the Details on Demand window A pop up menu appears 2 Clear the Auto Switch option No checkmark should be shown to the left of the option Auto Switch Selected Record s Marked Record s Active Record s Reset 3 Select Selected Records from the same pop up menu Making a record active in the visualization will now have no effect on the Details on Demand window The Details on Demand window will always display information about the currently selected records If you use the Query Devices or zoom bars to change the selected records the information in the window will be updated Note The Limit maximum number of records shown option that can be found in
297. ings in the report Select this box to include a table with the currently marked records Select a graphics file format for the images included in the report Select this box if you want to launch the report in your default browser after it has been saved Click here when you have made the desired settings You will be asked to specify a name and folder for the generated HTML file gt To reach the Export as Web Page dialog Select File gt Export gt Web Page Exporting Details on Demand Spotfire DecisionSite provides the possibility to export the information about the active or the marked markers If the Details on Demand HTML option is selected under the View menu the File gt Export gt Details on Demand option is available Selecting it will launch an external browser Netscape or Internet Explorer in which the details of the records will be presented Saving and Exporting Data Tip Also note other Export options can be found under the File menu 10 9 Export Current Visualization gt To save an image of the current visualization to a file 1 Select File gt Export gt Current Visualization Export isualization Options Title IV Include title Scatter Plot m Visualization IV Preserve aspect ratio Width 722 Height 541 cro 2 Enter the title to be included at the top of the image 3 Enter the size of the exported image If you check Preserve aspect ratio
298. input parameter should be According to Spotfire UI Guidelines the label for a text field should use sentence style capitalization and end with a colon If desired add a default value and or min and max values to limit the allowed input values Click OK In the Script field select the input parameter datain and click on the Add as Input Parameter button Pal 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Tools On the Input Parameters tab from the Data type drop down list select Dataset From the Value drop down list select Prompt Data set Response The Prompt Settings Data Set dialog is displayed Prompt Settings Data Set x Label Select a number of columns max 7 Data types Date and Time Optional settings Minimum number of columns fi Maximum number of columns 7 In the dialog specify the Label that you want the end user of the configuration to see upon execution In this example we use the text Select a number of columns max 7 Select the Data types of the columns that will be available for selection In this example we will add an integer to the values of the specified columns so Integer and Real are suitable data types If desired add a Minimum number of columns in this example we use 1 and a Maximum number of columns in this example we use 7 Click OK In the Script field select the output parameter dataout and click on the Add as Output Parameter but
299. io buttons to specify how you want to include your Analysis data The options are Linked Load data from the data source Use this option when your data resides in a data source always accessible to all users with read access of your published Analysis 319 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 10 3 2 320 Embedded Save the current data set in the Analysis Use this option when your data cannot be accessed by all users 8 Click Finish Response The Analysis is published and the confirmation dialog for the wizard is displayed This dialog also includes a hyperlink to the Library folder containing the Analysis you just published which you can click on to view the final result Publish Analysis to Library Wizard Step 1 2 This wizard helps you to publish your Analysis to the Library Using the Library you and your colleagues can collaborate on the same Analysis keeping everyone up to date Everything you save in your DecisionSite file SFS is stored in the Library This step lets you specify where in the Library your Analysis should be published Navigate in the Library by using double click on Library Sections and folders Publish Analysis to Library Step 1 2 x Home gt General DecisionSite Q New Folder X Delete f Properties QA Members Type Title Description it ve 9 Baseball data Example Check out baseball statistic 1e Environment data Example Explore the deposit of hea
300. ion Designer While Information Library is primarily designed to execute predefined queries stored in the IM Information Builder lets you create such queries from building blocks such as columns and filters Information Designer is the administrative tool for designing the Information Model configuring the database connections and assigning user permissions for accessing various parts of the model 3 4 2 Using Information Library 3 4 2 1 Opening an Information Link Information Library provides a set of information links predefined queries organized into different domains Which domains are available to you depends on how your permissions have been set by the administrator The information links are defined in Information Builder gt To open an information link 1 Select File gt Import gt Open Information Link Response The Information Library dialog is shown 2 Inthe Information Links pane select a link jl i 43 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 4 2 2 3 4 2 3 44 Response Information about the selected link is displayed in the Information Link details pane Comment Click the symbols to see the contents of a domain Click Open Comment To open a link directly double click the link icon AL Response The information link is opened and the data is shown in DecisionSite If the information link includes run time filters one or more dialogs will now appear See Filtering Data During
301. is marked or not The colors of the markers pies or bars are governed by the values of the records in the column If there are less than 20 items in the column the coloring will be set to categorical otherwise it will be continuous The sizes of the markers pies or bars are governed by the values of the records in the column Z Original Scale Ln 1 x Scale Log Scale Exp Scale Exp10 Scale Inverse Scale Reverse Sorting Edit Annotation Quick Reference Set the X axis to the column represented by the current Query Device Set the y axis to the column represented by the current Query Device Set the Z axis to the column represented by the current Query Device All changes to the scale of the column are removed Logarithm base e scale In x 1 Logarithm base 10 scale log9 x Exponential scale base e e Exponential scale base 10 10 Inverse scale 1 x Reverse scale Go to the dialog that lets you edit the annotation for this column 11 3 Visualization Pop up Menu If you right click in a visualization you will bring up a pop up menu with shortcuts to some of the most used commands The pop up menu is slightly different in some of the visualizations Scatter plots Option Zoom gt gt Zoom to Selection gt Reset Zooming Trellis Marked Record s gt gt Delete gt Unmark gt Invert gt Select Hotkey Description Zooms to the selected records Resets the
302. isplayed Click Options Response The Web Links Options dialog is displayed Click on the web link you want to remove in the list of Available web links Response The Web link name URL and Delimiter for the selected web link are displayed in the corresponding fields Click Delete Response All the fields are cleared Comment You can delete many web links at a time if you select several web links in the list of Available web links and click Delete Press Ctrl and click on the web links in the list to select more than one Tip If you have deleted some of the default web links by mistake you may retrieve them again by clicking the Add defaults button This adds all of the default links to the Available web links list regardless of whether or not the links already exist Tools 8 1 3 User Interface 8 1 3 1 Web Links Dialog xi Web links NIST Chemistry webbook Search by CASH NIST Chemistry webbook Search by Formula Entrez Protein Entrez Nucleotide Entrez Structure Entrez Genome Entrez PopSet OMIM Affymetrix NetAf x USPTO US Patent amp Trademark Office Identifier column Customer age v Help Options Cancel Option Description Web links The available web links The web links tool is shipped with a number of default links but you can edit or add new web links to the list via the Web Links Options dialog Click to select the link to which you want to send a query for the marked reco
303. ist 51 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Radio Buttons O Set Filter for Column 2 s 9 9 9 oi 2 2 s 2 7 Part Description Radio buttons Select a unique value for the column by clicking an entry in the list Include Select this check box to also include records that contain no data for this empty values column consequently not available in the list for this step 52 Loading Data Structure Search a Set Filter for Column K x Step 3 of 3 Select Structure Search for Substructure Similarity using threshold value 1 100 feo Edit Structure Import Structure lt Back Finish Cancel Option Description Search for Select whether to search using a substructure or to search for structures similar to a master structure If similarity is selected type a threshold value between 1 and 100 A high value means that only very similar records will be included in the resulting list Edit Structure Launches ISIS Draw where you can edit the master structure before performing the search Import Structure Displays the Open dialog where you can select a MOL file to use in the search 3 4 3 3 Get Values from Data Set Dialog e Get Values from E a Matching column vear Get values from Marked records Selected records OK Cancel 53 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 5 3 5 1 54 Part D
304. ist of one or more bands each reflecting the distribution of values in a certain column Set Number of color bands to the desired number then select one band at a time using Color band Color settings are set for each band individually Five different labels can be added to the pie charts Pie size shows the number of records associated with the pie or average or sum depending on the settings under Size Pie sector value shows the value associated with each sector in the outermost band Pie sector percentage shows the percentage of the pie that each sector covers in the outermost band Pie records count shows the number of records in the pie Pie position shows the position of the pie Requires the use of axes The maximum size of the pies in the pie chart can be varied with the Size slider Under the Size slider there are four options of radio buttons with the following functions Fixed size pies are sized all the same By records count pies are sized according to the number of records in each pie By average pies are sized according to the average value of the records in the pie By sum pies are sized according to the sum of the records in the pie The Jitter function at the bottom right of the Properties dialog can be used in the same way with pie charts as when working with scatter plots Visualizations The overlapping pies will be randomly displaced so that hidden information will be made visible At l
305. ite Dialog This dialog is presented when the creator of a Computation Services configuration has chosen to open the result of a calculation in a DecisionSite instance other than the one running the configuration Open Resulting Data Set in DecisionSite x C Launch new DecisionSite instance Open in existing DecisionSite instance co mb chem sfs Help OK Cancel Option Description Launch new Select this option to launch a completely new DecisionSite instance DecisionSite with the result of the calculation as a new data set instance Open in existing Select this option to choose from a list of existing DecisionSite DecisionSite instances The data set currently open in the instance of your choice will instance be replaced by the new data set Distance Calculator You can calculate the distance between two markers in a 2D or 3D scatter plot by using the Distance Calculator Click on the marker you want to use as the origin Then move the mouse pointer over other markers and the distance to the origin will be displayed in the Distance Calculator window The Distance Calculator also displays the distance from one marker to another along the different axes More specifically the distances calculated are distance Ax fy Az Ax x active x highlighted Ay ylactive y highlighted Ag z active z highlighted Note The Distance Calculator only handles Real Float and Integer types If
306. itions I Ignore case 5 n New column name Binned MOLREGNO Help Cancel Option Column Specific limits Even intervals Even distribution Cherry picking 216 Description Displays the available columns on which you can perform binning The values from this column will be sorted into several bins or categories based on your selections Allows you to explicitly enter the desired values of the limits to use for each bin Enter the value you wish to use for the limits of your bins and separate them with a semicolon Allows you to specify the desired number of bins and divides the value range into equal intervals Allows you to specify the desired number of bins and divides the bins so that each one contains an equal number of unique values The Settings button opens the Cherry Picking dialog where you can manually select which value to put in each bin Working with the Data Based on standard The range is divided into sections as described by the selected standard deviation Substring deviation multipliers Groups the records by the first or last characters of the values in the column to be binned Note The exact number of characters to take into account must be supplied New column name Here you supply the binned column with an appropriate name gt To reach the New Column by Binning dialog Select Data gt New Column gt By Binning or right click in the Query Device window an
307. ize Options Select Language Guides Menu Option Tutorials gt gt Explore a film database gt Find interesting stocks Run from File Run from Library Create and Edit Guide Publish to Library Window Menu Option Close Close All Auto Hide Axis Selectors Hide Window Frame Auto Tile Customize menu and toolbars A dialog box opens with four tabs on which you can choose appearances and customize toolbars commands and menus The Options dialog lets you specify visualization settings such as fonts axis labels default file location and much more Here you can also choose to save personal settings The Select Language dialog lets you change the language of the main menus and the online help if you have access to any language pack Note The dialog texts and any submenus will still be displayed in English Description Starts the Tutorial Explore a film database in the Guides pane Starts the Tutorial Find interesting stocks in the Guides pane Launches an Open dialog where you can Browse to the Guide file that you want to run See Running Guides Locally Opens an item from the DecisionSite Library A Library browser opens where you can browse the Library for an Analysis Guide or Poster you want to open See Open From Library Opens the Analysis Builder tool where you can create and edit Guides See Analysis Builder overview Publishes the current Analysis to the Library
308. k August 26 London November 13 New York November 11 As we add more observations the table grows taller but remains three columns wide While useful during data collection this format may not be appropriate for certain types of calculations or visualizations For example the entities that interest us are the different cities so we may want a representation with a single record for each city Tall Skinny gt Short Wide conversion lets us pivot this table producing the following note that avg Temp is the average of a single cell City avg Temp avg Temp avg Temp avg Temp for February for May for August for November London 4 16 28 13 New 6 19 26 11 York Each city is now represented by a single record which makes this format very suitable for Spotfire DecisionSite profile charts This example demonstrates three steps e Creating a row for each unique value in City e Creating a column for each unique value in Month e Entering a value from Temp for each cell in the resulting grid In the Tall Skinny gt Short Wide dialog the following settings would be made e Identity City e Category Month e Values Temp Example of Pivoting with Aggregation Note To understand this example it is recommended to read Example of Pivoting first Apart from changing format from tall skinny to short wide pivoting can be used to create a more compact table Consider the following table based on a series of temperature measurements Cit
309. k a column name in the list to select it To select more than one column press Ctrl and click the column names in the list Then click Add gt gt to send the selected column to the Imported Columns field If you have a data set with many columns you can right click on the header of the columns in the Available columns list box and select Show Search Field from the pop up menu This will display a search field where you can type a search string and limit the number of items in the list It is possible to use the wildcard characters and in the search Moves selected columns from the Available SAS columns field to the Imported columns field Removes a column and brings it back to the Available SAS columns field Adds all columns from the Available SAS columns field to the Imported columns field Removes all columns from the Imported columns field and brings them back to the Available SAS columns field Moves the selected column up in the list Moves the selected column down in the list The pathname of the SAS data file 55 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 5 3 56 Map data to Spotfire compatible types Use Description as column name if available Allows you to map the data types to Spotfire compatible ones If this check box is cleared the SAS formatting will be unchanged Allows you to specify whether to use the SAS description as the column name once imported into DecisionSite If this
310. l 10 3 4 322 Finish gt To 1 2 Embedded Save the current data set in the Analysis Use this option when your data cannot be accessed by all users The Linked Load data from the data source option might be disabled This happens when it is impossible to maintain a link Click Finish to publish your Analysis When your Analysis is published the Publish Analysis to Library Analysis Published dialog is shown reach the Publish Analysis to Library Step 2 2 dialog Click File gt Publish Analysis to Library In the Publish Analysis to Library Step 1 2 select Library location enter a title and click Next gt Publish Analysis to Library Analysis Published As soon as you have saved your Analysis in the Library a dialog window will appear with a confirmation that your Analysis is published This dialog will also have a hyperlink to the Library folder containing the Analysis you just published which you can click on to view the final result Analysis Published xj Yield results has been published You can access the Analysis from this location in the DecisionSite Library Copy Link DecisionSite for Yield analysis gt Yield results 3 7 Send an email to notify users about the Analysis Send Email Help Option Description Link Click on the link to open the Library folder containing your published Analysis Copy Link Copies the link to the clipboard for later use Using the
311. l Decimals are treated as Doubles Older versions differentiate between 4 byte Reals and 8 byte Doubles Examples Accepted Interpreted as 6 84 6 84 6 843 6 843 see Integer description 6 843 6 843 6 843 27 6843 27 6 843 27 6843 27 6 843 27 6843 27 0 68 0 68 1E17 1E 017 1d17 1E 017 Not Accepted Interpreted as 6 843 27 Invalid 6 843 27 Invalid 6 843 27 Invalid Data Type Constraints in Current 32 Bit Operating Systems Int Integer 32 bits signed Maximum signed int value 2147483647 Minimum signed int value 2147483647 Double 64 bits Number of decimal digits of precision 15 That is the total number of digits not to be confused with number of digits after the decimal point Smallest such that 1 0 DBL_EPSILON 1 0 2 2204460492503131e 016 The minimum difference between numbers that are to be calculated as having different values Number of bits in mantissa 53 Loading Data Maximum value 1 797693 1348623 1e 308 Maximum decimal exponent 308 Maximum binary exponent 1024 Minimum positive value 2 22507385850720e 307 Minimum decimal exponent 307 Minimum binary exponent 1021 Exponent radix 2 Addition rounding near 1 Real In Spotfire DecisionSite 6 1 and later versions all Real are treated as Double For older versions see below Float 32 bits Number of decimal digits of precision 6 That is the total number of digits not to be confused with number of digits after the decimal point
312. l Recipes Software Preface 1 3 How to Contact Support If you have any questions about a TIBCO Spotfire product please do the following e Use the built in help function e Consult the README files which are included with the product e Visit the Spotfire web site http support spotfire com where you can send questions to our support department e Get personal contact from TIBCO Spotfire Support TIBCO Spotfire offers a variety of support agreements Contact TIBCO Spotfire for more information about support training consulting agreements and our Product Subscription Programs TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 2 Introduction 2 1 Spotfire DecisionSite Overview 2 1 1 The User Interface The image below shows the main parts of the TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite user interface The entire application window is referred to as Spotfire DecisionSite It is the core of the Spotfire DecisionSite solution which encompasses a suite of applications for database access statistical analysis data preprocessing and domain specific tasks thee GecisiemSite hor sery Ot ana De veba alo Die Git oon Maitin Qute Jook Gada Wieden tai 3 Ad s am t Oe see am B fo l BI xj Date Amatpsis D Pivot resuts Al Review HTS date D kep beced clustering D rue ot amp Query Device I sitters sts nets Window 1004 J Guides Pane l ere pe Ost j a az o o7 Visualiz
313. l in the layout section below the drop down list by clicking on it 2 Click on the _Bemove button to remove the visualization from the layout section The visualization will be placed in the Visualizations drop down list from where you can add it again later if you wish 10 4 6 2 Poster Query Devices You can include one or several query devices in your Poster If you choose to include several query devices you can sort them in any order you like It is recommended that you include only those query devices that are needed so as to keep the Poster simple and straightforward A query device that has been set to specific values in DecisionSite will keep these settings when the Poster is opened Note that the entire data set will still be transferred to the Poster so no data will be lost gt How to include query devices 1 Select the query device you want to add from the Query devices drop down list 2 Click on the query device in the layout section beneath which you want the new query device to be inserted 3 Click on the Add button to include the new query device Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each query device you want to include 5 Ifyou want to remove a query device select it from the list by clicking on it and then click on the Remove button or press the Delete key Tip Press Ctrl A to select all query devices or use Ctrl Click or Shift Click to select several query devices at once 6 Ifyou want to change the order of the
314. lates stored in the current SFS file Details on Demand External Browser as above but launches a separate browser Query Devices the window that contains all the query devices Legend the window that explains the significance of the current visualization settings e g which columns are used for size rotation color etc 171 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 9 6 3 4 9 6 4 4 9 6 5 172 Guides Toolbar the row of clickable buttons pertaining to the Guides pane Guides Pane the browser window used to view Guides and to run Spotfire DecisionSite applications plug ins Moving and Resizing Windows Spotfire DecisionSite has a certain default setup the Guides pane appears on the left while the larger area in the centre is for the visualization s The right side is occupied by the Query Device window and the Details on Demand window Since this may not be the most effective layout for all purposes it is possible to move and resize the windows To resize a window click on a window border and drag it to the desired position To move a window click on the title bar or gripper bar at the top of the window and drag the window to the desired position Alternatively press the left mouse key while pointing at the left or right edge there is a thin 3 pixel band to grab the window for repositioning a 4 Workbook Mode Workbook mode can be used to put each visualiz
315. ld Function New Function Description ADD SUM Now sums any number of arguments See also operator SUBTRACT Now only available as an operator See operator MULTIPLY PRODUCT Now multiplies any number of arguments See also operator DIVIDE Now only available as an operator See operator MOD MOD EXP POWER See also operator EXP Equivalent to POWER x 2 718281 SQRT SQRT ABS ABS LOG num base Now requires a base argument as well not 10 by default See function LOG1O below LOG LOG10 10 logarithm replaces old LOG x function LN LN Natural logarithm FLOOR FLOOR CEIL CEILING SIN SIN 237 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 238 COS TAN NEG PI constant E constant MAX MIN TOUPPERCASE TOLOWERCASE Operator Compatibility The old operators and their new counterparts are listed below Binary Old Operator Unary Old Operator Examples COS TAN No longer supported See unary operator PIO Now a function like in Excel No longer supported Use EXP 1 instead MAX MIN UPPER LOWER New Operator Description Adds numeric values See operator amp for string concatenation Subtract numeric values E Multiply numeric values Hl Divide numeric values No longer supported See function POWER amp Concatenate append strings or lists New Operator Description Negates the argument Here are some examples of how expressions would l
316. ld Wide Web is the ability to use links within or between documents Identifier Column The identifier column is the column that contains IDs for the records that are used in a certain calculation The IDs should be unique for all records in the data set see also Short Wide ISIS Integrated Scientific Information System from MDL ISIS Draw A desktop application from MDL used for creating and editing models of chemical structures Item Slider A query device with which to select a specific value in a range Jitter An option that displaces the visualization objects randomly in the display window to make overlapping records visible Lasso Function Enclosing a set of markers with the mouse pointer while pressing Shift on the keyboard This marks the records The resulting encircling can have any shape List A node in a portfolio where you can add records annotations and other lists glossary Marker One of the shapes representing a data record in a scatter plot The 3D shapes are also called glyphs Marked Record A marker in a scatter plot becomes marked when captured using the lasso or rectangle method left mouse button pressed while moving pointer Marked records are given a definable color to distinguish them from the rest of the data Menu Bar The row of commands visible at the upper border of a Windows program Clicking any of the menu titles will display sub menus with additional choices Menu Item
317. lect Guides gt Run from Library from the menu e To run a Guide from a file select Guides gt Run from File from the menu 284 Guides When you have started the Guide follow the instructions in the Guides pane You can go back in a Guide to a previous step by clicking on them in the flight view of the Guide TC 3 i il Contents gt Pivot results This guide will pivot your results to facilitate analysis for multiple protocols runs or batches The pivot operation will replace the current data with a new pivoted data set Select how you would like to pivot your data Analyze average results per Protocol Batch Run per Batch Run across Protocols Example of a Guide as seen when run in the Guides pane Creating Guides TIBCO Spotfire provides an application called Analysis Builder where you can create your own Guides or edit a Guide file without having to write a single line of code Analysis Builder is started by selecting Guides gt Create and Edit Guide from the menu 9 3 Guides Pane Options If you right click in the Guides pane a pop up menu appears Select Options to display the Guides Pane Options dialog Page viewed when starting DecisionSite By default the Guides pane displays a list of your available guides You can also select to show another web page as your start page To do this type in the URL of the custom start page in the Address field or click Browse This does not chan
318. lected markers by clicking on the corresponding button You can also choose whether or not to display deselected records in the table by selecting or clearing the check box Note Deselected records cannot be marked or made active in any way Even though it is possible to make them visible by selecting the Show deselected check box they are not included when marking a group of records Color Sort rows by You can sort the order of the rows in the table From the Properties dialog this can be done by up to three columns but if you wish to sort by more than three columns simply use the Shift click functionality In the Properties dialog first select a primary column to sort the rows 161 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 20 4 8 20 1 162 Row height Header height Frozen columns Grid by and select whether the order should be Ascending or Descending You may then select a secondary column to sort by and even a third if you so desire Note You can also sort the rows quickly by just clicking on the header of a column Clicking several times will toggle between ascending or descending order By holding down Shift and clicking on another column header you can sort by several columns This drop down list box lets you choose how high each row in the table should be Height is measured in number of lines It can be useful to increase the number of lines if there is a great deal of information in each ce
319. link to the clipboard for later use Using the link the Poster can easily be referenced in email discussions or from web 327 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual pages or portals Using the links retrieved with Copy Link Posters can be accessed from any web environment using the URL and name supplied Send Email Opens a dialog from which you can send an email with a link to the Poster Close Closes the notification dialog If you want to send an email notification click on the Send Email button This opens an email dialog where you may enter e To The email address of one or more recipients separated by comma or semicolon e From Your own email address mandatory e Subject The subject of the email e Comment Any additional text you wish to appear in the email new DecisionSite Poster Movie Analysis has been published to the DecisionSite Library Take a look and tell me what you think Click here to login to the full Spotfire Lenin nfornaton a q DecisionSite Poster Spotfire DecisionSite Poster Movie Analysis blade 2004 12 06 This Poster shows correlations between genres and other factors Genre Length Length 400 300 200 100 Action Fant Ro Wes Subject Example of Poster notification email gt To reach the Publish Poster to Library Wizard Poster Published dialog 1 Click File gt Publish Poster to Library 2 Design your DecisionSite Poster in Publish Po
320. ll as several lines makes the text wrap inside each cell This drop down list box lets you choose how high the headers in the table should be Height is measured in number of lines It can be useful to increase the number of lines if there is a great deal of information in each column header as several lines makes the text wrap inside each cell In a table with many columns you often need to scroll horizontally However sometimes you may want certain columns to always be displayed regardless of scrolling This is achieved by freezing one or more columns Place the columns you want to freeze to the far left of the table then use this drop down list box to specify the number of columns you want to freeze Select this check box to show grid lines in the table Table Columns Tab Table Columns Tab Edit gt Properties gt Table Columns tab Visualizations Properties Table x Annotations Columns Details Columns Table Columns Table Available columns Columns in table Name Type Recency Date Date joined Date First buy Date Number of purchases Integer Business location String Groceries Integer Garden Integer Furniture Integer Electronics Integer Toys Integer Receipt average Integer Integer Integer Age group Integer Add gt gt lt lt Remove Remove All Move First Move Up Move Down Move Last ERIE Kie Ej Option Description Available columns These columns are not include
321. ll formatted text files City Month Day Temp String String Integer Integer London May 5 14 ew York May 5 23 London May 10 16 ew York May 10 27 London May 15 20 ew York May 15 24 London November 5 7 ew York November 5 12 Location Day Temp London 5 14 ew York 5 23 London 10 16 29 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 3 5 2 3 3 5 3 3 3 5 4 30 ew York 10 27 London 15 11 ew York 15 29 London 20 13 ew York 20 20 Spotfire Text Data Format Specifications A Spotfire Text Data file imported into Spotfire DecisionSite consists of the following One line containing information about the format Two lines which explain how the file was generated One line containing the name of each column One declaration line describing the type of data in each column One line per data record Carriage return followed by Line feed end each row each column ends with a semicolon Note The type declarations and the column names are case sensitive The following is an example of a well formatted text file filetype Spotfire DataFormat Text version 1 0 City Month Day Temp String String Integer Integer London May 5 14 ew York May 5 23 London May 10 16 ew York May 10 27 London May 15 20 ew York May 15 24 London November 5 7 ew York November 5 12 Supported Formats The following standardized text file formats are supporte
322. ll get the value gt From Marked Yes and unmarked records the value No Records Note Found under the Data menu Resetting Visualizations After having zoomed in selected deselected and performed a number of manipulations on the markers pies and or bars the set of records shown in the visualizations may become disarrayed The command Reset to All in the Edit menu Ctrl R will get the visualization back in order again resetting the query devices and restoring zoomed visualizations Deleted records will be gone however and can only be restored by closing the visualization without saving it and then opening the original data set once again Copying Records These commands under the Edit menu copy the data stored in the loaded data set or a sub set of it to the clipboard The copied information can then be exported pasted into a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel or another program e g Notepad Copy Ctrl C copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format It also copies an image of the visualization to the clipboard which can be pasted into other applications by using a Paste Special option Copy Special gt Marked Records copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format Copy Special gt Selected Records copies on
323. lored either red or blue Values close to the median are easily distinguished Imports a color arrangement from a file Exports a color arrangement to a file This enables you to save a color arrangement and reuse it Returns you to the basic Categorical or Continuous or Heat Map Coloring dialog gt To change a color of the Values or Ranges 1 Click on the square of color that you want to modify 2 Select a color from the palette or click More colors to see the complete color palette gt To change the Marked Empty or Deselected color 1 Click the button of the color that you want to modify 2 Select a color from the palette or click More colors to see the complete color palette Visualizations 4 8 7 7 5 Color Expression Dialog Color Expression x Variables firstQuartile markedFirstQuartile markedM ax markedMedian markedMin martkedT hirdQuattile x max median min selectedFirstQuartile selectedMedian selectedMin selectedT hirdQuattile x Insert Variable Insert Function Expression Target type Help Option Variables Function category Function Function category All v Function Description Adds the two arguments Example 3 5 2 5 String Result c3 H9 N5 07 Recent expressions markedSum Insert OK Cancel hi Description Lists the available variables which can be used to create your expression Insert a variable
324. loring arrangement Type to enter a new name Preview Column Lists the columns from which you can add values to the Values list Values Displays the values in the chosen column Preview Column and the color for each value If a value has a defined categorical color this color will be used even if the value is also defined within a color range Add Adds a new item to the list of Values Using this you can assign specific colors to values and create your own coloring arrangement Add All Adds all available values from the selected Color by column to the Values list Delete Delete All Ranges Add Delete Delete All Other Color gt gt From palette gt Edit gt Fixed Deselected Marked Empty Templates gt gt Two color gradient for all Visualizations Removes a selected value Ctrl click to select multiple items for deletion Deletes all items in the Values list Shows the color of the empty records Empty refers to records that have at least one empty field These records are not shown at all in visualizations where an axis corresponds to the missing field Adds a new item to the list of Ranges Using this you can assign specific colors to values and create your own coloring arrangement Removes a selected value Ctrl click to select multiple items for deletion Deletes all items in the Ranges list Determines which color is used for markers that do not get a color from any other
325. ludes the Details on demand information in the printed document Selecting this option includes the legend in the printed document Selecting this option causes as much information as possible to fit onto one page and only prints that Selecting this option displays frames around the various includes sections This tab provides an option to include the visualization annotation Quick Reference 11 11 1 Quick Reference Menus gt Open Information Link Export gt 11 1 1 File Menu Option Hotkey Description Open Ctrl1 O Opens an existing document A browse dialog opens where you can search for files in various formats to open in Spotfire DecisionSite You can also enter a URL in the File name field and access data from a web server Apply Template Applies settings from an SFT or SFS file HTML templates for presenting Details on Demand will be imported from the external SFS file Save Ctrl S Saves the active document If the document has never been saved before this will open the same dialog as Save As Save As F12 Saves the document with another name in another format or in another location Close Closes the active document You will be prompted for saving changes Open from Library Opens an item from the DecisionSite Library A Library dialog opens where you can browse the Library for an Analysis Guide or Poster you want to open See Open From Library for more information Publish Analysis t
326. lumn and from the Set Property sub menu selecting the transformation desired Another way to change the scale is from the Columns tab of the Properties dialog by marking the column to rescale and selecting the transformation from the Set Scale pull down box 97 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 3 4 Properties Correlation x Trellis Axes 3D Markers Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Column Query device type Check boxes Radio buttons C Range slider Customer age Integer Total Integer Gender String Age group Integer C Item slider Recency Date Fulltext search Date joined Date First buy Date Number of purchases Integer M Show empty values Business location String x Groceries Integer Show Hide Garden Intener P 4 r Rename Column Annotation Format Scale x z Original Scale Indicators Lni i x Scale ee Log Scale V Show indicators in query devices g Exp10 Scale Inverse Scale Reverse Sorting The transformation can be removed and the scale reset to linear by choosing Original Scale Number Format You can specify how you want DecisionSite to display number formatting for integer and decimal columns You can set the number of decimal digits how to display negative numbers to display numbers using scientific notation select whether or not to use thousands separators and also add a c
327. ly the records within the limits set by the query devices to the Windows clipboard in text format Copy Special gt All Records copies all records to the Clipboard Data in all the records in the data set is copied to the Clipboard in text format Copy Special gt Visualization copies the active visualization display as a Windows Metafile image This image can be pasted into other Windows compatible applications such as MS Word Paint PowerPoint etc As Metafile images are vector based graphics they can be enlarged or shrunk at will without loosing detail Axes labels and grid lines are included in the image These images can be manipulated from within the new host applications Information About the Data Set The record meter in the status bar at the bottom of the Spotfire DecisionSite gives continuous information about visualization statistics You can see at a glance what portion of all the data is currently visible marked etc The same information is displayed as text 275 out of 379 records visible 72 56 117 marked 7 Selected Deselected Colors should be read as follows Green Records that are selected and marked Yellow Records that are selected and unmarked Gray Records that are selected but lack a value required for representation on the current axes and hence are invisible Visualizations The sum of the above makes up the set of selected records The length of the record meter in relation to t
328. m displacement Line connection You can choose which column to use for discriminating between lines Connect by and the order in which data points are connected within each line Order by The order can be set to any column to Row Number or to None The column on the X axis is used by default Selecting None turns line connection off 4 8 14 2 Line Charts Line Connection Edit gt Properties gt Markers tab You can choose which column to use for discriminating between lines Connect by and the order in which data points are connected within each line Order by The order can be set to any column to Row Number or to None The column on the X axis is used by default Selecting None turns line connection off Line connection works in a slightly different way for line charts compared to scatter plots In scatter plots points will be connected no matter how many intermediate points are deselected filtered out In a line chart you can control how you want to handle values that are missing or deselected 147 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual In the first chart no values are deselected In the second high values have been deselected and Break on deselected values has been turned on Broken lines then extend half way to the deselected value In the third chart high values have been deselected and Break on deselected values turned off 4 8 15 Profile Tab 4 8 15 1 Profile Tab Edit gt Pr
329. m version 7 x Line Chart Profile Chart Pie Chart Heat Map Table General Visualization Properties X and Y axis labels X and Y axis grid Visualization Annotations Marked Records Data Range Margins HTML Details on Demand Supported Comment Yes Note All available coloring options are not supported See 2D Scatter Plot Markers below for more information Needs to be converted to Bar Chart 8 x in DecisionSite Client Needs to be converted to Bar Chart 8 x in DecisionSite Client Heat maps using a mixture of color ranges and categorical values which became possible with DecisionSite Client 9 0 are not supported by DecisionSite Posters Change the coloring to a traditional continuous range prior to publishing the Poster if needed Labels will always appear in the Poster Horizontal or Vertical labels can be set but no other label settings will be transferred Only if the data set is embedded in the Poster Margins will not be transferred to the Poster but ToolTips are available on labels that are abbreviated You can create a custom Web Search when publishing the Poster Statistical Measures Show Deselected Trellis Zoom Query Devices Range Sliders Check Boxes Radio Buttons Item Slider Full Text Search Column Column Annotations Column Transformation Original Scale Log Scale Other Scale 2D Scatter Plot Properties X and Y axis Column Background Image Ba
330. m with the syntax of the expression Moving the mouse pointer over the field or clicking on it will display an explanation of what is wrong Pressing F5 will also display the error description Pressing F4 will move the cursor to the position in the expression where the error lies Redraw curve while typing If this check box is selected the curve will be drawn and updated in the plot while you edit the expression This is useful to verify that the curve actually looks like you intended but if you are using very large data sets and complex expressions for the curve it may be a good idea to turn it off in order to improve performance Curve Fit Curve Fit Curve fit regression analysis allows you to summarize a collection of sample data points by fitting them to a model that will describe the data and display a curve or a straight line on top of a scatter plot or a pie chart Unlike the Curve feature Curve Fit is not a fixed curve but rather a line that can be changed upon changing the input data during filtering or zooming Curve fitting can be used either to determine the parameter values of a known regression model or to find a model that fits the data better than other models Tip If a curve fit is active and the Legend is visible information about the curve fit will be displayed there Select View gt Legend to display it More information is also available via View Result see below Transformations The x and y values are un
331. mals to be shown on the axes Another feature of the Fixed option is that you may name a tick mark to display a string instead of the value like this 0 0 3 14 Pi 5 0 10 0 which would display the text Pi as a label instead of 3 14 The Show labels check box sets whether or not to display labels for the current axis The Horizontal or Vertical radio buttons sets whether the labels for the current axis should be displayed horizontally or vertically The Show grid lines check box sets whether or not to display grid lines for the current axis Edit gt Properties gt 3D tab 109 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 6 2 110 Annotations Trellis Properties Correlation x Data and Background Columns Details Columns Axes 3D Markers m Dimensions 2D Plot Recessessensonsee r Rendering V Lighting I Smooth shading Perspective Less More m Navigation MV Show axes J Show bounding box Quick navigation if more than 1000 visible records Reset Navigation Option Dimensions Rendering Perspective Navigation Description You can chose whether to display a 2D Scatter Plot or a 3D Scatter Plot by selecting the appropriate radio button A 3D visualization can be flattened into a 2D scatter plot or conversely a 2D plot can be made into one with 3D attributes In the latter case Spotfire DecisionSite will sugge
332. marked with the lasso or rectangle method 4 9 5 4 Highlighting Moving the mouse pointer close to or on top of a graphical object will highlight it A thin circle will cling to the marker until the pointer is moved a certain distance away a it Highlighted marker Highlighting shows where in each visualization a data point lies because the same record is highlighted in each visualization 4 9 5 5 Actions Involving the Marked Set The following commands concern the set of marked records They can all be found via the Edit menu or in the right click context menus of the visualizations Option Description Marked Record s gt Ctrl E Unmarks all records in the data set Unmark Marked Record s gt Ctrl I Inverts the marking so that all unmarked records become Invert marked and vice versa Marked Record s gt Ctrl M Sets query devices to include only the marked records This Select hides the unmarked records Marked Record s gt Shift Ctrl M Undoes the previous selection Undo Select Marked Record s gt Delete Removes corresponding records from the data set The action Delete is irreversible and immediately affects the loaded data set However 169 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 9 5 6 4 9 5 7 4 9 5 8 170 the data source e g the file will remain unchanged until you explicitly overwrite it by saving Data gt New Column Creates a new column By default marked records wi
333. me or TimeStamp values Example DateDiff Time col 1 Time col 2 Extracts the day from a Date or TimeStamp The result is of type Integer Example Day 2002 03 04 gt 4 Returns the number of days between two dates The arguments can be either of type Date or of type TimeStamp If the arguments are of type TimeStamp the time part is ignored The result is of type Integer Example Days 2002 03 04 2002 03 02 gt 2 Extracts the hour from a Time or TimeStamp The result is of type Integer Example Hour 1 1 38 02 gt 11 Extracts the millisecond part of a Time or TimeStamp The result is of type Integer Example Millisecond Time col Extracts the minute from a Time or TimeStamp The result is of type Integer Example Minute 11 38 02 gt 38 Extracts the month from a Date or TimeStamp The result is of type Integer Example Month 2002 03 04 gt 3 Extracts the second from a Time or TimeStamp The result is of type Integer Example Second 11 38 02 gt 2 Returns the number of seconds between two times The arguments can be either of type Time or of type TimeStamp The result is of type Integer Example Seconds 11 38 02 11 37 00 gt 62 Creates a Time The arguments are hours minutes and seconds and are of type Real The hours minutes and seconds must be valid 0 23 0 59 0 59 See also conversion functions Example Time 14 4 0 gt 14 04 00 233 TIBCO Spotfire Decision
334. merical characters literally Matches a new line Matches a form feed Matches carriage return Matches horizontal tab Matches vertical tab Matches Matches Matches Matches Matches Matches Matches Matches Matches Matches Matches Matches Character Classes Match any one character enclosed in the character set a e matches b in basketball xyz w W d s x x x y 5 5 Check Boxes Query Devices Match any one character not enclosed in the character set Aa e matches s in basketball Match any character except n Match any word character Equivalent to a zA Z_0 9 Match any non word character Equivalent to 4a zA Z_0 9 Match any digit Equivalent to 0 9 Match any non digit Equivalent to 0 9 Match any whitespace character Equivalent to t r n v f Match any non whitespace character Equivalent to t r n v f Repetition Match exactly x occurrences of a regular expression d 5 matches 5 digits Match x or more occurrences of a regular expression s 2 matches at least 2 space characters Matches x to y number of occurrences of a regular expression d 2 3 matches at least 2 but no more than 3 digits Match zero or one occurrences Equivalent to 0 1 a s b matches ab or a b Match zero or more occurrences Equivalent to 0 Match one or more occurrences Equivalent to
335. mn names are longer they will be shortened and if necessary supplied with a suffix number to be distinguished from other columns with the same name e All column names will be converted to lower case since some computation servers do not make any difference between upper and lower case characters The translation is initiated by each connector separately Any columns that are sent to a server as input parameters will be translated provided they contain any of the forbidden characters When the columns are returned from the server as output parameters they will receive their original names again if applicable The translated column names will be used during the whole computation server session Tip If you are interested in seeing what the actual column name used in the computation looked like you can retrieve this information from the Execution Log 8 2 3 User Interface 8 2 3 1 Computation Services User Interface Overview This is the Computation Services user interface 263 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Spotfire Computation Services for R x Fie Execute Help Script dataout lt x datain Input Parameters Output Parameters Result Handling Execution Log Prompt dialog title Prompt dialog description Add Integer to Columns This is an example R script calculation which adds the integer provided below to al Parameter name Data type Value Integer Prompt Integer z m A
336. n You can also choose to normalize the character case so the data is imported non case sensitively 3 Optionally save all settings for data source and or data conditioning as a favorite This will allow you to reuse the same data without having to configure data source and data conditioning each time The details of each of these steps vary depending on which type of data source or data conditioning method is chosen A sequence of dialogs will guide you through the required interaction in each case For example accessing a database involves setting parameters that are not required when working with a text file The following sections will deal with each of the three steps above describing in detail the different cases that may arise 3 3 2 Data Sources 3 3 2 1 Selecting a Data Source The first step in the Import Data dialog to specify a data source A data source can be one of the following e 6A file e The clipboard e A database e The Spotfire Text Data Format e A data source defined in a previous data import session a so called Favorite gt To select a data source 1 Select File gt Import gt Import Data 19 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual fi Import Data Select Data Source x Select a data source Common g File Database via ODBC Clipboard Advanced fu SAS Data File Database via OLEDB fa My personal files E Spotfire Text Data Format mH SDFile
337. n Moves the selected input parameter down one step The position defines the order in the prompt dialog 8 2 3 5 Output Parameters Tab Input Parameters Output Parameters Result Handling Execution Log Parameter name Data type add Remove Option Description Parameter name A string matching a parameter in the script If you have selected a 267 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 2 3 6 268 Data type Add Remove parameter in the Script field and then clicked on the Add as Output Parameter button i gt the parameter name is already set to the selected text If no parameter was selected before you clicked Add a default parameter is added and you can edit the parameter name in the text box Note Make sure you type a correct parameter name The allowed parameter names differ for the various scripting languages Select the data type of the parameter from the drop down list Adds the text selected in the Script field as an output parameter Same functionality as the Add as Output Parameter button on the toolbar Removes the selected output parameter Result Handling Tab Input Parameters Output Parameters Result Handling Execution Log Result handler Add to Current Data Set Row by Row output dataout by input datain Add Remove Settings Option Result Handler Add Remove Settings Description Displays all result handlers currently in
338. n a numbered list where the action first performed is number 1 Displays the Prompt for dialog if the selected action is a visualization or the Tool Option dialog if the selected action is a tool Adds an action with the title Close all visualizations to the top of the list of actions in this dialog This means that all visualizations that were open when the end user of the Guide clicked on this link will be closed This can be used to prevent the desktop from being cluttered with visualizations Select this check box if you do not want to see this dialog automatically upon adding new links To display it again select Edit gt Show Add Link Dialogs Guides gt To reach the Link Properties dialog The Link Properties dialog is automatically displayed when a new link is added to the Guide in Analysis Builder If the check box Don t show this dialog again has been selected earlier the dialog for a specific link can be displayed by double clicking the link in the Guide contents list 9 5 3 6 Prompt for Dialog The Prompt for dialog is specific to each visualization in a link If you have selected a scatter plot as in the example below the dialog will be called Prompt for Scatter Plot or whatever the title of the visualization is and the column names of the selected axes This dialog allows you to decide for which properties the end user of the Guide should provide input Note Only properties that you have used in your c
339. n from Marked Records dialog where you can add a new column showing whether records are included in the marked group or not Creates a new list with the marked records to the Portfolio The list is placed as the last item on root level Adds the marked records from the visualization into your currently active Portfolio list Opens the Properties dialog to the Annotations tab where you can provide the visualization with a description of your choice Copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format It also copies an image of the visualization to the clipboard which can be pasted into other applications by using a Paste Special option Creates a duplicate of the selected visualization Opens the Properties dialog n which parameters governing the appearance of the visualization can be set annotations made etc Description Resets the zoom bars to the original state no zooming Opens the Properties dialog to the Trellis tab where you can split the visualization to display different subsets of your data Deletes the set of marked records The marked records are removed from the data set in Spotfire DecisionSite s memory This operation cannot be undone but does not affect the original data unless that file is intentionally overwritten with the diminished data Resets the set of marked records No records will be marke
340. n guides Properties for visualizations Guide properties in Analysis Builder hyperlink properties in Analysis Builder link properties in Analysis Builder quick access scatter plot color shape and rotation text properties in Analysis Builder Publish Analysis to Library Guide to Library Poster to Library Q Query devices changing type check boxes descriptions e 193 entering a value 294 305 306 307 323 324 325 326 355 309 357 76 337 330 329 331 339 338 38 346 11 302 297 298 193 113 115 296 321 310 327 188 187 180 192 full text search hiding indicators initial selection item sliders moving pop up menu radio buttons range sliders regular expressions sorting types Quick navigation Quick reference for Analysis Builder for Computation Services R R statistical computing Computation Services overview connection to an R server example configuration Radio button query devices Range sliders adjusting span entering values Real Record meter Records activating copying highlighting marking status bar unmarking Reference line adding in a bar chart dialog Regular expressions introduction symbols Remember me Removing web link Rendering Replace Current Data Set dialog Report export as web page export to PowerPoint export to Word printing Requirements hardware software Reserved words Reset zooming Resetting 3D navigation Index
341. n the profile chart Select a column from the right list and press the lt lt Remove button to move it back to the available columns list and remove it from the profile chart Removes all columns from the right list and moves them to the available columns list Select a column from the right list and press the Move First button to move it to the top This changes the order the lines of the profile chart are displayed Visualizations Move Up Select a column from the right list and press the Move Up button to move it a step up This changes the order the lines of the profile chart are displayed Move Down Select a column from the right list and press the Move Down button to move it a step down This changes the order the lines of the profile chart are displayed Move Last Select a column from the right list and press the Move Last button to move it to the bottom This changes the order the lines of the profile chart are displayed 4 8 17 Heat Map Tab 4 8 17 1 Heat Map Tab Edit gt Properties gt Heat Map tab Properties Heat Map x Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Trellis Heat Map Columns Heat Map Column colors Row labels Column Color range By None Customer Default Total Default Location Left Age group Default Right Number Default Groceries Default Garden Default i Furniture Default Special colors Electronics Default Marked E N Default
342. n time filter with structure search 1 Open an information link that contains columns with structure search run time filters Response The system will begin to retrieve data For each column with run time filter the Set Filter for Column Dialog will appear asking you to specify the filter conditions for this column Select Substructure or Similarity depending on the type of search you want to perform Click Edit Structure Response ISIS Draw is launched Draw a structure to use as search template Comment See ISIS Draw documentation for more information on how to edit structures When you are done drawing the structure click the button in ISIS Draw Response ISIS Draw is closed and the structure appears in the Set Filter for Column dialog Click Next gt or Finish if this is the last prompted column Response The data is retrieved If this is the last run time filter then the data is displayed in a visualization 3 4 2 5 Run time Filter Example Information links may include more than one column with run time filters which prompt you for input during retrieval In this case each filter will reduce the data set such that subsequent prompts may present fewer values Consider the following example This is the data as it would look if no filters were being applied Name Salary Location Prompt None Range Check Boxes Miller 1300 New York King 1400 New York Clark 700 New York Ford 1100 Dallas Adams 900 D
343. nSite Edit gt Properties in main application 299 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 5 3 7 300 Add a link that creates one or more visualizations to the Guide 3 Inthe Link Properties dialog of the desired link click to select the visualization that you want to add prompting for 4 Click Prompts Settings for Dialog The Settings for dialog is displayed when running a Guide that includes prompted steps It is specific to each visualization in a link If you have selected a heat map the dialog will be called Settings for Heat Map This dialog allows the end user of a Guide to select to certain properties for a specific visualization at run time of the Guide Only the properties specified by the creator of the Guide will be available Settings for Heat Map xi Available Columns Columns Signal For 18_1year_3 txt 5 Months Average Z Detection for 516_lyear_1 t 1 Year Average Z Sco Detection for 517_lyear_2 t 4 Weeks Average 25 Detection for 518_lyear_3 t 1 Week Average Z Sc Detection p value for 516_15 Neonatal Average 2 Detection p value for 517_15 Embryonic Average Z Detection p value for 518_15 FileName For S16_lyear_1 b FileName for S17_1year_2 t gt FileName For S18_lyear_3 b w Order By Hierarchical Clustering order M Help OK Cancel This dialog varies depending on both the type of visualization and the selections that
344. nalysis General DecisionSite Additional content for General DecisionSite analysis 3 2 2 Open from Library This dialog lets you select and open an item in the Library Each item type Analysis Guide or Poster opens in different ways e Analysis opens in the DecisionSite Client as a regular Analysis stored in a Spotfire Analysis File The Analysis consists of your data visualizations annotations and everything else you use to explore your data e Guide opens in the Guides pane where the Guide is run Guides are captured analyzes made by you or your colleagues for repetitive analysis flows e Poster opens in a separate Microsoft Internet Explorer where the Poster is displayed Posters are web based snap shots of your Analysis designed for easy sharing and collaboration To locate the item either look in a Library Section s content on the Library tab or search for it on the Search tab Navigate in the Library by using double click on Library Sections and folders 16 Loading Data Open from Library x Library Search Home gt DecisionSite for Functional Genomics Type Title Description ka 3j Advanced microarray Guide Example This Guide uses a number Ez Microarray analysis results Example This Poster displays some B Microarray Guide Example This Guide shows how visu 9 Microarray of yeast Example Yeast microarray data Use 9 Principal component analysis Example Do a principal component a
345. name and location that you specify Open from Opens the Open from Library dialog This opens a Guide from the Library Library Publish to Library Opens the Publish to Library Wizard Publishes the current Guide to the Library for sharing Run Launches the current Guide in the Guides pane It is not necessary to save the Guide prior to using this command in Analysis Builder Therefore it is useful for iterative testing of the design of the Guide Note If you are testing Guide steps that include opening a data set you will clear the current Actions in DecisionSite list Make sure that you have added all steps of your current analysis to the Guide before you test the parts of the Guide that involve switching data sets Properties Opens the Guide Properties dialog Exit Closes Analysis Builder If the current Guide has been modified you will be prompted to save the Guide 9 5 3 12 2 Analysis Builder Edit Menu The Edit menu contains commands used when working with Guide files Option Description Move Up Moves the currently selected text comment link or Page Break in the Guide contents list up one step Move Down Moves the currently selected text comment link or Page Break in the Guide contents list down one step Delete Deletes the selected text comment link or Page Break from the Guide contents list You can also press Delete on your keyboard to perform the same function Text Properties Displays the Text Properties
346. nd identifiers generated by this tool See Structure Viewer Overview Launches the Structures in Table tool which allows you to incorporate structure images from an ISIS database into a table visualization See Displaying Structures in a Table Visualization Launches the Structure Search tool which provides several search algorithms which retrieve molecules with similarities to the master structure See Searching for Compounds Using Structure Search Launches the R group Search tool which helps you to perform searches for molecules with specified or unspecified R groups Note You need to have ISIS Draw installed on your computer to reach this tool See Performing an R group Search Launches the List Search tool which allows you to search for structures using a list or compound identifiers See Using List Search Launches the Add ISIS Keys tool which allows you to import keys from an ISIS database this information is added to the data set as a new column See Adding Structure Keys Launches the ISIS Connection tool where you can connect to a local or remote Integrated Scientific Information System ISIS database See ISIS Connection Overview Launches a dialog where you can view and edit rules regarding which structure editor and renderer you prefer to use in your structure analytics tools See Advanced Preferences Enables you to send a query to an external web site to search for information about marked records See Web Links
347. ne of the dialog The right pane displays detailed information about the used equations and parameters of the selected curve See Curve Fit Theory and Curve Fit Models for more information about the various parameters gt To reach the Curve Fit Result dialog Right click in the scatter plot or pie chart where you have applied a curve fit and select View Curve Fit Result from the pop up menu Tip You can also reach this dialog from the Curve Fit dialog e g if you are testing several different curves using the Apply button In the Curve Fit dialog click on the View Result button to display the results Curve Fit Models There are several different models available for curve fitting See Curve Fit for information about how to apply the various curves The Curve Fit models below can be used when there is no randomness for the markers along the X axis Straight Line The straight line fit is calculated by choosing the line that minimizes the least square sum of the vertical distance d of all the selected markers see picture below by using the following equation y ax b where a is the slope and b is the intercept Visualizations For example you could plot days along the X axis and have one marker for each day The distance between the markers along the X axis is the same thus making straight line fit appropriate Logarithmic The logarithmic fit calculates the least squares fit through points by using the following equati
348. ne of the formats recognized by Spotfire DecisionSite Resets all query devices and zoom bars to show all records Color size marking and other properties are unaffected Marks all visible selected records Records not selected by the current query device settings are not marked Resets the set of marked records Unmarks all marked records Inverts the set of marked records Marks all unmarked records and unmarks the set of marked records Sets the selection to the marked records Creates a temporary filter so that only the marked records are visible Undoes all record selections without resetting the query devices Deletes the set of marked records The marked records are removed from the data set in 349 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 11 1 3 11 1 4 350 Properties View Menu Ctrl Enter OR Alt Enter Spotfire DecisionSite s memory This operation cannot be undone but does not affect the original data unless that file is intentionally overwritten with the diminished data Set document properties The Properties dialog opens in which parameters governing the appearance of the visualization can be set annotations made etc Checkmarks in front of the options indicate that they are active selection toggles this status Option Toolbars Status Bar Workbook Full Screen Details on Demand Text Details on Demand HTML Details on Demand External Browser Query De
349. ne should be calculated based on all records in the data set regardless of any filtering done with the query devices or whether the calculation should be based on the selected records so that filtering with the query devices will affect the result Specifies whether the orthogonal straight line fit displayed in each trellis panel will be calculated based on only the records specific to that trellis panel or if the fit will be based on all records regardless of trellis condition and therefore be the same for every trellis panel The color of the displayed line The width in pixels of the displayed line 4 8 2 5 5 Visualizations Results If Orthogonal Straight line fit is active and the Legend is visible information about Statistical measures will be displayed there The correlation value R which is displayed is the standard Pearson s correlation and is calculated like this Dl Do yay FY Dy PY J Note The Legend will not display the R value if you have several Trellis panels Curve The Curve feature allows you to specify a curve to be displayed on top of a scatter plot or pie chart given that you have specified X and Y axes in the pie charts You simply enter an expression where the curve is defined as y as a function of x and it will be drawn on top of the plot To aid you in creating powerful expressions you can use the Spotfire Expression Language SXL All the functions of SXL can be selected and inserted from t
350. negativity This will cause the markers to be colored according to their electronegative potential The elements with the lowest values will be red and the highest blue You may alter these colors with a dialog box that opens under Customize 11 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 2 3 6 12 Pronerties Gcatter Plot Continous coloring mode x mize Cust By C Fixed Continuous Categorical d Background Columns Trellis Axes 3D Markers Size Kili Max By None J Show deselected Drawing euder Size slider By None Customize inter None This column determines how Click he alter colors C Marked records Allrecords max 20 4 labels Rotate markers are colored By None bd m Line connection By None v Order None he Arrows indicating direction Querying the Data Set To select a subset of markers to display in the visualizations change the settings of the query device sliders found in the area to the right For example using the Periodic Table data set move the left drag box of the Jonization Energy slider as shown in the image below to select only those elements with high ionization energies We can now see that the elements with high ionization energy are more or less the same as those with high Electronegativity since there are few markers with color
351. ng column separators when reopening the file If you must save the data embedded within the file you can prevent the problem by saving the data as a TXT SKV or CSV file and opening it with the import agent Column names should never contain characters that can be interpreted as column separators The saved link includes the file name if the data was imported from a text file or the ODBC data source name and the SQL query used if the data was retrieved from a database using ODBC The way the data was saved has some implications on how the Analysis can be used and how it will behave e Ifthe data itself is saved in the Analysis the session becomes static In other words if the source for the data is updated the Analysis will still show the old data If only a link to the data was saved the Analysis reflects all changes made to the data source each time the file is opened e Ifthe Analysis is to be distributed the recipients must have access to the data source to be able to link to the data Static report files containing the actual data create no distribution problems e A static SFS file is considerably larger than a dynamic SFS file since the latter only contains a link to the data Saving and Exporting Data 10 2 Spotfire Files 10 2 1 SFS Files All information and settings in a Spotfire DecisionSite session can be saved as a Spotfire Analysis File This file has the file extension sfs and contains information such as e Current s
352. ng this action in a link will set all query devices and also the selected properties of the Columns tab to the current state This means that you can apply log scale show or hide empty values specify query device types and filter on specific columns without having to add a new 291 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 5 2 6 9 5 2 7 292 visualization This way you can create several links in the Guide that update your visualizations thus creating a bookmark kind of function Note If the data set that the end user of a Guide is using differs from the one that you were using while creating the Guide there might be occasions when the query device settings will not be applicable Tools In the current version of Analysis Builder settings are not always saved with the tools The various tool links will in some cases open the tool to the end users of the Guide but they will have to make the calculation selections and click OK in the tool dialog for themselves If you want the end users to use some specific settings in one of those tools you should state this information as text in the Guide A number of tools e g the New Column from Expression tool can be run silently without input from the end user When a link is added to such a tool you can set the Tool Option to specify whether you want the link to run the tool using the settings that you specified in the current analysis or if you want to display the di
353. nimum number The minimum number of columns that you want to use as input for the of columns selected parameter Maximum number The maximum number of columns that you want to use as input for the of columns selected parameter Resulting prompt for the example above Select a column containing heights Available columns Selected columns lt lt Remove Move Up Move Down Records selection fall X The end user of the configuration will be presented with a column selector with all columns of the specified data type in the Available columns field The end user will also have the possibility to choose whether to work on All records Marked records or Selected records by choosing the appropriate option from the Records selection drop down list 271 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 2 3 8 4 8 2 3 8 5 272 Tip If there are too many columns to choose from in the Available columns list it is possible to right click on the Name header and select Show search field from the pop up menu Then any search string can be used to limit the number of available columns Prompt Settings File Dialog Use this type of prompt when you want user input in the form of a file Note If the resulting file is to be processed via one of the predefined Open Edit or Print options in the Launch File Dialog the output parameter name used must end with the desired file extension example outfile txt See Launch File
354. nique combination of values in the chosen columns 4 Inthe Values list select one or more columns Comment The column selected under Values is the column from which the data is pulled It is possible to select more than one Value column The values in the generated table are always computed as the average of values in the original table unless the original values are strings If so values in the generated table will consist of concatenated strings To change the way the values are calculated right click on the Method and select a different method from the list or use Ctrl click to select multiple methods 5 Inthe Other Columns list select one or more columns Comment This option allows you to include an overall average of a particular measurement for each row in the generated table For each column selected here one new column will be created in the new table To change the way the measurements are calculated right click on the Method and select a different method from the list or use Ctrl click to select multiple methods 6 Click OK 7 5 2 2 Example of Pivoting Pivoting a data set means changing it from a tall skinny format to a short wide format Consider the following tall skinny table based on a series of temperature measurements City Month Temp London February 4 New York February 6 London May 16 New York May 19 239 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 5 2 3 240 London August 28 New Yor
355. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 316 OT USAVING SES TINGS en a a A A AA AA T 316 10 2 lt Spotfire File Saipe eae a a E e A teks Savin EE E aE a RLE aoa 317 10 3 Publish Analysis to LiDrary oinaan e e a a e a a a a Aa 319 104 Publish P ster to LIDrary nesnenin a ie r a ERREA ENEE A ERRARE TATTA 323 10 5 Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation 2 0 0 2 ccecccceccececeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesecanaeceeeeeeeseccneaeeeeeeeeeeseesenenaees 338 10 6 Microsoft Word Presentation ccccccccceececcececeeeeeeseccncaeceeeeeeecensaeaeeeeeeeeeeseccasaeeeeeeeseseeciaeeseees 340 10 4 Exportias Web Paget canckuneiet ches Ain A ee ee ace i ha 341 10 8 Exporting Details on DeMman eee eeneeeeenne eee Rai a E AERA AREE 342 10 9 Export Current Visualization ccccccccccececeeceeceeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeescaaaeceeeeeeeseccaeaeeeeeeesesensiaeeeeress 343 10 10 Export Database Queries eet a e ease eset Ea E dA E a aa a Aaaa nent eater 343 10 11 Export Legend Mage 08 AhedAincini ce a Ah Shee a a ein 344 10 12 Export D l raea e daadsstarteh ag dase eaa cersna ted bandatin ta aditaa sds ata tedvaavun duds a a a auieas ce 345 10 13 PMID esaa ects lettin Sivek Biches AAEE EE acted ellis Steel eenee tadhit deen Made Mdietade 346 11 QUIGK REFERENCE sisisccccsscs tcc ntasn tte stare hcaaanehdpstacehca ninian a a aaan ataandaa aranana akai 347 11 1 MONU S a a aa a a a Te tt aie lane crreds 347 11 2 Query Device Pop Up Menu cccccccccece
356. nnotation by Name or by Type Note Sorting by Type means the type of Query Device not the type of the column itself Integer String etc 5 10 Hiding a Query Device Right click on the query device to be hidden From the Move sub menu of the pop up menu that appears choose Hide Or deselect Show Query Device in the Columns tab of the Properties dialog while having the correct column marked A hidden query device can only be brought back by reselecting the Show Query Device option in the Columns tab 191 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Query Devices PlatelD A Check Boxes Radio Buttons Range Slider Item Slider E Full Text Search one A All E Data Range gt PI y Show Empty Values 2 v Show Full Name eon gt Pe A TotheTop 0 New Column gt Up F Set Property gt Down Edit Annotation To the Bottom Column Value PlatelD 41 Daaihan cin To hide the Query devices window altogether either clear the check mark next to Query devices in the View menu or click on the small X beside the parallel bars at the edge of the window Query Devices x PlatelD ial 5 11 Entering a Value for a Slider A minimum or maximum value can be typed into a range slider item slider or the full text search slider There are two ways of doing this gt To enter a minimum value 1 Double click on the number above the left drag box 2 Type the desired minimum value an
357. ns 4 9 1 Changing Visualization Axes To change the column to be mapped to each axis click on an axis selector and select a column name For example to see the Mendeleevian layout of the peroidic csv example data set select P1 for the X axis and P2 for the Y axis R D ra Type to search P1 Integer P2 Integer Element String Atomic Number Integer Atomic Mass Integer Atomic Radius Integer lonic Radius Integer lonization Energy Integer Electronegativity Integer ig Integer C2 Integer Note You can also select which column to use as an X Y or Z axis by right clicking on the Query Device representing that column and selecting Set Property gt Axis from the pop up menu 4 9 2 Zooming and Panning Zooming can be done in two ways by using the zoom bars or by using the mouse Mouse Shortcuts 2D Scatter Plots Bar Charts Pie Charts Line Charts Profile Charts and Heat Maps Action Mouse maneuver Comment Zoom in Ctrl Right click The scroll wheel has the same function Zoom out Ctrl Shift Right click In 3D Scatter Plots the zoom bars are used as in 2D Additionally the following means of navigation are available Action Mouse Mouse Pointer Comment action 1 action 2 icon Rotate Ctrl drag using Drag using the H Rotation is around the right mouse middle mouse aa the visualization button button center 164 Visualizations Zoom Shift drag using Shift drag using amp Moves in the the right mous
358. nteraction It has a series of built in heuristics and algorithms that helps you find interesting alternative views of data Spotfire DecisionSite allows you to share your work Analyses can be easily presented as structured reports for printing or Internet publishing 1 2 Third Party Components 1 2 1 SharpZipLib 0 8 4 from IC Code License The library is released under the GPL with the following exception Linking this library statically or dynamically with other modules is making a combined work based on this library Thus the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License cover the whole combination As a special exception the copyright holders of this library give you permission to link this library with independent modules to produce an executable regardless of the license terms of these independent modules and to copy and distribute the resulting executable under terms of your choice provided that you also meet for each linked independent module the terms and conditions of the license of that module An independent module is a module which is not derived from or based on this library If you modify this library you may extend this exception to your version of the library but you are not obligated to do so If you do not wish to do so delete this exception statement from your version Note The exception is changed to reflect the latest GNU Classpath exception Older versions of ziplib did have another exception but the new one
359. nto other applications by using a Paste Special option Creates a duplicate of the selected visualization Opens the Properties dialog n which parameters governing the appearance of the visualization can be set annotations made etc Description Resets the zoom bars to the original state no zooming Opens the Properties dialog to the Trellis tab where you can split the visualization to display different subsets of your data Deletes the set of marked records The marked records are removed from the data set in Spotfire DecisionSite s memory This operation cannot be undone but does not affect the original data unless that file is intentionally overwritten with the diminished data Resets the set of marked records No records will 359 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 360 gt Invert Ctrl I gt Select Ctrl M gt New Column gt Create New Portfolio List gt Add to Portfolio List Annotate Copy Ctrl C Duplicate Visualization Properties Alt Enter Line charts Option Hotkey Zoom gt gt Reset Zooming Trellis Marked Record s gt gt Delete Del gt Unmark Ctrl E be marked after you have executed this operation Inverts the set of marked records Marks all unmarked records and unmarks the set of marked records Sets the selection to the marked records Creates a temporary filter so that only the marked records are visible Opens the New Colum
360. ny combination of characters using Boolean logic Select none of the records with values in this column Select all records with values in this column Select all records with values in this column Changes the data range to span only the selected records Three small dots are displayed at the end of the slider to indicate that the current data range is not the full range Resets the data range to its original full width Display records even though values are empty null The query device is given another row with the entire name of the column Sorts the order of the Query Devices Resets the original order Sorts alphabetically by Annotation Sorts alphabetically by Name Sorts by type of Query Device Moves the query device Moves the query device to the top of the window Moves the query device up one position in the window Moves the query device down one position in the window Moves the query device to the bottom of the window Makes the query device invisible Selecting the Show Query Device option on the Columns tab of the Properties dialog box makes the device visible again Create a new column by binning a dialog box allows you to choose column to be binned and then a wizard Guides you through the binning process Create a new column from mathematically operations on data a wizard guides through the construction of the expression Create a new column Each record is given a value indicating whether it
361. o Publishes the current Analysis to the Library A Library dialog opens in which you specify details on how to publish See Publishing Analyses to Library for more information Publish Poster to Publishes a DecisionSite Poster to the Library A Library dialog opens that allows you to design your Poster See Publishing Posters to Library for more information Import gt gt Import Data Ctrl D This allows you to import data in any supported format ODBC text files clipboard etc and to apply data conditioning See Importing Data for more information Launches the Information Library where you can open information links and retrieve the data To access the online help for this application you must first start the application by selecting it from the menu 347 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 348 gt Details on Demand HTML gt Current Visualization gt SQL Query gt Legend gt Data gt Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation gt Microsoft Word Presentation gt Web Page Print Layout Options Print Preview Print Ctrl P Switch DecisionSite gt Login to DecisionSite gt gt Log Out gt Log into Server gt Change Password gt Unlock New License Most recent files Exit Exports information about marked or active objects as text Exports the current visualization An image of the currently active visualization
362. o open the Library folder containing your published Guide Copy Link Copies the link to the clipboard for later use Using the link the Guide can easily be referenced in email discussions or from web pages or portals Using the links retrieved with Copy Link Guides can be accessed from any web environment using the URL and name supplied Send Email Launches a new email with your default email client Close Closes the notification dialog If you want to send an email notification click on the Send Email button This opens an email dialog where you may enter e To The email address of one or more recipients separated by comma or semicolon e From Your own email address mandatory e Subject The subject of the email e Comment Any additional text you wish to appear in the email gt To reach the Publish Guide to Library Wizard Guide Published dialog 1 Select Guides gt Publish to Library from the menu 314 Guides Select which type of Guide you want to publish in Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 1 3 and click Next gt Specify the location in the Library in Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 2 3 and click Next gt Edit the Guide properties in Publish Guide to Library Wizard Step 3 3 and click Finish 315 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 10 Saving and Exporting Data 10 1 316 Saving SFS files Save your Analysis by selecting Save As in the File menu Make sure tha
363. ocation in the Expression field the function will be inserted there If you have many columns you can use the scrollbar to find them or click on any function and type in the first few letters of the desired function name to jump to it Description This field provides a brief description of the selected function For more detailed descriptions please see Spotfire Expression Language SXL Expression This is the text field in which you build your expression You can insert columns and functions to it from the lists or enter text as in any standard text editor Cut Copy Paste works in the field using standard Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Highlighting a section of the expression and inserting a new function will cause that function to encompass the highlighted section within parenthesis Also Undo Redo functionality is available by pressing Ctrl Z Ctrl Y respectively Recent expressions This list contains the twenty most recent expressions you have created You can select one of these and click the Insert button to insert the expression into the Expression field This will not replace the entire content of the field only insert the selected expression at the cursor position Sample result This field displays the result of applying the current expression to the first row of the data set If this field shows an error message there is a problem with the expression Moving the mouse pointer over the field or clicking on it will display an e
364. olor style and line width of the reference line Allows you to change the transparency of the reference line A completely solid line is obtained by moving the thumb to the far right Determines whether the line should be placed in the Foreground or in the Background of the bars Select this check box to show a label for the reference line Clear the check box to remove the label You can type a label text directly in the text field or you can use one of the available templates see below Displays a drop down menu from where you can select a template for how the label should be presented Choose from Value which simply shows the x axis value of the reference line Expression which shows the expression e g median 150 Expression Value e g median 150 328 or Display Name which shows the name of the reference line as it is presented in the legend e g Vertical reference line x median 150 Click this radio button for a horizontal label Click this radio button for a vertical label Select this check box to adjust the data range so that the reference line becomes visible even if it is outside the data range for the current data set gt To reach the Reference Line dialog 1 Create a bar chart with a continuous column on the X axis 2 Select Edit gt Properties 3 Go to the Data and Background tab 4 Click on Add and select Vertical Reference Line from the drop down menu 93 TIBCO Spotfire Decision
365. olumns dialog Select Source dialog 376 113 73 108 109 73 108 167 113 58 115 117 166 118 112 97 115 112 164 111 113 110 117 166 118 111 164 110 109 112 115 112 164 109 203 204 253 205 290 291 294 169 211 203 204 207 203 210 208 207 using advanced data import 205 Add to Current Data Set Automatic Key Matching dialog 275 Add to Current Data Set Row by Row dialog 276 Adding background image MapInfo background files server upon logging in Adding items to a Guide how the Actions list works links to actions in DecisionSite Adding new columns by binning from an expression using the Add Columns tool Adjusting slider span Advanced options Aggregation example of depivoting example of pivoting pivoting and aggregation Short Wide gt Tall Skinny Tall Skinny gt Short Wide Algorithm view tip Analysis Builder deploying guides how the Actions list works menus overview properties included with links quick reference running guides locally toolbar user interface workflow Annotations in Transpose Data on columns on visualizations Tab in Properties dialog Anomalies Appearance of Line charts Append Axes name Application files Applying templates Arranging visualizations Auto fit to page on printing hide axis selectors tile 75 76 8 290 290 215 219 203 181 176 243 240 243 24 241 307 308 309 248 252 14
366. olumns field Removes a column from the Value columns field gt To reach the Transpose Data wizard Select Data gt Transpose Data 251 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 7 3 3 Transpose Data Wizard Step 3 E Transpose Data step 3 of 3 i xj Available columns Day Temperature Wind gt Annotation columns setting Annotation columns 2 Humidity i Add gt gt Remove Help Option Available columns Annotation columns Add gt gt lt lt Remove lt Back Finish Cancel Description The columns available for annotation The columns selected for annotation Moves a column to the Annotation columns field Removes a column from the Annotation columns field gt To reach the Transpose Data wizard Select Data gt Transpose Data 252 8 Tools Tools 8 1 Web Links 8 1 1 Web Links Overview The Web Links tool enables you to send a query to an external web site to search for information about marked records The search results are displayed in a separate web browser The Web Links tool is shipped with a number of predefined web sites that are ready to use You can also set up new links to web sites of your choice 8 1 2 Using Web Links 8 1 2 1 Sending a Query Using Web Links Note You need to have data in Spotfire DecisionSite to be able to send a query The query is sent for the marked records in the visualizations If
367. omalies Use View Tip to browse through different combinations of axes The anomalies should be scrutinized to determine if they are due to erroneous data 2 Write down particularly interesting combinations of axes or save the settings so that you can retrieve interesting visualizations later 3 Color the visualization objects first by category Again write down or save variables that produce interesting groupings and or patterns 4 Color visualization objects by continuous variables to reveal areas where interesting features such as consistently high or low values occur 5 Go through the range sliders to reveal markers with values occurring in a certain range and observe if they are grouped in some kind of cluster 6 When interesting clusters are identified these may be either zoomed in on or marked followed by changing to another view to reveal whether the markers are clustered for a particular reason 14 Loading Data 3 Loading Data 3 1 Loading Data The Periodic table data set As an example of simple yet interesting information the periodic table of the elements will be used The data set holds 75 records with 9 fields each The columns are the name of the element six of its properties and finally the coordinates of each element when the periodic table is printed in the familiar layout first suggested by Dimitri Mendeleev The text file contains the column names column types integer or string and the data itself
368. on Show grippers on docked windows Show full column names in query devices Show warning when changing marked records Use OpenGL hardware acceleration Description Displays a small banner in docked windows which can be used when dragging the window to a new position Drag the banner to move the docked window Examples of docked windows are the Details on Demand window and the Legend window When this option is selected column names are displayed on a separate row inside each query device Clearing the check box will display the column names and the values on the same row in some cases truncating the column name but instead the query devices will be more compact thus displaying more query devices in the window Displays a dialog each time you mark a new set of records If you experience problems displaying 3D Scatter Plots try turning off the OpenGL acceleration Use DirectX9 for smooth line rendering if available Ignore case in full text search Use Regular Expression in full text search Show Bar Chart version 7 x toolbar button Export data using column formatters You can also set Visualizations Enables the use of hardware accelerated DirectX 9 for smooth line rendering This setting only has effect if there is a DirectX 9 capable graphics card available in your computer This sets the default behavior for full text search query devices This means that when you import a new data set or change
369. on y at blinx where a and b are constants and In is the natural logarithm function This model requires that x gt 0 for all data points DecisionSite uses a nonlinear regression method for this calculation This will result in better accuracy of the calculation compared to using linear regression on transformed values only Exponential The exponential fit calculates the least squares fit through points by using the following equation y ae where a and b are constants and e is the base of the natural logarithm Exponential models are commonly used in biological applications e g for exponential growth of bacteria DecisionSite uses a nonlinear regression method for this calculation This will result in better accuracy of the calculation compared to using linear regression on transformed values only Power The Power fit calculates the least squares fit through points by using the following equation y ax where a and b are constants This model requires that x gt 0 for all data points and either that all y gt 0 or all y lt 0 DecisionSite uses a nonlinear regression method for this calculation This will result in better accuracy of the calculation compared to using linear regression on transformed values only Logistic Regression The logistic regression fit is a dose response IC50 model also known as sigmoidal dose response The four parameter logistic model is the most important one Dose response curves descri
370. on Description Identity Each unique value in the chosen column produces a row in the generated table You can choose more than one column Doing so means that the new table will have a separate row for each unique combination of values in the chosen columns Category Each unique value in the chosen column produces a new column in the generated table Selecting more than one column means that the new table will have a separate column for each unique combination of values in the chosen columns Values The column selected under Values is the column from which the data is pulled It is possible to select more than one Value column The values in the generated table are always computed as the average of values in the original table unless the original values are strings If so values in the generated table will consist of concatenated strings To change the way the values are calculated right click on the Method and select a different method from the list or use Ctrl click to select multiple methods Other Columns This option allows you to include an overall average of a particular measurement for each row in the generated table For each column selected here one new column will be created in the new table To change the way the measurements are calculated right click on the Method and select a different method from the list or use Ctrl click to select multiple methods Method Selection List Right click on the Method to change the method
371. on Library dialog introduction Information link adding to guides opening Initial query device selection Input for a web link query Inserting empty panels Integer Intensity plots Interactive reports Introduction Inverse Inverting ISIS database searching Item sliders description entering a value J Jittering in visualizations K Keep aspect ratio L Label orientation Labels axis label width height axis labels properties Lasso tool Launch File dialog Layout of line charts of trellis plots of visualization area Legend description export as image showing hiding Library opening from Library Publish Analysis 170 201 47 43 290 43 194 253 45 183 192 117 110 166 166 168 278 144 106 171 201 344 171 16 294 321 publishing Analyses publishing Guides publishing Posters what is DecisionSite Library Lighting Line chart appearance color columns creating description jitter labels layout line connection Lines tab markers scale mode Line connection between markers in line charts Line fit curve orthogonal straight line straight line Line type Line width Linear straight line fit Link adding action links to Guides information links Link Properties dialog properties included with links web links Loading data Locking details on demand Logarithmic scale Logging in Logical Functions Login M MapInfo Mapping files Maps adding background images adding MapInfo files
372. onstraints of the query devices Details on Demand A window that shows the data in a marked record The information can be displayed as plain text HTML styled text in a window or as styled text in an external HTML browser Docked Window By default the Query Device window the Details on Demand window and the Legend window are docked they stick to one of the outer borders of the Spotfire DecisionSite main window but can be moved 371 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 372 De pivoted Data Another word for Tall Skinny data Distance Measures A type of similarity measures Empty Values Empty values are values that are missing in your data set has a null value If you intend to use any type of clustering tool all empty values need to be replaced or else the clustering will not work There are several replacement methods but all empty values in a column must be replaced using the same method Full text Search Query Device A query device with which any string of characters can be located in the column under investigation Boolean logic can be used to refine the search Glyph One of the shapes representing a data record in a 3D scatter plot Graphical User Interface GUI This is the graphical presentation of the application that you see on the screen HTML Hyper Text Markup Language At its simplest a language for formatting text One of the primary reasons for the success of HTML and the Wor
373. ook using both the old and the new syntax We assume a data set with string column S1 and numeric columns N1 N2 and Binned N1 Old Expression N1 2 N2 SUBTRACT NI Binned N1 N1 3 EXP N2 0 5 NEG N1 TOUPPERCASE S1 COP Se tS SPAY SP INDI sp ibe New Expression N1 2 N2 N1 Binned N1 POWER N 3 POWER N2 0 5 N1 UPPER S1 CAV amp S1 amp V amp N1 amp txt Working with the Data 7 5 Pivot Data 7 5 1 Pivot Data Overview Pivoting in its simplest form means rotating a table Mostly though it also includes performing some form of aggregation so that the new table is more compact than the original To better understand how the pivoting tool works study one of the examples 7 5 2 Using Pivot Data 7 5 2 1 Pivoting the Data Set gt To pivot the current data set 1 Select Data gt Pivot Data Response The Tall Skinny gt Short Wide dialog is opened 2 Inthe Identity list select one or more columns Comment Each unique value in the chosen column produces a row in the generated table You can choose more than one column Doing so means that the new table will have a separate row for each unique combination of values in the chosen columns 3 Inthe Category list select one or more columns Comment Each unique value in the chosen column produces a new column in the generated table Selecting more than one column means that the new table will have a separate column for each u
374. operties gt Profile tab Properties Profile Chart F Acive ae 200 weight kg v 148 Option Color Scale mode Labels Jitter Lines Visualizations Description Markers can be colored to reflect the value of a particular attribute There are three modes for coloring Fixed Continuous and Categorical Coloring in profile charts is identical to scatter plots The vertical dimension in a profile chart represents the value of each attribute The scale can either be the same for all columns or individual for each column In the first case the scale used for all columns ranges from the lowest to the highest value in all columns being plotted This should be used when the values in the plotted columns are of the same unit and similar magnitude To use this mode select All columns use same scale In the second case the scale for each column ranges from the lowest value in the column to the highest value in the column To use this mode select All columns use individual scales It is possible to tag each profile with a label showing the value of a particular column You can select to show both Dynamic labels Highlight and or Active and Static labels None Marked Visible at the same time Dynamic labels are always placed on top of any static labels The static labels include the following options None No labels are visible Marked Only records that are marked will have labels next to them
375. option which will display the Bar Chart Columns tab of the Properties dialog From this dialog you can easily add or remove several columns to the bar chart Sorting using Right Click By right clicking in a visualization a pop up menu appears This context menu lets you access many features in a fast and easy way If you are not using Multiple Columns you can sort the bars in ascending or descending order selecting the Reverse sort order will arrange your bars in the reverse order of the current sort order This is an instantaneous sorting of the bars if you filter the data with the query devices so the height of the bars change their horizontal order will not change until you choose to sort them again Note Ascending and descending sorting is available when you are viewing single columns with fixed coloring or categorical coloring in stacked bar layout You cannot use sorting when you are using multiple columns or either of the categorical coloring 100 bars layout options Tip If you want to sort multiple column bar charts first apply the sorting you want to a bar chart with only the sorting column on the Y axis Then select Multiple Columns and add more columns to your visualization 4 3 Pie Charts Pie charts are circle graphs divided into pieces each piece displaying the size of some related piece of information Pie charts are used to show percentages of a whole 62 Visualizations Year City Revenue 1999 Boston 3000 1999
376. or bars Even distribution Even intervals Example editing HTML of DoD of adding columns with empty values of adding columns with multiple IDs of pivoting of run time filter of transposing Excel copy from import from Explicit primary key Exponential scale Export as web page current visualization data database queries details on demand HTML legend image SQL visualizations to PowerPoint visualizations to Word Expression calculating columns language Favorites creating importing using organizing File menu Files importing from SFA Index 213 112 107 172 349 254 107 212 193 220 213 192 59 78 80 213 213 200 212 211 239 240 45 249 21 20 207 97 341 343 345 343 342 341 342 344 343 338 340 219 223 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual SFS SFT supported formats text file version 7 x and prior Filter data during retrieval run time example Set Filter for Column dialog what is a query device Finding a record using the full text slider Fit curve orthogonal straight line straight line Fixed color Fixed Coloring Dialog shape Fonts Format column Formats specifications for data types supported formats Formatting text files Freezing columns Frozen columns Full screen Full text Search description regular expression using slider Function Compatibility Functions conversion date and time logical math statistical text G Get Values f
377. ords 1 The original Range Slider span is 0 to 40 182 Query Devices 2 Move the drag box to narrow down the selection Home Runs i27 3 Right click on the Range Slider to bring up the Query Device pop up menu Select Data Range gt From Selected The Range Slider expands to its full width but with the range 27 to 40 Three dots are displayed to indicate that the range is not the original full range E771 27 40 Ne seceseressenescersenscsessssessessetsessesestesccessscoscocesscesessssseossesesesessssssssetsesetes 5 To reset the span right click the Range Slider and select Data Range gt Reset 5 3 ltem Sliders In an item slider query device data items are represented by their numerical values on a continuous linear scale However the item slider selects only a single item at a time The selected value is displayed as a label above the slider As a special case all items are selected when the slider handle is at the extreme left of the scale Column name Currently selected value lt Coarse selection Fine selection The item slider features two levels of granularity a coarse grain slider for moving rapidly between items and a fine grain slider for moving more slowly between adjacent items Note The scope of an item slider is dependent on the settings of other query devices This means that the item slider range constantly changes as you manipulate the query devices Items that fall outside of the c
378. ore information When your Poster is designed click Next gt Response The second step of the wizard is displayed Select the Library Section and folder you want the Poster to be published in Enter a Poster title as it will be displayed in the Library Comment It is important that the title is informative with regards to what the Analysis actually does The title can be 50 characters at the most and the following characters are not supported 2 lt gt amp M 4 Click Next gt Response The third step of the wizard is displayed 323 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 10 4 2 324 Comment This dialog lets you enter properties of the Poster By designating detailed properties the organization and search capabilities in the Library are greatly enhanced 12 Enter a Description of the purpose of the Poster 13 Enter Keywords specific to the content of the Poster Comment Keywords are separated by a semicolon i e if you write primary screening quality this will be two keywords primary screening and quality 14 Use the Data content radio buttons to specify how you want to include your Poster data The options are Linked Load data from the Information Link Use this option when your data resides in an Information Link accessible to all users with read access to your published Poster Embedded Save the current data set in the Poster Use this option when your data cannot be
379. ortfolio list Shows or hides deselected records in the heat map Opens the Properties dialog to the Annotations tab where you can provide the visualization with a description of your choice Copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format It also copies an image of the visualization to the clipboard which can be pasted into other applications by using a Paste Special option Creates a duplicate of the selected visualization Available for 3d scatter plots only Resets the visualization to the original view Opens the Properties dialog n which parameters governing the appearance of the visualization can be set annotations made etc Description 363 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 364 gt Delete Del gt Unmark Ctrl E gt Invert Ctrl I gt Select Ctrl M gt New Column gt Create New Portfolio List gt Add to Portfolio List Copy Ctrl C Copy Special gt gt Copy Value gt Copy Visualization Duplicate Visualization Export Data Add Structure Column Properties Alt Enter Deletes the set of marked records The marked records are removed from the data set in Spotfire DecisionSite s memory This operation cannot be undone but it does not affect the original data unless that file is intentionally overwritten with the diminished data Resets the set of ma
380. ory Generally curve fit algorithms determine the best fit parameters by minimizing a chosen merit function In order to optimize the merit function it is necessary to select a set of initial parameter estimates and then iteratively refine the merit parameters until the merit function does not change significantly between iterations The Levenberg Marquardt algorithm has been used for nonlinear least squares calculations in the current implementation The goodness of fit is shown as an R2 value A value of R2 1 0 indicates a perfect fit whereas R2 0 0 indicates that the regression model might be unsuitable for this type of data The standard deviation StdDev shown in the Curve Fit Result dialog is the standard deviation of the differences between the actual data points and the calculated curve It approaches 0 if the selected model accurately describes the data R2 The R2 value measures how much of the variation in the data points that can be explained by the selected regression model SSR SSE R2 55T 10 55T oosR261 where SSR Y YY the regression sum of squares SSE F Y YY the residual or error sum of squares ssT F Y YY the total sum of squares SST SSE SSR and represents the i fitted value calculated using the selected model of the dependent variable Y Limitations to curve fitting Since the calculation of the curve is an iterative process the calculation must stop somewhere In some cases th
381. ose of the software or derivative works of the software 3 Conditions and Limitations A No Trademark License This license does not grant you any rights to use Microsoft s name logo or trademarks B If you begin patent litigation against Microsoft over patents that you think may apply to the software including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit your license to the software ends automatically C If you distribute copies of the software or derivative works you must retain all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices that are present in the software D If you distribute the software or derivative works in source code form you may do so only under this license i e you must include a complete copy of this license with your distribution and if you distribute the software or derivative works in compiled or object code form you may only do so under a license that complies with this license E The software is licensed as is You bear the risk of using it Microsoft gives no express warranties guarantees or conditions You may have additional consumer rights under your local laws which this license cannot change To the extent permitted under your local laws Microsoft excludes the implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose and non infringement 1 2 3 STLPort 5 1 0 Copyright 1994 Hewlett Packard Company Copyright 1996 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc Copyright 1997 Mo
382. ose the Properties dialog 5 The leftmost column s you specified will be displayed at all times when you are scrolling horizontally Activating and Marking Records Moving the mouse over a record will highlight it with a thin black rectangle To make a record Active simply click on it The Active record is indicated by a thick black rectangle around it You can use the arrow keys to move the active record indicator up or down thus making another record active instead 69 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 1 1 70 There are several ways to help you mark a set of records in the Table as explained in the table below Marked records are by default indicated by a dark green background The following instructions explain how to mark one or more records in the Table gt To mark one single record Mouse Drag the mouse over the record while holding down the left mouse button A dotted rectangle will indicate the drag operation Keyboard mouse Click on the record you want to mark Then click on it again while holding down the Shift key Keyboard Press the Spacebar to mark the currently active record only in table visualizations gt To mark a range of records Mouse Drag the mouse over the records you want to mark A dotted rectangle will indicate the drag operation Keyboard mouse Click on the first record in the range Hold down the Shift key and click on the last record in
383. ould be handled here See Poster data for more information Publish Poster to Library Step 3 3 x Poster title Description This Poster shows correlations between genres and other factors Keywords movegere For multiple keywords use semicolon as separator Data content C Linked Load data from the Information Link Embedded Save the current data set in the Poster Note Marked records can only be included for embedded data Help lt Back Finish Cancel Option Description Poster title The name of the Poster as it will be displayed in the Library This is the title you provided in the previous step Description A description of the functions of the Poster The description could 326 Keywords Data content Finish Saving and Exporting Data contain detailed information about the Poster enabling a quick overview Keywords specific to the content of the Poster Keywords are separated by a semicolon i e if you write primary screening quality this will be two keywords primary screening and quality Keywords are used to enhance organization and search capabilities Use the Data content radio buttons to specify how you want to include your Poster data The options are Linked Load data from the Information Link Use this option when your data resides in an Information Link accessible to all users with read access to your published Poster Embedded Save the current data s
384. ound columns 10 Click OK Comment Spotfire DecisionSite will try to match data and background The background image is shown and the axes changed to the new coordinate columns Spotfire DecisionSite Mapping Files SFM Files The Spotfire DecisionSite mapping file sfm format first establishes a coordinate system which relates the data set s coordinate system to that of the polygon set being defined After that a number of polygons are defined A polygon is defined by a fill color an origin point a border color the number of points and the X Y and Z coordinates of the points The Z coordinates are ignored but they must be included The format of the file as follows with variables in italics COORDSYS xmin xmax ymin ymax zmin zmax ADD POLY filicolor xorigin yorigin zorigin lyes numberofpoints xl yl zI x2 y2 z2 A sample file could look as follows COORDSYS 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 ADD POLY LimeGreen 0 0 0 0 0 02 0 0 lyes 5 0 677419 0 976261 0 0 0 680645 0 977745 0 0 0 680645 0 983680 0 0 0 677419 0 985163 0 0 0 677419 0 988131 0 0 The env sfm file in the Spotfire DecisionSite distribution serves as an example of this background map format To map a data file to a Spotfire mapping file 77 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 2 4 4 8 2 5 4 8 2 5 1 78 In your visualization select the two axes from the data that serve as coordinates In the Data and Background t
385. output parameter name must include a file extension connected to a known program Execute method Use this method if you want to specify which program to send the file to Command line or to run other custom commands The following syntax can be used for the command line path program name 1 Example PROGRAMFILES Windows NT Accessories wordpad exe 1 Tip You can specify what program will be associated with a certain type of action for a specific file type on your computer See the online help for your operating system for more information In Windows XP this is made in Windows Explorer Tools gt Folder Options On 8 2 3 10 8 2 3 10 1 Tools the File Types tab select the file of interest and click Advanced Add the selected actions Open Edit Print etc to the list Other Dialogs Connector Settings Dialog This dialog may look different depending on the type of computation server you are connecting to It is used to define what server to use and possibly also which other settings to use upon script execution Note No connection is made until you actually run the script If you want to test the connection when you set up the configuration use the Test button see below Connector Settings SAS x Server bridge sasserver 8081 El Username administrator Password essees E Prompt user for login when executing the script v Keep session open until manually closed E Force single
386. ows arranging moving showing hiding Word Presentation dialog exporting visualizations Workbook mode showing and hiding windows X XML DecisionSite 7 x and prior XSF files Z Zoom bar zooming and panning Zoom to selection Zooming scatter plots 171 253 254 254 253 255 256 253 284 341 162 354 171 172 171 340 340 172 171 318 318 164 164 164
387. pra CE e rf Here the scatter plot properties that were set to something other than None that is Color and Size together with the axis selections are shown as possible prompts The creator of this Guide has determined that the size should always be set by gender as she specified when she created the original scatter plot so this check box is not selected in the Prompt for dialog SE 8 Tike bor ingest fakin porgi dialog Bakaa the cokuney to be lephayed in fre tabir J 2 In this case the only setting that had been modified was the columns displayed in the table Hence this is the only item available for prompting in the Prompt for dialog The resulting Settings for dialog shows the three selected prompt lists upon running the Guide The titles of the lists are the ones entered by the Guide creator in the Prompt for dialog Je settings for Tabie Baoa the oew tp be dephayed in thee table If the selected prompt item is a list of columns the resulting Settings for dialog will contain two list boxes where the end user of the Guide can move columns from Available Columns to Used Columns using the arrows gt gt and lt lt and also sort the columns with the up and down arrows 301 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual gt To reach the Settings for dialog during development of a Guide 1 Add one or more prompt steps to a visualization link using the P
388. query device settings Color by etc Note Columns created from marked records cannot be saved in templates SFT files gt To apply a template 1 Open a data file 2 Select File gt Apply Template 3 Select an SFT file 4 Click OK You can use any SFS file in the same way as a template file applying the settings in the Spotfire Analysis File to your loaded data set Use the procedure described above but select an Spotfire Analysis File instead of SFT Note The Spotfire Interactive Report Settings dialog allows you to save your visualization settings only in Spotfire DecisionSite version 7 x In newer versions all settings are always included in a template 317 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 5 318 SFA Files In their most simple form SFA Spotfire Application files are identical to Spotfire Analysis Files You can save your Analysis as an SFA file and open that file again just like an Spotfire Analysis File The only difference is that when you open an SFA file the resulting Analysis is not automatically associated with that same file You can only save it by using Save As and enter a name This helps you avoid accidentally over writing the application file However SFA files can also incorporate an application that is launched when opening the file This application implemented using scripts and possibly involving a visible user interface could for instance establish
389. quotation for string parameters Help Test Option Server al Username Password Request timeout minutes Prompt user for login when executing the script OK Cancel Description Enter the address to the calculation server that you want to use Type local in this field if you want to run against a local SAS Base client on your own computer Opens the Servers dialog where you can select from a list of predefined calculation servers Type the user name required to work against the calculation server In some cases this field may be missing Type the password required to work against the calculation server In some cases this field may be missing If your computation takes a long time you can increase the Request timeout to prevent that the execution is interrupted before the calculation is finished This option is available in the design phase of a configuration only Select this check box if you want the end users of the configuration to log into the server upon execution If this option is cleared the configuration will always use the connector settings provided during the design phase 279 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 2 3 10 2 8 2 3 10 3 280 Keep session open This option is available in the design phase of a configuration only until manually Select this check box to use a single session on the server for all closed Computation Services calculations run during
390. r resolution 800x600 pixels 256 colors 1024x768 pixels 16 bit high colors or greater is recommended Others Network card or modem Mouse CD ROM drive if installation is done from a CD ROM Graphics cards When 3D visualizations are used for analyzing you will find that the graphics card of the computer is an important component OpenGL support is required and hardware acceleration TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual beneficial to allow the processor to devote its work to other things than presenting the display with information Due to the great variety of graphics cards manufacturers Spotfire DecisionSite has not been tested on all of them If you experience difficulties or slow performance check that the most recent drivers for your hardware are installed and that the manufacturer s recommendations are met 2 2 2 Software Requirements During the installation process the setup program checks that your computer contains all necessary operating system components Most components are mandatory while some may be missing without the installation being aborted If this is the case you will be warned about the missing system component Please visit http www spotfire com sr for information on which Operating System and other Software versions that are required to run DecisionSite Client Web connection Spotfire DecisionSite requires a Web connection to a Spotfire DecisionSite Analytics Server either at http home
391. r yymm yymmdd yymmn yymon yyq yyqr Loading Data Integer Date String Integer String String Time Date Date Integer Date Date Date Integer Date Date Date Date String String 57 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 4 1 58 Visualizations Scatter Plots Scatter plots are similar to line graphs in that they use horizontal and vertical axes to plot data points However they have a very specific purpose Scatter plots show how much one variable is affected by another Each record or row in the data set is represented by a marker whose position depends on its values corresponding to the X and Y axes Study Hours Test Score o oO n 1 3 80 7 90 5 90 80 2 75 6 80 70 7 30 60 1 50 50 2 65 40 7 85 1 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FT Stuy Hours RER i Scatter Plot The above picture demonstrates how scatter plots can be used Say for example that you want to show whether studying longer hours helps you improve your test grades The scatter plot shows that according to this set of data the longer you study the better grade you will get on your test A third variable can be set to correspond to the color or size of the markers thus adding yet another dimension to the plot Two dimensional scatter plots are the default visualization of many data sets gt Make a new 2D scatter plot in one of the following ways e Press Ctrl 1 on the keyboard e Click the New Scatter
392. r all anticipated values Markers that are included in a color range from the Ranges list are set to a color from that range Note Because it is possible to specify overlapping ranges a marker can be inside several ranges See Overlapping Color Ranges for more information Any other markers are set to either a fixed color or a color from a palette depending on your selections A palette is a list of colors If there are more unique values in the color column than there are colors in the palette colors will be reused Causes each marker to get an individual color from the color palette list Note If there are more than 97 values colors will be reused Launches the Edit Palette dialog where you can adjust the RGB values of individual colors Lets you choose the color that the markers will get Shows the color of the deselected values Deselected refers to records that do not fulfill the constraints of the query devices Shows the color of the records that have been marked Shows the color of the empty records Empty refers to records that have at least one empty field These records are not shown at all in visualizations where an axis corresponds to the missing field With this option there is a separate shared auto range per data type category 3 Date DateTime 4 Time 5 Integer Decimal Visualizations String columns are not grouped at all and each column will get an individual range spanning from the first string to th
393. r is that the values are distributed on a linear scale according to the values of the data Thus if values are unevenly distributed this will be reflected in the range slider 181 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Note This is not the case with item sliders where values are evenly distributed along the range of the slider regardless of what values appear in the column Note For more information on how strings are sorted in a query device please see Strings Adjusting the Range Slider span The range slider can easily be adjusted to encompass only the currently selected data gt Setting the range slider span to the current selection 1 Double click on the center of the range slider Errors 0 32 2 The range slider is now adjusted so as to show only the effective area 3 To reset the range slider double click on the center of it again The range slider is then reset to its maximum width gt Setting the left range slider span 1 Double click on the left drag box 3 To reset the left range slider span double click on the left drag box of it again The range slider is then reset to its maximum width Note This function also applies to the zoom bars functionality Sometimes you might wish to filter the data in a column using a smaller range than the full range of the column If so you can set a range slider to encompass only a smaller range gt Setting the Data Range to Selected rec
394. r through the Customize color button of the Properties dialog Visualizations Unmarking Re marking any marked object s while Ctrl is pressed will unmark them If Ctrl is not pressed only the new selection will be marked Unmark all data by selecting Edit gt Marked Record s gt Unmark or by pressing Ctrl E Alternatively you can unmark everything by marking an empty area of any visualization Message box when marking If a set of markers is already marked and you mark a new set a message box will appear warning you that you will loose the previous marking You can turn this feature off by checking the box labeled Never show alert again If at a later time you would like this feature back select Edit gt Marked Record s gt Unmark and check the box in the dialog You can also use the Customize dialog 4 9 5 3 Activating Clicking on a single record will make a persistent circle surround the corresponding marker in all scatter plot visualizations A record thus chosen is referred to as active The arrow keys will cause the nearest record in the direction of the arrow to become active The Tab key will move the active record indicator to the next record in the data set If you have a group of records marked using the keys will only cycle through these The details of an active record are presented in the Details on Demand window The record will continue showing details until another record is made active or a group of records
395. rameter that you want to add to your DecisionSite data set from the drop down list Only output parameters defined as the data type Dataset are available in the list Input parameter Select the input parameter whose settings will be used in the matching for matching of of rows to the existing data set rows Example If several input parameters are available but the x prompt uses marked records only it might be suitable to use the x input parameter for matching of rows and hence not add anything to those rows where the x input parameter was empty upon calculation Column name Used for adding prefix and or suffix to all calculated columns Type template prefix suffix in the text field where is the original input column names Example If Calculated Result is typed in the Column name template field and columns with the names Height and Weight are used in the calculation the resulting names added to DecisionSite will be Calculated Height Result and Calculated Weight Result Overwrite existing Select the check box if you want any columns with the same names as 8 2 3 9 3 8 2 3 9 4 Tools columns specified in the Column name templates field to be overwritten upon execution Replace Current Data Set Use this result handler when you want the result of the calculation to be a new data set in your current DecisionSite Client instance Any previous data set in DecisionSite will be closed when the new data set i
396. rary to locate the Guide that you want to edit Edit the Guide by adding or removing text and links See Open from Library for more information In Analysis Builder click Guide gt Open Browse to locate the Guide that you want to edit Edit the Guide by adding or removing text and links Tip Run the Guide prior to editing to populate the Actions in DecisionSite list In Analysis Builder click Add gt Text Enter the text that you want to add in the Text Properties dialog Click OK to close the dialog Open a data set run a tool or create a visualization in Spotfire DecisionSite All actions that you have performed on your current data set are logged and included in the Actions in DecisionSite list Make sure you have performed the action you want to add as a link in DecisionSite Select the item or items you want to add to your Guide in the Actions in DecisionSite list Click lt Add Link See How the Actions in DecisionSite list works for more information 289 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Update an existing visualization Add a hyperlink to a Guide Add a link that creates a visualization Add the action for the specific visualization to a new link Double click on a text item or select Add gt Text to adda new text item This will display the Text Properties dialog Select the word that you want to create a hyperlink from Click on the Hyperlink button 5l Test a Guide
397. rds Identifier column This is where you specify which identifier to use when you send a query for marked records to a web site Options Opens the Web Links Options dialog gt To reach the Web Links dialog Select Tools gt Web Links 255 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 1 3 2 256 Web Links Options Dialog Available web links PubMed Entrez Protein Entrez Structure New web link Preview Help Entrez Nucleotide http www nebinim nih gov entrez query fegi cmd search db Genometterm Apple OR Orange OR Pear Web link name Entrez Genome USPTO US Patent amp Trademark Office 7 NIST Chemistry webbook Search by CAS UAL NIST Chemistry webbook Search by Forme http www nebinim nih gov entrez query fegi emd searchkdb Genomek amp term Delimiter OR Add defaults New Delete OK Cancel Option Available web links Web link name URL Delimiter Add defaults New Delete Description The available web links that are listed in the Web Links user interface The name of the web link Click on a web link in the list of Available web links to edit the name in this field The URL to the web link Click on a web link in the list of Available web links to edit the URL in this field A dollar sign within curly brackets is used as a placeholder for the ID in the query Anything you enter between the left bracket an
398. reased in importance Average Note The representation of the bars may be difficult to understand if your data contains both positive and negative values Use this type of representation with moderation for data with mixed signs Click on a bar or a bar category and view the details on demand window for more information about the various bars and categories Option Height of each category _Details on Demand information Stacked Represents the average of the values The exact percentage of each category s bars in that category divided by the average compared to the total average of the number of categories Avg a n entire group AVgcar AV 8group 100 ix Active bar at Year 1999 Contains 3 records The average of Revenue is 1833333333333 For City Boston Contains 1 record The average is 3000 Divided by City Value Average Percentage Boston 3000 163 6 Dalas 2000 109 1 Seattle 500 27 3 Side by Represents the average of the values The average of category as well as the side bars in that category AVgeat average of the entire group Visualizations HH Active bar at Year 1999 Contains 1 record The sum for City Boston is 3000 All bars in group Contains 3 records The sum of Revenue is 5500 1999 2000 2001 2002 100 Represents the average of the The exact percentage of each category s stacked category divided by the average of average compared to the total average of the bars the group and the numb
399. remier League Keywords femera For multiple keywords use semicolon as separator Tooltip Football Guide Auto fameen SSS Company Spotine ne Help lt Back Finish Cancel Option Description Guide title The name of the Guide as it will be displayed in the Library This is the title you provided in the previous step Description A description of the functions of the Guide The description can make it easier for the server administrator to group similar Guides together and remove duplicates etc Note The description can be at most 650 characters Certain Unicode characters may take up 6 character spaces in this regard Keywords Keywords specific to the contents of the Guide Keywords are separated by semicolon i e if you write bar chart binning it will be interpreted as a single keyword To produce two keywords the words must be separated with semicolon Hence bar chart binning will result in the two keywords bar chart and binning Keyword are used to enhance organization and search capabilities Use keywords for precise searches ToolTip A short description of the Guide to be displayed as a ToolTip when you hover with the mouse pointer over the Guide title in the Guides pane Example Creates a bar chart by binning data into even intervals Author The name of the Guide author Company Here you can specify the company that owns the Guide Start page If you are publishing a custom made Guide you nee
400. respective scripting language gt Creating an R configuration which adds a user specified integer to selected columns in the data set 1 In DecisionSite open the data set in which you want to modify columns Comment It is not necessary to have data loaded in DecisionSite when defining or running a configuration but in this example the data is used for testing purposes further down in this step instruction Select Tools gt Computation Services gt R Response Spotfire Computation Services for R is displayed In Computation Services select File gt Connector Settings Response The Connector Settings dialog is displayed Specify the address to your R Server by either typing in the text field e g http myRserver 9080 or selecting a predefined server from the list shown by clicking On oz 259 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 260 10 11 12 13 14 15 On the Input Parameters tab type a suitable Prompt dialog title in the specified field In this example we use the text Add Integer to Columns Comment According to Spotfire UI Guidelines the title should be short and concise and written using book title capitalization without any closing punctuation On the Input Parameters tab type a suitable Prompt dialog description in the specified field In this example we use the text This is an example R script calculation which adds the integer provided below to all specified col
401. rform your search on There are four alternatives All items Analyses Guides Posters gt To reach the Open from Library dialog Click File gt Open from Library 3 2 3 Searching in the Library Search Searches are performed on title description and keywords for a precise result Searching works according to the following criteria e The search is either performed on all Library Sections or one at a time e The search is either performed on all Library items or on only one type at a time If the Open from Library dialog is reached via the Guides pane or the Guides menu Guides are always the only items found in the search e The search words are matched according to title keywords or description Note that folders are also included in the search e The search words are separated by space e All words used in the search must be present in the item properties e To find a phrase use quotation marks around it e The search is case sensitive e Wild cards asterisks can be used inside words to find variations on that word Example Suppose that there is a Guide in the Library whose properties include e Title Wafer anomalies Guide e Description This Guide captures how we find anomalies in our wafer production data Look closely at Temperature vs Time e Keywords Plant A Wafer CODE1A Examples of a few search strings which can be used to find the Guide e Wafer Finds the title and keyword
402. ributes such as names and descriptions Range sliders are assigned to numeric columns like date time and decimal or integer values 194 Details on Demand and Legend 6 Details on Demand and Legend 6 1 Details on Demand The Details on Demand window displays the actual values of marked or active records For objects that consist of multiple records such as pies bars etc the Details on Demand window displays information appropriate to that object such as average value number of values etc Presenting the Details on Demand There are three different ways in which the information can be presented e As plain text in the details frame default e Asan HTML document based on Microsoft Internet Explorer displayed in the Details on Demand window e Asan HTML based document in an external browser The HTML based details information can be formatted using the templates in the Data and Background tab of the Properties dialog The bar chart and the pie chart have their own HTML templates Details for the other visualizations are controlled by a set of templates working on active or marked records The HTML based presentation can use all functions provided by modern browsers e g images tables links to the Internet and Java applets Further manipulation of the HTML template is described below 6 2 Plain Text xj Atomic Number Atomic Mass By default Details on Demand displays data in plain text The details window is place
403. ription New Folder Creates a new folder where you can publish your Poster A dialog will prompt you about the new folder name Delete Deletes a selected item permanently from the Library 325 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Properties Use Properties to edit the properties of selected Library items such as folders Members Lists all users who have at least read access to the current Library Section Each Library Section has its own set of access permissions Poster title The name of the Poster as it will be displayed in the Library It is important that the title is informative with regards to what the Poster actually does Note The title can be 50 characters at the most and the following characters are not supported is 2 lt gt amp Next Select the folder in which you want to publish your Poster and click Next to proceed to Publish Poster to Library Step 3 3 You can also select an existing Poster if you want to overwrite it gt To reach the Publish Poster to Library Step 2 3 dialog 1 Click File gt Publish Poster to Library 2 Design your DecisionSite Poster in Publish Poster to Library Step 1 3 and click Next gt 10 4 4 Publish Poster to Library Wizard Step 3 3 This dialog lets you enter properties of the Poster By using detailed properties the organization and search capabilities in the Library are greatly enhanced You also specify how the data sh
404. rked records No records will be marked after you have executed this operation Inverts the set of marked records Marks all previously unmarked records and unmarks the set of marked records Sets the selection to the marked records Creates a temporary filter so that only the marked records are visible Opens the New Column from Marked Records dialog where you can add a new column showing whether records are included in the marked group or not Creates a new list with the marked records to the Portfolio The list is placed as the last item on root level Adds the marked records from the visualization into your currently active Portfolio list Copies the set of marked records to the Clipboard Data in all the records that have been marked is copied to the Clipboard in text format Copies the cell value that you right clicked upon Copy the current visualization to the Clipboard An image in vector graphics format of the active visualization is copied to the Clipboard This image can be pasted into another application as a Windows Metafile Creates a duplicate of the selected visualization Opens a dialog where you can select a folder to save the exported data to specify a file name and determine the type and encoding to use for the new file Allows you to add a structure column to the table so that it behaves like a Structures in Table visualization Opens the Properties dialog n which parameters governing the appe
405. rm The Guides pane The Guides pane is a web browser fully integrated into the Spotfire DecisionSite environment This is where you can run Guides step by step instructions for common workflows or tutorials guiding you through an analysis 2 1 2 Features Spotfire delivers several different Guided Analytical applications Which tools are present in your DecisionSite depends on which application package you are using and what licenses you have bought Depending on the nature of the various features you will find them under the File Data Tools or Guides menu Tools that are launched in the Guides pane e g Information Builder or in separate web windows have their own online help files To access the online help for these applications you must first start the application by selecting the appropriate link from the menu Once an application has been launched the online help is reached via the Help menu in the application window 2 2 Installation and Setup 2 2 1 Hardware Requirements Spotfire DecisionSite in itself does not require very high powered computers to run smoothly However if your data sets are large they will require both a certain amount of RAM and will of course benefit from high processor speeds Minimal Client Hardware requirements Processor Intel Pentium or equivalent 500 MHz RAM 128 MB 256 MB or greater is recommended Hard Disk The installation footprint is approximately 30 MB Display VGA or bette
406. rom Data Set dialog Getting started Glossary Glyphs Graphics cards Grippers GUI of Spotfire DecisionSite Guides creating deploying to a server from Analysis Builder including prompted steps open and publish to Library pane in DecisionSite 380 317 184 234 231 10 15 288 294 288 292 294 284 285 running locally what are they Guides menu H Hardware requirements Header height Heading annotating columns Annotations tab color for trellis plots Heat map coloring columns creating edit color range marking order of rows visualisation what is it Help menu Hiding axis labels axis selectors query devices window frames windows Highlighting how to Histogram color creating what is it Home page Hovering HTML Details on Demand Details on Demand editing HTML DoD editing HTML templates export DoD statistics for templates HTML report exporting visualizations Hyperlink Hyperlink Properties dialog l Identifier in Transpose Data tool Image adding background DecisionSite mapping files exporting legend as exporting visualizations as Implicit primary key Importing case sensitivity data file interpretation 292 284 354 7 161 162 97 70 106 297 250 75 71 318 344 338 340 341 343 207 23 18 31 from clipboard from database from favorite from file OLE DB SAS data Spotfire text data file Indicators Individual scale mode Information about the data set Informati
407. rompt for dialog 2 Select Guide gt Run from the Analysis Builder menu 3 Step through the Guide to locate the edited visualization link and click on it 9 5 3 8 Guide Properties Dialog The Guide Properties dialog controls important properties like the title and ToolTip of the Guide after it has been deployed to a server It is recommended that you fill in all fields of the Guide Properties to facilitate efficient administration of Guides on the server Guide Properties xj Title Create bar chart Description This is a guide that bins data into a user specified number of bins and creates a bar chart visualization with the bins on the s axis ToolTip fates a bar chart by binning data into even intervals Keywords bar chart binning ssst S Author Charie Brown 000 Company ACME Industief V Don t show this dialog when saving guide Help OK Cancel Option Description Title The title of your Guide as it will be displayed in the Guides pane when it is published to a server The title is also displayed in the flight view when you are running the Guide It is important that the title is informative with regards to what the Guide really does If the Guide will be published to a server no characters other than a z A Z 0 9 3_ and blank spaces should be used in this field due to restrictions in DecisionSite Builder Description A description of the functions of the Guide The description can
408. rves This makes it easy to compare the shapes of the curves Position and scale can be set either using sliders or by entering numerical values You can at any time switch between the two modes by pressing either of the two radio buttons labeled Relative or Numeric Vertical Position Relative Moves the selected curve up and down in the visualization window This may be desirable when you want to compare two curves by superimposing them on one another Vertical Scale Relative Scales the selected curve If you move the slider to Min the curve will appear almost flat When set to Max the curve amplitude will equal the window height of the visualization High Numeric Sets the highest value of the visible range Low Numeric Sets the lowest value of the visible range Cascade all Sets the Scale and Position of all columns so that each of them will occupy a separate slot of the window height Maximize all Set the Scale and Position on every column so they utilize the whole height of the window Visualizations 4 8 13 Line Chart Columns Tab 4 8 13 1 Line Chart Columns Tab Edit gt Properties gt Line Chart Columns tab Properties Line Chart x Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Lines Line Chart Columns Markers Available columns Number of p Business loca Groceries Garden Furniture Electronics Toys Receipt aver Binned Custo Columns in line c
409. s By normal text search we refer to search strings that don t contain regular expressions The search can be made arbitrarily complex by use of logical operators AND amp and OR blank space Search expressions are evaluated from left to right Once the search string has been entered press Enter on your keyboard to execute the search All records matching the search criteria will be shown in the visualization window The operators allowed in normal searches are white space logical OR amp logical AND search for the exact sub string within double quotes The full text search query device also supports Cut Copy Paste of text strings using the CTRL X CTRL C and CTRL V You can specify whether a full text search query device should use regular expressions or not by right clicking on it In the pop up menu that appears select or deselect Set Property gt Search Options gt Use regular expression Case sensitivity When importing a new data set or changing a query device into a full text search the resulting full text search query device s will be either case sensitive or not This is determined by a setting in the Tools gt Options gt Advanced options tab called Case sensitive full text search If this check box is selected then searches done with the query devices will be case sensitive However you can also specify whether or not each individual full text search query device should be case sensitive by right clicking on it In
410. s Deselected refers to records that do not fulfill the constraints of the query devices Shows the color of the records that have been marked Shows the color of the empty records Empty refers to records that have at least one empty field These records are not shown at all in visualizations where an axis corresponds to the missing field Applies a two color color arrangement to your data one color as your 125 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 126 records gt Three color gradient for all records gt Two color gradient for visible records gt Three color gradient for visible records gt Two color gradient highlighting outliers gt Two color gradient resisting outliers Import Export Basic minimum value and one as your maximum value Applies a three color color arrangement to your data one color as your minimum value one as your maximum value and the third color as a central value Applies a two color color arrangement to your visible data Applies a three color color arrangement to your visible data Applies a two color color arrangement to your data but outliers are highlighted in another color rather than being included in the continuous coloration Applies a two color arrangement to your data in which all values before median 2 stddev are colored the first color red and all values after median 2 stddev are colored the final color blue Outliers are co
411. s identifier column Select Work on Selected records Select Temperature and Humidity as value columns ey eee NS 249 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 7 3 User Interface 7 7 3 1 Transpose Data Wizard Step 1 3 Transpose Data step 1 of 3 x M Identifier column and records Select an identifier column to be the column names in the transposed dataset Hill n min Identifier column Day X Work on All records Selected records Help Next gt Cancel Option Description Identifier column Each value in the selected identifier column will become a column name in the transposed data set Work on All records Creates a column for each record in the data set Note that this may result in a very large number of columns Work on Selected Creates a column for each record selected in the data set records gt To reach the Transpose Data wizard Select Data gt Transpose Data 250 7 7 3 2 Working with the Data Transpose Data Wizard Step 2 E Transpose Data step 2 of 3 xj m Value columns Available columns Humidity Value columns Temperature Wind Add gt gt Remove Option Available columns Value columns Add gt gt lt lt Remove Description The columns available for transposing Only numerical columns are displayed The columns selected for transposing Moves a column to the Value c
412. s not available if you are working offline without a connection to a server gt How to publish an Analysis to the DecisionSite Library 1 Start DecisionSite and open a data set 2 Select File gt Publish Analysis to Library Response The first step of the wizard is displayed Comment This step lets you specify where in the Library your Analysis should be published Navigate in the Library by using double click on Library Sections and folders to the location you want publish your Analysis to Only Analyses folders and Library Sections are visible in this view 3 Enter the name of your Analysis in Analysis title as it will be displayed in the Library Comment It is important that the title is informative with regards to what the Analysis actually does The title can be 50 characters at the most and following characters are not supported 2 2 lt gt 4 amp M 3 A 4 Click Next gt Response The second step of the wizard is displayed Comment This dialog lets you enter properties of the Analysis By designating detailed properties the organization and search capabilities in the Library are greatly enhanced 5 Enter a Description of the functions of the Analysis Enter Keywords specific to the content of the Analysis Comment Keywords are separated by a semicolon i e if you write primary screening quality this will be two keywords primary screening and quality 7 Use the Data content rad
413. s opened Replace Current Data Set x Output parameter Eee Help OK Cancel Select the desired output parameter from the drop down list Open in Other DecisionSite Instance Use this result handler when you want the result of the calculation to be a new data set in either a new DecisionSite instance or another currently running DecisionSite instance Any previous data set in the selected DecisionSite instance will be closed when the new data set is opened Open in Other DecisionSite Instance xj Output parameter dataout X Open in C new DecisionSite instance new or existing DecisionSite instance Help OK Cancel Option Description Output parameter Select the output parameter that you want to send as a new data set to another DecisionSite instance from the drop down list Only output parameters defined as the data type Dataset are available in the drop down list Open in new Use this option to open the resulting data set in a new DecisionSite DecisionSite instance instance Open in new or Use this option to allow the end user of the configuration to select existing whether to open the resulting data set in a new or in an existing DecisionSite DecisionSite instance If this option is selected the Open Resulting instance Data Set in DecisionSite dialog will be displayed upon execution 277 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 2 3 9 5 278 Launch File Use this res
414. s the selected option down in the list Sets the selected option as the default value shown to the end user upon execution Resulting prompt for the example above Favorite color red zl 8 2 3 8 7 Prompt Settings Real Dialog Use this type of prompt when you want user input in the form of a decimal number Prompt Settings Real x Label Height Default value f1 65 Min value Max value ES Help OK Cancel Option Label Default value Min value Max value Description The text that will be displayed above the input field in the prompt dialog when the configuration is executed Try to make the label as clear as possible to ensure that the end users of the configuration understand what the input parameter should be According to Spotfire UI Guidelines the label for a text field should use sentence style capitalization and end with a colon If desired type a value for default display in the prompt dialog If desired type the lowest acceptable value that can be used as input If an end user tries to provide a lower value an error message will be displayed upon execution If desired type the highest acceptable value that can be used as input If an end user tries to provide a lower value an error message will be displayed upon execution Resulting prompt for the example above Height f1 65 274 8 2 3 8 8 8 2 3 9 8 2 3 9 1 Tools Prompt Settings String Dialog
415. scow Center for SPARC Technology Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation Hewlett Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation Moscow Center for SPARC Technology makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty 1 2 4 Numerical Recipes Copyright 1986 1992 Numerica
416. se contact your DecisionSite Administrator for more information gt How to publish a Poster to the DecisionSite Library l 2 10 11 Start DecisionSite Client and open a data set Create the visualizations you want and adjust the query devices to filter out data the way you want it in your Poster Select File gt Publish Poster to Library Comment You need a DecisionSite Poster license to see this option Response The first step of the wizard is displayed A dialog about unsupported features may appear Please see below for more information Use the dialog to specify which parts of the Analysis you want to include in the Poster Select the Visualizations you want to include Comment See Poster Visualizations for more information The visualizations in the Poster can be displayed either as a vertical list of large plots or tiled smaller plots next to each other Select whether or not you wish to Use list layout as default view mode Comment If the visualizations in DecisionSite Client are tiled the Publish Poster to Library tool will try to emulate the layout by default The person looking at the published Poster can switch between Tiled and List layout Select the Query Devices you want to enable data filtering with Comment See the Poster Query Devices for more information Select which type of Details on Demand you want to present either Table or Web search Comment See Poster Details on Demand for m
417. section of the expression and clicking Insert Function will add the selected function to the expression with the highlighted section as an argument Also Undo Redo functionality is available by pressing Ctrl Z Note Very long expressions will be displayed truncated in the Visualization Legend To avoid this insert a blank space with suitable distance This will not affect the expression but will allow the Legend to display it over several rows Recent expressions This list contains the twenty most recent expressions you have created You can select one of these and click the Insert button to insert the expression into the Expression field This will not replace the entire content of the field only insert the selected expression at the cursor position Result This field displays the result of applying the current expression to the first row of the data set If this field shows an error message there is a problem with the expression Clicking on the field will display an explanation of what is wrong Pressing F5 will also display the error description Pressing F4 will move the cursor to the position in the expression where the error lies There are three kinds of error messages EXPR there is a problem with the syntax of the expression NUM the row evaluates to infinity or other illegal number ARG there is a problem with one or many arguments 4 8 18 Heat Map Columns Tab 4 8 18 1 Heat Map Columns Tab Edit gt
418. selected a Microsoft Excel file a second dialog is opened where you can choose the table or data sheet where the desired information is located When you are done with your selections click OK to reach the Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog Click to select a column from the Columns in new data set that you want to use to map against your current data 203 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 1 2 2 204 10 11 12 Comment This should be some kind of ID column preferably containing unique identifiers If a record in this column is missing in the current data set the record will not be added to the data set For information about how non unique values are handled see Details on how data are added Comment If a column has already been used in a matching it will not be available in the Columns in new data set list Select a column pair in the Matching columns list and click on Remove to make the columns available in the two selection lists again Click to select a column from the Columns in current data set Comment This should be some kind of ID column preferably containing unique identifiers For information about how non unique values are handled see Details on how data are added Click Add Match Comment The selected column pair is moved to the Matching columns list box If desired it is possible to use multiple key pairs In this case only records that have identical values in all o
419. selected here 108 4 8 6 4 8 6 1 Range Ticks Labels Grid 3D Tab 3D Tab Visualizations The minimum and maximum values specify the range of the axis labels Default will set the range to encompass the entire data range There are three options for tick mark control Automatic this option will attempt to display a suitable number of labels at even intervals You can modify this somewhat by clicking the Settings button which opens the Ticks dialog Select the Spacing you want and the number of Ticks to be displayed For spacing you can select to show axis labels in four ways Even Distribution will attempt to distribute labels evenly between the highest and lowest value At Values will not place a label where there is no value At All Values will place labels at all values At Even Values will attempt to place labels at evenly spaced whole numbers Interval this option lets you specify an exact interval for the labels which you enter in the Every field You may also specify from which value the labels should be drawn in both directions For example if you set Every 10 and From 1920 labels would appear in steps of 10 and 10 originating from the value 1920 Fixed this option lets you specify the exact values for which you want labels to appear Simply type the values into the field separated by a semicolon Example 1920 1922 1930 1955 1991 This can also be used to specify the number of deci
420. sentation If desired select a different type of Picture format Comment The visualization can be exported in a EMF JPG or PNG format If desired change the Font size of the exported labels Click OK Response If Create a new presentation is chosen PowerPoint is started and the selected visualizations are shown in a new presentation If Add to an open presentation is chosen the selected visualizations are appended to the end of an open presentation Note Microsoft PowerPoint must be installed on the machine for this tool to be used 338 10 5 2 Saving and Exporting Data Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Dialog xi m Select visualizations Scatter Plot Bar Chart My Data Table SUDE TITLE Ten ten ee cele be Sob abt mw eee Si Picture format Portable Networks Graphics png _ Select All Create a new presentation te Add to an open presentation My presentation ppt X Font size Normal X Help OK Cancel Option Select visualizations Select All Create a new presentation Add to an open presentation Picture format Font size Description The list box shows the titles of all visualizations available for PowerPoint export Click a visualization name to include the visualization in the PowerPoint presentation For multiple selection press Ctrl and click the desired visualizations Click this button to select all availa
421. separate lines beside each sector that has records included in the marking Heat Maps e Cluster node similarity ToolTip is not supported e The dendrogram menu is not supported e Cannot zoom in column dendrogram Number Formatting e Combining scientific notation and parentheses negative format will force negative format to default e Combining the parentheses negative format and default number of decimals will force two decimals To avoid this set the number of decimals explicitly in DecisionSite Client e Combining the thousands separator and default number of decimals will force two decimals To avoid this set the number of decimals explicitly in DecisionSite Client Shared Ranges e Some plots that use Shared Ranges look different in Posters compared to DecisionSite Client In DecisionSite Client 9 0 and forward shared ranges are only shared between Saving and Exporting Data columns of compatible types In Posters as well as in earlier versions of DecisionSite Client shared ranges could be applied to a mixture of column types e Compatible types are A Numeric columns integer real B String columns C Date columns date timestamp D Time columns In other words if two incompatible columns use the same color scheme their color ranges will be calculated individually in DecisionSite Client 9 0 but DecisionSite Posters will still use shared ranges 10 4 6 5 Poster Data You can choose from two kinds of data links
422. setting The color a marker gets is decided in the following order Markers associated with a data row with empty null value in the color column are set to the empty color Markers filtered out by query devices or zoom sliders are set to the deselected color Marked items are drawn using the marked color Markers that are included in the value list are set to the color specified there The value list may include values that are not part of the current data set but you know those values could be included in a future data set thus it is possible to set up color arrangements that have predefined colors for all anticipated values Markers that are included in a color range from the Ranges list are set to a color from that range Note Because it is possible to specify overlapping ranges a marker can be inside several ranges See Overlapping Color Ranges for more information Any other markers are set to either a fixed color or a color from a palette depending on your selections A palette is a list of colors If there are more unique values in the color column than there are colors in the palette colors will be reused Causes each marker to get an individual color from the color palette list Note If there are more than 97 values colors will be reused Launches the Edit Palette dialog where you can adjust the RGB values of individual colors Lets you choose the color that the markers will get Shows the color of the deselected value
423. software Regular expressions allow you to construct a template or pattern for what you re searching for You can then use your pattern template to determine whether a given text fragment matches your pattern For example suppose you wanted to find all records beginning with the letter n You would then want to construct a regular expression that would have the meaning has a letter n as the first character on the line The regular expression for this is n The in regular expression syntax means beginning of line Therefore n means line beginning with the letter n Next we want to find records whose first word begins with n and whose second word begins with the letter g Let s say we also don t care whether the letters are upper or lower case Here is the regular expression meaning all lines whose first word begins with n and whose second word begins with g n s g The three main components of the pattern are n s and g The n means the letter n the g the letter g and the s is a special character meaning White space or any spaces which could be a space a tab or a line break Notice that both the n and the g are followed by a period The period in regular expression syntax means any character Therefore n or g means n followed any character and g followed by any character respectively Finally notice the 3 plus signs A plus sign in regular expressions means one or more and it always applies to the charac
424. source and Include reference to data conditioning methods 27 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual p Import Data Save Session s xi ma Do you want to save this session as a favorite To continue without saving leave the text box empty Name Average Temperature 1966 1998 Description Data Aggregated from the oceanography data set Select or write a group name to place your favorite in Favorites v Favorite options Save complete session C Save only data conditioning lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Help 5 Click Finish Note Your choice of Favorite options affects how the favorite can be used If a data source is included then the favorite can be opened directly from the Select Data Source dialog If only the method is saved then you must first select a data source and then in the second step apply the favorite as a data conditioning method 3 3 4 2 Organizing Favorites Favorites are organized in folders Click Organize Favorites in the Select Data Source dialog Organize Favorites Xx Favorites Ix Delete i 2 Average Temperatures QO w im 7 hange Group i Cancel Data sources Conditioning methods The Data source tab contains favorites that are linked to data These can be loaded directly from the Select Data Source dialog 28 Loading Data The Conditioning methods tab contains favorites that are not
425. sponse The column is added to the data set 10 Use this column to match against the ID column of the new data set in the Add Columns wizard 7 1 3 User Interface 7 1 3 1 Add Columns Select Source Dialog x Add columns from File C Program Files potfire DecisionSite D ata E mployee_data xls Browse Clipboard C Advanced data import Column match method Automatic Manual Help Back Next gt Einish Cancel Option Description File Click this radio button and enter a path and a file name in the text box 207 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 1 3 2 208 Browse Clipboard Advanced Data Import Automatic Manual Next gt Finish or click Browse to locate a file containing the data that you want to add Opens the Choose file dialog where you can select which file to open Click this radio button to add columns from a data set on the clipboard Click this radio button to add data from a source other than a file or the clipboard e g from a database This option can also be used if the delimiter or data type must be modified to retrieve the data properly Clicking Next gt will display the Import Data wizard For more information about the Import Data wizard see Importing Data Spotfire DecisionSite will automatically match columns with identical names implicit primary key matching Note If you have columns with identical names
426. ss Ctrl 9 or click the New Table button on the toolbar or select Visualization gt New Table 2 Click on the header of the column you wish to sort the rows by or rearrange the order of the columns by dragging and dropping the column headers horizontally 3 Use the Properties dialog to further adjust the various properties of the chart By right clicking in a visualization a pop up menu appears This context menu lets you access many features in a fast and easy way 68 Visualizations You can sort the vertical order of the rows in the table This can be done in several steps for example first sort according to the values in column 1 then by the values in column 5 then by the values in column 3 etc gt To sort the data 1 Click on the header of the first column you wish to sort the data by 2 Press Shift and click on another column header to make a subsequent sort according to the values in that column 3 Repeat step 2 on other columns as many times as you like A small digit will appear in the column headers indicating the sorting order Note Click an additional time on a column header to toggle between Ascending and Descending row order Note For more information on how strings are sorted in a Table see the topic String gt To change the column order 1 Click on a column header and hold the mouse button down 2 You can now drag and drop that column horizontally Move the header to the position you wan
427. st a third axis using the same algorithm as with 2D scatter plots With the Lighting check box cleared the glyphs will be flat as if illuminated evenly from all sides a sphere will appear as a filled circle and a cube from certain angles will look like a hexagon and from other angles like a square The Smooth Shading alternative will smooth edges of adjacent polygons on the surface of the glyphs mostly useful when the filled sphere is used this makes the sphere appear rounder The perspective slider modifies the field of view of the 3D visualization Using the mouse drag the slider towards the right for a wide angle perspective This section provides various helpful settings for quicker navigation of the 3D scatter plot 3D Perspective Edit gt Properties gt 3D tab Visualizations Perspective Less More The perspective slider modifies the field of view of the 3D visualization Using the mouse drag the slider towards the right for a wide angle perspective With the slider in the left most position the view becomes orthogonal a projection where the size of the markers is retained no matter the distance The keyboard arrow keys allow fine tuning of the perspective when the slider has been activated Orthogonal view left and exaggerated perspective right Note When viewing 3D plots the perspective view will make markers that are closer to the viewer look bigger and so care must be taken i
428. ster to Library Wizard Step 1 3 and click Next gt 3 Inthe Publish Poster to Library Wizard Step 2 3 select Library location enter a title and click Next gt 328 Saving and Exporting Data 4 Edit the Poster properties in Publish Poster to Library Wizard Step 3 3 and click Finish 10 4 6 Poster Content 10 4 6 1 Poster Visualizations You can include one or several visualizations in your Poster The visualizations in the Poster can be displayed either as a vertical list of large plots or tiled smaller plots next to each other Select whether or not you wish to Use list layout as default view mode If you choose to include several visualizations and not use the list layout as default you can create a layout for how they should be displayed horizontally vertically or a combination of the two The default layout will try to mimic the layout as seen in DecisionSite Note Not all visualizations available in Spotfire DecisionSite can be used in a Poster Please see Poster Supported Features for more information gt How to include visualizations 1 Select a visualization from the Visualizations drop down list 2 Mark a cell in the layout section below the drop down list by clicking on it 3 Click on the Add 4 button to add the new visualization below the marked cell or click on the _Ad gt cell button to add the new visualization adjacent to the marked gt How to remove visualizations 1 Mark a cel
429. stom start page This start page is configurable by right clicking in the Guides Pane jals The toolbar can be made visible or hidden by selecting View gt Guides Toolbar Guides The Guides pane is primarily used to run Guides It contains preconfigured Guides which can be run with a single click but it can also show any custom made Guides for yourself or for others See Guides below for more information 9 2 Guides A Guide is a convenient way to guide colleagues through a series of analysis steps in the DecisionSite environment Using a Guide information on how to perform frequent tasks step by step instructions and quick access to tools is assembled in a user friendly way The Guides are easily designed in Analysis Builder Guides are shown in the Guides pane In the Guides pane you will find the link Open Guide from Library and the preconfigured Guides in your DecisionSite application Guides lt gt Data Analysis Pivot results E Review HTS data 3 Key based i Creates visualizations suitable For Higl L Rule of 5 Screening data Create SAR Table using Information Link L Structure similarity scores m The easiest way to run a Guide is to click the link of the Guide in the Guides pane If the Guide you are interested in is not there you can either run it from the Library or from a file e To run a Guide from the Library either click on Open Guide from Library in the Guides pane or se
430. t u 3s u 3s gt upper limit Empty values will be empty in the new column and when loading data sets from external sources linked data the standard deviation will be recalculated Substring This method works for all data types It groups the records by the first or last characters of the values in the column to be binned the exact number of characters to take into account must be supplied Suppose the column to be binned contains family names beginning with Adams and ending with Winter To bin the records according to the first letter in the name use Divide by Substring considering one character from the beginning Bin names are generated from the substring and if Ignore case is used the bin names are all formatted as upper case gt To bin a column by substring 1 Select Data gt New Column gt By Binning Response The New Column by Binning Dialog is launched Select a Column to bin Select the Substring radio button Decide whether to compare from the Beginning or End of the column value Set Positions to the number of characters that should be equal in each bin Select whether to Ignore case that is whether adams and Adams would be considered the same or not Note If the Positions is three and Ignore case is selected the bin name in this example would be ADA Sy se el Type a New column name for the binned column or use the default name 8 Click OK Response The Edit Bin Names dialog is launched
431. t Import gt Open Information Link 3 4 3 2 Set Filter for Column Dialog The Set Filter for Column dialog appears when an information link is being opened and a column is encountered that has been set up with a run time filter The dialog may take various forms depending on the type of prompt selected Strings containing commas can be included both as values as well as range limits by escaping the comma with a backslash 47 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Values e Set Filter for Column x Step 1 of 3 Select Employe Please enter a comma separated list of values below Get values from current visualization Get Values Get values from a text file Browse Help lt Back Next gt Cancel Part Description Text field Enter a comma separated list of column values that you want to use as a constraint You can also paste values of a column from a Microsoft Excel sheet The data will automatically be formatted in the right way Enter to include a comma as a value Enter to include a backslash as a value For Procedures enter NULL to include the null value Example apple pear NULL orange banana Get Values Use this button to set the column filter by fetching values from the current visualization in DecisionSite Opens the Get Values from Data Set dialog Browse Fetch filter values from a text file 48 Loading Data Range A Set Filter for Column
432. t To print the document with the current Print Layout settings 6 Select File gt Print 7 Select a printer from the drop down list 8 Optionally click Properties and adjust your printer settings 9 Click OK Use the Print Preview option on the File menu to see how your printout will appear with the current Print Layout settings Print Layout Spotfire DecisionSite printouts may contain any of the information available in the visualizations To control which information to include select Print Layout Options from the File menu Option Header Include title Include visualization Keep aspect ratio Auto fit to page Footer Include query Include Details on Demand Include legend Force single page layout Frame around areas Annotation Explanation The printed document will have a header stating Date File name Time Select this check box to include a title and enter a title in the text field Deselect this check box if you do not want to print the visualization Select this option if you want to keep the aspect ratio of the visualization when printed on paper Select this option if you want the printed visualization to automatically resize to cover as much of the page as possible The printed document will have a footer stating the text you enter in this field Selecting this option provides information on the filtering you have done using the query devices Selecting this option inc
433. t click to select the columns that you want to transform Comment For multiple selection press Ctrl and click on the desired columns in the Available columns list You can sort the columns in the list alphabetically by clicking on the Name bar Click on the Add gt gt button to send the selected columns to the Columns to transform list Comment These columns should be the ones that contain the actual values and that you want to combine into a new value column For example Sales 2005 Sales 2004 and Sales 2003 In the Available columns list click to select the columns that you want to pass through the depivoting process without any transformation Click on the Add gt gt button to send the selected columns to the Columns to pass through list Comment These columns can contain other categorical information IDs etc For example Region Name or Priority Type a new Category column name in the provided text field Comment For instance Year could be used when sales figures for several different years are to be combined to a single column Select the data Type for the new column from the drop down list Type a new Value column name in the provided text field Comment For instance Sales containing sales figures for several different years Select the data Type for the new column from the drop down list Click OK 7 6 2 2 Example of Depivoting Depivoting a data set means changing it from a short wide form
434. t Function button to insert it to the Expression field You can also double click on a function to insert it If you place the cursor at a specific location in the Expression field the function will be inserted there Description This field provides a brief description of the selected function For more detailed descriptions please see Spotfire Expression Language SXL Expression This is the text field in which you build your expression You can insert functions to it from the list or enter text as in any standard text editor Cut Copy Paste works in the field using standard Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V 4 8 2 5 6 4 8 2 5 6 1 Visualizations Highlighting a section of the expression and clicking Insert Function will add the selected function to the expression with the highlighted section as an argument Also Undo Redo functionality is available by pressing Ctrl Z Note Very long expressions will be displayed truncated in the Visualization Legend To avoid this insert a blank space with suitable distance This will not affect the expression but will allow the Legend to display it over several rows Color Select the color of the curve by clicking on this button Width Select the width in pixels of the curve by clicking on this drop down list Status This field shows if the current expression is valid or not If the expression is correct then OK will be shown If this field shows an EXPR error there is a proble
435. t Spotfire Analysis File sfs is selected in the Save as type list box How the data is stored If the data was loaded from a source other than the clipboard you will get an option on how to save the actual data used in the Spotfire DecisionSite session There are two options available e Saving a link to the data in a dynamic report file Linked no actual data is stored in the SFS file merely a reference describing how to retrieve and how to view the data e Saving the data in a static report file Embedded the actual data used in the session is saved in the SFS file This is the only option available if the data was loaded from the clipboard Analysis Settings x Data content Create link to latest external data Linked C Include all data in the analysis file Embedded Help Cancel For a number of reasons saving the data as an SFS file with Linked data should be the preferred method since it e Ensures data integrity avoids inconsistencies e Reduces the file size essential if you want to distribute the data e FEnsures that the data is up to date However since a link only references its data source the dynamic SFS file is not good if the actual data is removed or damaged Files with column names that contain characters that could be interpreted as column separators e g comma semicolon tab etc should always be saved with linked data to prevent Spotfire DecisionSite from finding the wro
436. t a column from the right list and press the lt lt Remove button to move it back to the available columns list and remove it from the bar chart Removes all columns from the right list and moves them to the available columns list Select a column from the right list and press the Move First button to move it to the top This changes the order the bars are displayed Select a column from the right list and press the Move Up button to move it a step up This changes the order the bars are displayed Select a column from the right list and press the Move Down button to move it a step down This changes the order the bars are displayed Select a column from the right list and press the Move Last button to move it to the bottom This changes the order the bars are displayed Edit gt Properties gt Pies tab 139 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Properties Pie Chart x Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Pies 140 Color Size By C Fixed Pies C Average SS Customize I Show deselected Fixed size By records count fi rs Number of color bands Page Color band fi z C By sum Labels C None Allrecords max 20 labels Jitter N M T Fie size V Sector value sli Pie position JW Sector percentage J Pie records count Color 7 Option Color Labels Size Jitter Description A pie chart can cons
437. t dialog Typically description this would be a description of what the configuration does or a more thorough description of the parameters that the end user of the tool should provide Maximum length is 1000 characters Parameter name A string matching a parameter in the script If you have selected a parameter in the Script field and then clicked on the Add as input parameter button Bal the parameter name is already set to the selected text If no parameter was selected before you clicked Add a default parameter is added and you can edit the parameter name in the text box Note Make sure you type a correct parameter name The allowed parameter names differ for the various scripting languages Data type Select the data type of the parameter from the drop down list Not all data types described in this help file is available for all types of connectors Value A drop down list with the possibility to select either a constant or one of the prompt types available for the selected data type Bi Opens a dialog with the possibility to enter a constant when the constant value is selected and a prompt setting when a prompt value is selected Add Adds the text selected in the Script field as an input parameter Same functionality as the Add as Input Parameter button on the toolbar Remove Removes the selected input parameter Move Up Moves the selected input parameter up one step The position defines the order in the prompt dialog Move Dow
438. t it to be placed 3 Release the mouse button when you wish to insert the column Note You can move a column to the first or last position by right clicking in the column header and selecting Move First or Move Last from the menu that appears gt To resize the column width Place the mouse pointer to the right of the column header you want to resize just between it and the next column header The cursor changes into a cross with arrows By double clicking the column width will automatically expand so that all the items in the column can be displayed without being truncated If you want to rescale the column width by hand you can instead hold down the mouse button and move the mouse horizontally which will adjust the width Release the mouse button when you are satisfied Note You can also set the width of a column by right clicking in the column heading and selecting Column Width from the menu that appears Enter the width in number of characters and press OK In a table with many columns you often need to scroll horizontally However sometimes you may want certain columns to always be displayed regardless of scrolling This is achieved by freezing one or more columns gt To freeze columns when scrolling horizontally 1 Place the columns you want to freeze to the far left using drag and drop 2 Select Edit gt Properties and choose the Table tab 3 Select the number of Frozen columns from the drop down list box 4 Cl
439. t represents the properties or operations of other objects CSV Comma Separated Values This is a standardized way to save data sets Each data record is stored as text using the default list separator as column separator and a line feed and return character to mark the end of each record The default list separator is a property of the Regional Settings of your Windows system Data Column A property in a data set Each column in your data set is represented by a query device in Spotfire DecisionSite Data Conditioning Any kind of processing performed prior to visualizing or analyzing the data such as normalization pivoting de pivoting etc These features can be accessed upon data import through the Import Data option It is also possible to use either of the data conditioning tools from the Data menu after retrieving your data Data Source A database a file or the clipboard DecisionSite Navigator The precursor to the Guides pane A browser window integrated into the Spotfire DecisionSite environment able to communicate with the Spotfire DecisionSite visualization engine Delimiter This is a separator between data values for example between columns in a data table or between IDs in a search string Dendrogram A dendrogram is a branching diagram which represents a hierarchy of categories based on the degree of similarity or number of shared characteristics Deselected Records The records that do not fulfill the c
440. t values they represent None No labels are displayed Marked Only the bars that are marked will display labels Visible max All visible bars will have labels next to them provided 131 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 9 2 132 Width Layout X axis that the number of visible bars does not exceed the specified max number If so no labels are shown Click on Customize to open the Customize Labels dialog where you can change the color and line width of the label frames and lines as well as the size available to labels Select the Bar labels check box to display labels above the bars Select the Segment labels check box to display labels on bar segments You can also specify whether you want Horizontal or Vertical labels Drag the slider to modify the width of the bars If you select the Show outline on bars check box black outlines will be drawn around the bars When categorical coloring is applied you can choose between four different ways of displaying the bars Stacked bars will place all columns in a category on top of each other in effect summarizing them Side by side bars will place the bars beside each other for comparison The 100 options are used if you want to compare the proportions of different categories for e g different time periods With 100 stacked bars all bars will be of equal height 100 unless some negative values exist in the data 100 side by side bars
441. ta and Background tab of the Properties dialog click the Position button The dialog that appears allows you to specify how the background image is positioned by giving the coordinates for two opposing corners These coordinates refer to the current X and Y axes This means that the corners are pinned to values in the data range Zooming and panning will cause the image to stretch and scroll with the data Position Background Image x Position Y High 8 8 Y Low jo Option Description Y High Specifies the top position of the background image Y Low Specifies the bottom position of the background image X Low Specifies the left edge of the background image X High Specifies the right edge of the background image Default Reverts to the default coordinates Adding MapInfo Background Files MapInfo is a leading geographic information system software package MapInfo Interchange Format MIF is an ASCII format developed by Mapping Information Systems Corporation http www mapinfo com to facilitate the transfer of data from other geographical information system packages to MapInfo Spotfire DecisionSite can import MIF files to use as background maps This allows you to position visualization markers in two dimensions based on a single column such as zip code area code or area name Suppose for example that you have a data file with information about various countries such as name population language
442. ta source and click Next gt Select Tall Skinny gt Short Wide from the drop down list Click Configure In the Identity list select one or more columns Comment Each unique value in the chosen column produces a row in the generated table You can choose more than one column Doing so means that the new table will have a separate row for each unique combination of values in the chosen columns In the Category list select one or more columns Comment Each unique value in the chosen column produces a new column in the generated table Selecting more than one column means that the new table will have a separate column for each unique combination of values in the chosen columns In the Values list select one or more columns Comment The column selected under Values is the column from which the data is pulled It is possible to select more than one Value column The values in the generated table are always computed as the average of values in the original table unless the original values are strings If so values in the generated table will consist of concatenated strings To change the way the values are calculated right click on the Method and select a different method from the list or use Ctrl click to select multiple methods In the Other Columns list select one or more columns Comment This option allows you to include an overall average of a particular measurement for each row in the generated table For each column selected
443. te unique mappings between the two data sets Note If the data types of your ID columns mismatch click lt Back and use the Advanced data import option to specify your data types manually or add a type definition row to your data set prior to using the Add Columns tool Working with the Data E Add Columns Select Matching Columns Step 2 3 Select how the new data will be merged with the current data I Show ToolTips Columns in new data set Columns in current data set Last name String Last name String A Add Match Remove Matching columns Last name Last name Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Option Description Show ToolTips If selected a ToolTip displaying the name and type of the column together with the content of the first five unique records is shown upon hovering over a column name with the mouse pointer Columns in new data set Salary Displaying ToolTips might take some time if you are connected to a remote or slow data source In that case you might want to clear the check box and avoid displaying ToolTips Columns in new data Displays the columns in the new data set that are available for use set in a matching columns pair A column can only be used in a single column pair matching at a time and will therefore be grayed out in this list box after it has been included in the Matching columns list box Columns in current Displays the columns
444. tegorical Coloring means that each unique value in the heat map is represented by its own color This is most useful when dealing with a smaller number of varying values or when looking for identical values in a heat map You can change which color to represent a certain value by selecting a value from the list and then choosing a new color for it from the palette Continuous Coloring Continuous Coloring means that the color range is linear from one specific color to another color via a third middle color By default this is set to show low values in shades of green intermediate values going towards black and high values in shades of red Select new colors to represent the Min Mid or Max values by clicking on their corresponding color button and picking a new color from the palette that appears 153 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 154 Continuous Coloring is divided into three sub options Shared custom range With this option you can specify an exact Min Mid and Max value for the color range instead of having these values being automatically determined All selected columns will be colored according to these values regardless of their own individual Min and Max values Shared auto range With this option there is a separate shared auto range per data type category Date DateTime Time Integer Decimal String columns are not grouped at all and each column will get an individual range spanning from t
445. tegory Stacked bars Represents the sum of the values in that category Side by side bars Represents the sum of the values in that category 100 stacked Represents how many percent of the total sum for the group that is bars constituted of the sum of the values in the category The exact percentage of each category can be seen in the details on demand window when clicking on a bar category 100 side by side Represents how many percent of the total sum for the group that is bars constituted of the sum of the values in the category The exact percentage of each category can be seen in the details on demand window when clicking on a bar category Example If you want to compare the proportions of different categories for e g different time periods you can use either of the 100 layout options in the Properties dialog With 100 stacked bars all bars will be of equal height 100 unless some negative values exist in the data 135 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 136 v Sum of Revenue al Bar Chart 5500 4000 4500 The height of a bar represents the of the sum of Revenue Color by City HB Boston E Dallas O Seattle Total value The labels show the height of 1999 2000 2001 each bar In the example above one can see that the Seattle revenue yellow has affected the total revenue more during 2002 than in previous years whereas the Dallas revenue blue has dec
446. temperature measurements City Month Temp London February 4 New York February 6 London May 16 New York May 19 London August 28 New York August 26 London November 13 New York November 11 As we add more observations the table grows taller but remains three columns wide While useful during data collection this format may not be appropriate for certain types of calculations or visualizations For example the entities that interest us are the different cities so we may want a representation with a single record for each city Tall Skinny gt Short Wide conversion lets us pivot this table producing the following note that avg Temp is the average of a single cell City avg Temp avg Temp for avg Temp avg Temp for for August February for May November London 28 4 16 13 New 26 6 19 11 York Each city is now represented by a single record which makes this format very suitable for Spotfire DecisionSite profile charts This example demonstrates three steps e Creating a row for each unique value in City e Creating a column for each unique value in Month e Entering a value from Temp for each cell in the resulting grid In the Tall Skinny gt Short Wide dialog the following settings would be made Identity City Category Month Values Temp Pivoting and Aggregation Note To understand this example it is recommended to read Pivoting first Apart from changing format from tall skinny to short wide pivoting can be use
447. ter immediately preceding it Therefore a means one or more a s st means one or more white spaces etc Since means any character then means one or more of any character and n means the letter n followed by one or more letters 185 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 5 4 4 186 Therefore n s g means an n at the beginning of the line followed by one or more characters followed by one or more spaces tabs etc followed by a g followed by one or more characters For a more thorough tutorial on regular expressions a good source is the O Reilly amp Associates nutshell guide to either Sed amp Awk or Perl These are UNIX programming languages which are based heavily on regular expression pattern matching and the O Reilly guide for each of these languages contains a chapter devoted to regular expressions Microsoft s MSDN web site offers a complete reference to the symbols that can be used with Spotfire DecisionSite full text query devices List of Regular Expression Symbols Symbol b Alphanumeric n f r t v Y l xyz Description Positions Only match the beginning of a string T matches the first T in To Be Or Not To Be Only match the ending of a string t matches the last t in A cat in the hat Matches any word boundary ly b matches ly in probably not Literals Matches alphabetical and nu
448. text will appear at the top of the report Check the options you wish to include in the report Select a graphic file format for the exported images Click Save As Response You will be prompted to select a file name and folder for the report The report is now saved as an HTML file in the directory you specified A subdirectory with the same name as the HTML file is created in which all the pictures are stored To send the report to someone you need to copy both the HTML file and its corresponding subdirectory If you selected to View report after saving option your report will be displayed in a browser 341 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 10 7 2 10 8 342 Export as Web Page Dialog x M Report header My report Include in web page V Legend J Annotations SQL Query Table of marke d record s Pictures Output format png I View report after saving Help Save As Cancel Option Report header Legend Annotations SQL Query Table of marked record s Output format View report after saving Save As Description This text will appear at the top of the report Select this box to include the legend in the report Select this box to include visualization annotations in the report Note that column annotations are not included Select this box to include the SQL query corresponding to the current query device sett
449. that do not contain the same identifiers this option might result in that no data is added In that case it is probably better to use the Manual option see below and match on columns that contain correct identifiers Select this option if you want to be able to select which columns to use in the matching of IDs explicit primary key matching Use this option if you want to make sure that the matching is correct Takes you on to the next step of the wizard If Automatic has been selected as the Column match method you will go straight to the Add Columns Select Source dialog If Manual has been selected you will be Guided to the Add Columns Select Matching Columns dialog Only available if the Automatic Column match method has been selected All columns in the new and old data set that have identical names not case sensitive will be used as identifier columns This means that all values in all of the identifier columns must match for the data to be added All columns with names that do not exist in the current data set will be added gt To reach the Add Columns Select Source dialog Select Data gt Add Columns Add Columns Select Matching Columns Dialog This dialog is used to specify which columns should be used as keys in the merging of the new columns with the columns in the original data set Normally one column pair containing IDs is enough but in some cases it may be necessary to use two or more column pairs to crea
450. that only the characters defined below can be used after a everything else will generate an error Escape sequence Result uHHHH Any Unicode character expressed as four hexadecimal characters 0000 A character in the range 0 255 expressed as three octal digits 0 7 b u0008 backspace BS t u0009 horizontal tab HT n u000a linefeed LF f u000c form feed FF r u000d carriage return CR W u0022 double quote Y u0027 single quote u005c backslash Examples Hello world O5 23 I n2 n C TEMP image png Column References Accessing columns are done by either simply writing the column name or enclosing the column name in square brackets The brackets are needed when the column name contains characters other than letters digits or _ underscore or if the column name begins with a digit If a column name is bracketed any end brackets and backslashes in the column name must be 7 4 4 3 7 4 4 3 1 7 4 4 3 2 7 4 4 3 3 Working with the Data escaped by or respectively The same backslash escaping rules as for strings are followed except that double quotes may not be escaped Examples Column Column 1 Binned Column1 1 amp ONN Time Date TimeStamp e Time A time of day type range 0 00 to 24 00 e Date Date type ranging from January Ist 100 to December 31st 9999 e TimeStamp A combination of Time and Date Mathematical operations on date time
451. the current database file including a trailing backslash DBPATH The full path including the file name of the currently loaded database 199 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 6 6 6 7 200 DBFILE The name of the currently loaded database including the file extension skv csv etc DBNAME The name of the currently loaded database excluding the file extension Additional variables for displaying descriptive statistics about the data set are described below Descriptive Statistics for HTML Templates The following variables may be added into the HTML template to display information about the records Measurement Variable Explanation VISIBLE VISIBLE of visible points MARKED MARKED of marked points SELECTED SELECTED of selected points ALL ALL total Editing HTML An Example There is a plethora of literature on HTML programming This example is merely a short demonstration of changing the colors and typeface of the displayed details gt To alter the appearance of the Details on Demand presentation l 2 3 Load a data set In this example we will use the periodic csv data set Select Edit gt Properties then click on the Data and Background tab From the Template drop down list in the middle of the tab select Marked Records Header and click on the Edit button Add the following lines of code inside the header of the HTML page to present text in
452. the events Closing the data set will clear the action list Select one or more actions from this list and click lt Add Link to include the action or combined action in the Guide If you want to add an action that is currently not available in the action list first perform the action in DecisionSite and it will immediately show up in the list 5 lt Add Link Select one or more actions from the Actions in DecisionSite list and click this button to include the action or combined action in the Guide The link will by default include the settings used in DecisionSite at the very moment you add the link 295 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 5 3 2 9 5 3 3 296 6 How to add links This link opens this help file to a page with tips on how to add links to a Guide gt To reach the Analysis Builder Select Guides gt Create and Edit Guide Analysis Builder Toolbar The Analysis Builder toolbar includes shortcuts for some of the most common commands in the menus Click on the buttons on the toolbar to activate the corresponding functions 5 o e gt iid une HI ih litt Creates a new empty Guide This resets the Guide contents window but not the Actions in DecisionSite list Opens a dialog where you can select a previously saved Guide file SFG that you can continue to work on or modify and save as a new Guide Saves the current Guide as an SFG file Launches the current Guide
453. the missing field Use Show deselected if all records in the data set should be included in the pies The deselected records are displayed as a separate sector The color of this sector can be altered with the color selector under Customize the color of the sector representing empty markers and the marking color can be changed in the same way Pie Charts Size Edit gt Properties gt Pies tab The maximum size of the pies in the pie chart can be varied with the Size slider Under the Size slider there are four options of radio buttons with the following functions e Fixed size pies are sized all the same e By records count pies are sized according to the number of records in each pie e By average pies are sized according to the average value of the records in the pie e By sum pies are sized according to the sum of the records in the pie Properties Pie Chart x ee Annotations Data and Background Columns Pies green 43 m Color ie male By eecor W te he brown 44 C Fixed Pies Average gt _ Customize J Show deselected Fixed size By records count Number of color bands 1 C By average Color band fi 7 By sum Labels weight kg M C None All records max 20 labels Jitter green 30 N 7 blue 42 J Pie size M Sector value ma a female J Pie position IV Sector percentage 4 J Pie records count Color C Ir brown 28
454. the selected data type Type Sales as the Value column name and select the data type Integer 5 Click OK Working with the Data 7 6 3 User Interface 7 6 3 1 Depivot Short Wide gt Tall Skinny Dialog e Depivot Short Wide gt Tall Skinny x Available columns Enter text here Sales 2005 Sales 2004 Sales 2003 Region Name Columns to transform Sales 2005 Sales 2004 Sales 2003 Keep NULL values Columns to pass through Region Name Remove All Resulting new columns Category column name contains old column names Year Value column name Sales Type String x Type finteaer 4 z Help OK Cancel Option Available columns Enter text here vi Add gt gt lt lt Remove Remove All Columns to Description The columns available for use in the depivot operation Click a column name in the list to select it To select more than one column press Ctrl and click the column names in the list Use one of the Add gt gt buttons to send the selected column to either the Columns to transform or Columns to pass through field see below If you have a data set with many columns you can right click on the header of the columns in the Available columns list box and select Show Search Field from the pop up menu This will display a search field where you can type a search string and limit the number of items in the list It is possible
455. three separate columns one two three one two three one column Hello I said Hello I said Integer Format EEEIEE JF 70 Type strings int integer long mapstring sfInt Remarks An integer can include a grouping symbol for thousands millions etc Permitted symbols are comma and white space However every value in the entire column must be a valid integer or else the entire column will be interpreted as Decimal or even Invalid Optionally the character can be appended at the end The character will be removed during import thus 68 will be interpreted as 68 not 0 68 Examples Accepted Interpreted as 6843 6843 6 843 6843 6 843 6843 see Remarks above 68 432 701 68432701 68 68 Not Accepted Interpreted as 68 43 68 43 Decimal 68 432 70 Invalid Decimal Real Double An 8 byte floating point number Format eee EL A LA EA Type strings decimal real float reall real2 real3 real4 real5 dbl num dreal double dfloat sfReal sfDecimal 37 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 3 6 8 38 Remarks Written as an integer optionally followed by a decimal part The decimal separator can be a comma or period but must be different from the thousands separator Optionally the character can be appended at the end The character will be removed during import thus 0 68 will be interpreted as 0 68 In Spotfire DecisionSite 6 1 and later versions al
456. ting Edit gt Properties and click on the Columns tab Select one or more columns you wish to set date formatting for 3 Click on the Format button Visualizations 4 Select Date which opens the Date Format dialog Date Format Type Date according to regional settings Date according to regional settings long format ISO formatted date MM DD Date with two digit pear Y Y MM DD Compact date YMMDD Compact date with full year WY MMDD Year YY Year short YY Year week day of week ISO MAW ww d Year week ISO WWW Year day of year WYYY ddd Day of week Monday first day name x m APP TTT P ee TTN Se eee TE A Sample 07 09 7 Help Cancel 5 Click on a format type Response An example of what the selected date format would look like is shown in the Sample field 6 When you are satisfied with the selected format click OK Selecting Format gt None from the Format drop down menu resets the format to the default setting Tip If you want to change the date formatting for a single column you can also reach the Date Format dialog from the pop up menu of the Query Devices panel Right click on the column of interest and select Set Property gt Format gt Date from the pop up menu 4 8 3 7 Time Format You can specify how you want DecisionSite to display time formatting for time and time stamp columns You can set the time to be shown either according to regional settings with or
457. tion about a configuration when it is run The level of details is set under the menu option Execute gt Log Level If desired the resulting log can be copied using the right click menu and saved for future reference 8 2 3 8 Prompt Dialogs 8 2 3 8 1 Prompt Settings Boolean Dialog Use this type of prompt for user input of the type yes no The resulting prompt will be a check box which can be empty or selected Prompt Settings Boolean x Label Always overwrite columns with the same names Default value O true false Help OK Cancel According to Spotfire UI Guidelines the label for a check box should use sentence style capitalization and end without a full stop Resulting prompt for the example above JV Always overwrite columns with the same names 8 2 3 8 2 Prompt Settings Column Name Dialog Use this type of prompt when you want user input in the form of a column name string 269 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 8 2 3 8 3 270 Prompt Settings Column Name x Label Column name Data types Date and Time Optional settings Regexp matching Help OK Cancel Option Description Label The text that will be displayed above the column name selection in the prompt dialog when the configuration is executed Try to make the label as clear as possible to ensure that the end users understand what the input parameter should be According to Spotfire
458. to Library Guide Published step decide if you want to email your colleagues about your new Library Guide Click Close when done Deploying Guides to a Server There are two ways of distributing a Guide to your colleagues Simplest way is to publish your Guide to the Library via the Guide gt Publish to Library menu alternative See Publish to Library for more information The other alternative is to deploy your Guide to the server To deploy a Guide on the server you need access to Spotfire DecisionSite Developer and you also need administrators rights on the DecisionSite Analytics Server In Spotfire DecisionSite Developer you find the application DecisionSite Builder where you can incorporate your Guides into custom DecisionSite applications or extensions See Spotfire DecisionSite Developer for more information on deployment or contact your Spotfire DecisionSite Administrator User Interface Analysis Builder User Interface Overview This is the Analysis Builder user interface Guides Analysis Builder x Guide Edit Add Format Help Qa TEE a Guide contents Actions in Decisionsite Open data saved with guide Original data Signal for 501_Embryonic_ Scatter Plot Probe Set Name vs Probe Pie Chart Set Query Device Filters This is my First guide It will help you create different visualizations suitable for your specific company and analysis process lt Add Link Open data sav
459. ton 1j On the Output Parameters tab from the Data type drop down list select Dataset On the Result Handling tab click on Add From the Add menu select Add to current data set row by row 261 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 262 27 28 29 30 31 Response The Add to Current Data Set Row by Row dialog is displayed Add to Current Data Set Row by Row x Output parameter dataout Input parameter for matching of rows datain x Column name template original name represented by Calculated IV Overwrite existing columns Help OK Cancel Comment This is just one of many result handlers available See Result Handling tab for more information about the other options In the dialog make sure that dataout is selected as Output parameter and datain is selected as Input parameter for matching of rows If desired modify the Column name template to add a custom prefix and or suffix to the calculated columns Test the script by selecting Execute gt Run Response The prompt dialog is displayed with the title you provided in step 3 Add Integer to Columns x This is an example R script calculation which adds the integer provided below to all specified columns in the data set Integer to add to the selected columns 5 Select a number of columns max 7 Available columns Selected columns Add gt gt Enter text here Column6 lt lt Remove
460. ton represents each data item Radio buttons also referred to as option buttons represent a single choice within a limited set of mutually exclusive choices That is in any group of option buttons only one option in the group can be set at a time However an All option is always present among the radio buttons which lets you select all records Items that are selected in the global context are marked with black labels while globally deselected items have red labels The radio buttons query device like the check boxes presents a list of all values stored in a column but allows only one value to be selected at any given time When a new value is selected the old one is deselected Malaise All C no C pes Changing the Type of Query Devices Spotfire DecisionSite makes an initial suggestion of what query device to use for each column in the data set The type of query device to use for the column can then be changed with one restriction check boxes and radio buttons can only be used for columns having less than 500 unique values Query Devices ipecsuctccssusscessvscsssssecesessecssorsesuvescsscseneteussussvesbesscecvssessessueteveccssvsccsscssooey A Check Boxes bt Radio Buttons Rsssssssssssssssssssesce e Range Slider al 2 ETEEN PL Full Text Sear fone leeseseseee Percent_l 0 028266 ll Data Range gt v Show Empty Values v Show Full Name Sort Move New Column Set
461. tor Argl Arg2 Arg3 Example Count gt 3 many few true null null gt NULL true 1 null gt 1 false null 2 gt 2 null 1 2 gt NULL Operator Precedence Below is a table showing the hierarchy of SXL operators with the highest precedence operator shown first Expressions inside parentheses are evaluated first nested parentheses are evaluated from the innermost parentheses to the outer Operators in the same row in the chart have equal precedence Operators Type Order of Evaluation Parentheses left to right Not right to left t Unary minus and plus right to left ANG Multiplicative left to right she Additive left to right amp Concatenation left to right lt gt lt gt Relational left to right Equality left to right Functions Math Functions Function Description Abs Arg1 Returns the absolute value of Arg The argument and the result are of type real ACos Arg1 Returns the arccosine of Arg as an angle expressed in radians in the interval 0 n Arg must be in the interval 1 0 1 0 otherwise NaN is returned The 227 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 228 ASin Arg1 ATan Arg1 Ceiling Arg1 Cos Arg1 Exp Arg1 Floor Arg1 Ln Arg1 Log Argl Arg2 Log10 Arg1 Mod Arg1 Arg2 PIO Power Arg1l Arg2 argument and the result are of type real Returns the arcsine of Arg as an angle expressed in radians in the interv
462. tten as a sequence of digits possibly prefixed by a or sign If used where a decimal value was expected they are automatically converted to a decimal value Note Hexadecimal formatted values have a size limitation of 8 characters Examples 0 101 32768 55 Oxff 255 Ox7 ffffff 2147483647 0x80000000 2147483648 Real Real values are written as standard floating point numbers with a period for a decimal point and no thousands separator The real values that can be specified range from 1 797693 1348623 1e 308 to 1 797693 1348623 1e 308 The exponent of real value constants may range from 307 to 308 Math operations on real values that produce results that can t be represented by the real data type generate numeric errors In the resulting data set these special cases will be filtered out and replaced by null Examples 223 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 224 0 0 0 1 10000 0 1 23e 22 1 23e 22 1E6 Boolean True or false Booleans are used to represent true and false values returned by comparison operators and logical functions Examples true false 1 lt 5 String Literals String literals are surrounded by double quotes or single quotes A string literal can contain any sequence of UNICODE characters A double quote can t be used within the string unless it is escaped Backslash is used to escape special characters so it must also be escaped The basic escaping rules are
463. tting 288 215 219 218 83 288 310 176 113 174 112 115 285 173 173 23 21 169 170 201 345 18 19 20 21 43 10 15 21 73 316 31 33 73 72 239 248 351 73 181 164 Data set definition dialog in Computation Services Information about Data sources OLE DB selecting Data types general information mismatch upon adding columns Database connecting using OLE DB export database queries importing from Date Datetime Decimal digits Decimal type and separators DecisionSite Administrator DecisionSite Navigator Library what is it DecisionSite Data Set dialog Default file location Default settings Deleting marked records web link Delimiter in web links specifying upon import Depivot Data dialog example launching overview Deploying Guides Deselecting records Details on Demand adjusting columns auto switch export HTML locking plain text properties sorting values template what is it Digits Dimensions 3D perspective 3D Tab Distance calculator Divide by standard deviation binning 281 170 201 39 19 33 223 205 208 283 284 15 283 281 176 173 169 254 253 20 247 Divide by substring Double Drawing order Drop empty panels Duplicate visualization E e 193 Edit menu Editing web links Empty panels Empty values adding columns with indicators Enter expression Entering limits for binning values for sliders Equal height bars Err
464. type of the column from a Date Time or DateTime into an Integer or String 42 Loading Data Format Perceived type Year YYYY Integer Year short YY Integer Day of week Monday first day name String Day of week Sunday first day name String Day of month dd Integer Day of year ddd Integer Week of year ww Integer Month of year mm Integer Month of year short name String Month of year full name String 24 hour time hour only HH Integer Resetting the formatting to the original brings back the original data type as well as any temporarily trimmed values 3 4 Information Links 3 4 1 Introduction to Information Library Information Library is a tool for accessing data from databases This is done by opening information links An information link is a preconfigured database query specifying the columns to be loaded and any filters needed to reduce the size of the data set prior to visualization in Spotfire DecisionSite Information Library is built on top of the Information Model IM This model resides on your server and is a representation of one or more databases which may be geographically dispersed It allows you to execute advanced database queries without any knowledge of the underlying database structures The model appears as a folder structure see Information Library Dialog Information Library is part of a suite of tools called Information Services IS The other tools are Information Builder and Informat
465. uartile x max f El median min Description selectedFirstQuartile EAEE Example 3 5 2 5 selectedMedian selectedMin selectedT hirdQuartile x Insert Variable Insert Function Expression Target type Sting Result H9 N5 07 Recent expressions markedSum x Insert Help OK Cancel W Variables Lists the available variables which can be used to create your expression Insert a variable into your expression with the Insert Variable button Category Select a category of functions to limit the choices in the Functions list e All e Operators e Math Functions e Statistical Functions e Text Functions e Logical Functions e Date amp Time Functions e Conversion Functions Function Select a function by clicking on it and click the Insert Function button to insert it to the Expression field You can also double click on a function to insert it 158 Visualizations If you place the cursor at a specific location in the Expression field the function will be inserted there Description This field provides a brief description of the selected function For more detailed descriptions please see Spotfire Expression Language SXL Expression This is the text field in which you build your expression You can insert variables and functions to it from the lists or enter text as in any standard text editor Cut Copy Paste works in the field using standard Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Highlighting a
466. ulates the least squares fit through points by using the following equation y atbx cex where a b and c are constants This model requires that you use at least three records to calculate the curve 3rd order Polynomial The third order polynomial fit calculates the least squares fit through points by using the following equation y atbx ex dx where a b c and d are constants This model requires that you use at least four records to calculate the curve 4th order Polynomial The fourth order polynomial fit calculates the least squares fit through points by using the following equation y atbx ex dx ex where a b c d and e are constants This model requires that you use at least five records to calculate the curve 5th order Polynomial The fifth order polynomial fit calculates the least squares fit through points by using the following equation 4 8 2 5 6 4 Visualizations y atbx ex dx ex fx where a b c d e and f are constants This model requires that you use at least six records to calculate the curve If you have a low number of unique x values a polynomial curve can be calculated in an unlimited number of ways This means that you may end up with a curve that does not look like expected If this should happen you probably should not apply this model to your data The polynomial models have all been partially solved by using the LAPACK software package see References Curve Fit The
467. uld be Exports m Population 5 Verify that the result seems reasonable by looking at the Sample result field This field will display the result of applying the expression to the first row of the data set 219 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 4 3 7 4 3 1 220 If this field shows an error message there is a problem with the expression Moving the mouse pointer over the field or clicking on it will display an explanation of what is wrong 6 When you are satisfied press the Next gt button The second step of the wizard is displayed 7 Fill in the new Column name if the default name is not acceptable 8 Change the Column type if you want to 9 Watch the preview and verify that the result is what you want If not click on the lt Back button to go back and modify the expression until the desired result is achieved 10 Click on the Finish button 11 The expression is now evaluated for each row in the data set and a new column is created A new query device will appear with the name of the new column you created If the new column data still is not what you intended delete the column from the Properties dialog and invoke the New Column from Expression tool again User Interface Description Enter Expression Dialog The dialog can be resized to provide more space for editing and for the lists New Column from Expression Enter Expression Step 1 2 xi Columns Functions Column Cat
468. ult handler when you want the result of the calculation to be launched as a file in another program Note If the resulting file is to be processed via one of the predefined Open Edit or Print options in the Launch File Dialog the output parameter name used must end with the desired file extension example outfile txt The extension used should also be defined on the end user s computer see Tip below Launch File x Output parameter outfile txt v Execute method f Open C Edit C Print C Command line Option Description Output Select the output parameter that you want to launch as a file in another parameter program from the drop down list Only output parameters defined as the File data type are available in the list Execute method Use this method to open the resulting file in its standard application Open Example An XLS file will be normally opened by Microsoft Excel Note To use this option the selected output parameter name must include a file extension connected to a known program Execute method Use this method to open the resulting file for editing in its standard Edit application Example An XLS file will be normally opened by Microsoft Excel Note To use this option the selected output parameter name must include a file extension connected to a known program Execute method Use this method to print the resulting file from its standard application Print Note To use this option the selected
469. ult is null If all arguments are true the result is true The arguments and the result are of type boolean Example And true false true gt false And false null gt false And true null gt NULL Returns Arg2 if Arg true and Arg3 if Arg false Argl is of type boolean usually the result of a comparison Arg2 and Arg3 can be of any type but must both be of the same type or null If Arg is null the result is also null See operator Example If Count gt 3 many few If true null null gt NULL If true 1 null gt 1 If false null 2 gt 2 If null 1 2 gt NULL Returns true if Expr evaluates to an error and false if Exprl evaluates to a proper value or null Errors are e g numeric errors NaN Infinity conversion errors and indexing errors Expr1 can be of any type and the result is of type boolean Example IsError 0 0 gt true IsError null gt false IsError Left A 1 gt true IsError Real Hello gt true conversion Returns true if Arg is null false otherwise Arg can be of any type and the result is of type boolean Example 7 4 4 4 4 Not Arg1 Or Arg Xor Arg1 Arg2 Text Functions Function Concatenate Arg Find Arg1 Arg2 Left Arg1 Arg2 Working with the Data IsNull 0 gt false IsNull null gt true IsNull 0 0 gt NUM Returns the logical Not of Arg The argument and the result
470. umn 1 2 Click on a column heading Atomic Mass Os 76 190 Pd 46 106 Pt 78 195 Re 75 186 Rh 45 102 The column is now sorted in increasing order Click on the column heading again to toggle between increasing and decreasing order Note the small arrow beside the column title showing the sorted order ement 4 Atomic Num Atomic Mass Os 76 190 Pd 46 106 Pt 73 195 Re 75 186 Rh 45 102 To revert to the original order right click in the Details on Demand window and select Reset gt Row Order from the pop up menu v Auto Switch Selected Record s Marked Record s Active Record s Golumn Order N Rearranging column order The horizontal order of the Details on Demand columns can be rearranged 196 Details on Demand and Legend gt To rearrange column order 1 Place the mouse pointer on a column heading 2 Drag and drop the column heading to the left or right to the desired place among the other column headings 3 To revert to the original order right click in the Details on Demand window and select Reset gt Column Order from the pop up menu v Auto Switch Selected Record s Marked Record s Active Record s Row Order 6 3 Locking the Details on Demand Window The Details on Demand information can be locked to always show a certain category of records Selected Marked or Active This lock function is controlled by the Auto Switch option See Marking Activat
471. umns in Details on D emand Move First Move Down Description These columns are not included in the bar chart Note You can right click on the Name header to get a pop up menu where you can select other attributes you would like to be visible These columns are displayed as information in the Details on Demand window Note The Details on Demand table cannot display more than a few hundred columns depending on the width the columns This means that in a very wide data set you might not be able to view all columns in the Details on Demand simultaneously Select a column from the left list and press the Add gt gt button to move it to the right list and include it in the details on demand Select a column from the right list and press the lt lt Remove button to move it back to the available columns list and remove it from the details on demand Removes all columns from the right list and moves them to the available columns list Select a column from the right list and press the Move First button to move it to the top This changes the order the columns are displayed in the details on demand Select a column from the right list and press the Move Up button to move it a step up This changes the order the columns are displayed in the details on demand Visualizations Move Down Select a column from the right list and press the Move Down button to move it a step down This chang
472. umns in the data set Comment The description is not necessary in all configurations but it can be useful to further explain what the configuration does or to add more guidance to the end users during execution In the Script field type dataout lt x datain Script dataout lt x datain Comment This is the actual script which will be computed on the R server In this example we want a user specified integer x to be added to the values of the input columns in the datain parameter and finally the resulting columns in the dataout parameter to be returned to the current data set as new columns Select the input parameter x in the script Script dataout lt a datain Click on the Add as Input Parameter button Bal Response The parameter x is added to the Input Parameters tab On the Input Parameters tab from the Data type drop down list select Integer From the Value drop down list select Prompt Integer Response The Prompt Settings Integer dialog is displayed Prompt Settings Integer x Label Integer to add to the selected columns Default value 5 Min value Max value 115 0 Help OK Cancel In the dialog specify the Label that you want the end user of the configuration to see upon execution In this example we use the text Integer to add to the selected columns Comment Try to make the label as clear as possible to ensure that the end users of the script understand what the
473. ur of Spotfire DecisionSite and of how to use its features It is the perfect way to get the basic knowledge of how to get started with the application TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual Open a sample file This option presents a number of example data sets and describes the content of each data set You can easily open any of these data sets in DecisionSite and explore the visualizations on your own Open data This option provides a quick way for you to access your own data It gives you the choice to open a file paste data from your clipboard or open data from an information link to a database Switch to another DecisionSite Different DecisionSites have a different set of Tools and Guides If you are missing a certain Tool or Guide that you believe should be available you may need to switch to another DecisionSite This option explains how to do this Click on Close this window to close the welcome screen and start using DecisionSite If you also select the Don t show this window at startup check box the welcome screen will not appear when you start the application in the future However if you wish to display it again it is always available from the View menu by selecting Getting Started 2 3 3 Loading Data The Periodic table data set As an example of simple yet interesting information the periodic table of the elements will be used The data set holds 75 records with 9 fields each The columns are the
474. urrency symbol to be displayed together with the actual value Note If you prefer you can set default number formatting for all Integer type columns and all Decimal type columns instead of specifying this for each column individually Such default settings will be applied every time you open a new data set in DecisionSite Client Default settings are made in the Fonts amp Numbers tab of the Options dialog gt To set Number Formatting for a column 1 Open the Properties dialog by selecting Edit gt Properties and click on the Columns tab Select one or more columns you wish to set number formatting for 3 Click on the Format button 98 Visualizations 4 Select Number which opens the Number Format dialog x Number of decimal digits 2 Negative numbers 123 v I Scientific notation Use thousands separator m Currency symbol Left Right Example 1234567 12 Help Cancel 5 Specify the Number of decimal digits and how to display Negative numbers Specify whether or not you wish to display the numbers in Scientific notation For example 1 23E 006 Note When using Scientific notation the Use thousands separator check box is cleared and grayed out as it is no longer applicable 7 Decide whether or not to Use thousands separator Note The symbol used for thousands separator and decimal separator is determined by the Windows Locale setting 8 Ifdesired
475. urrent selection or zooming become unavailable and will be grayed out Note For more information on how strings are sorted in a query device please see String If you are working with large data sets consisting of perhaps several hundreds of thousands of records uit can be quite tricky to get the slider to stop at the desired value The solution to this problem is to use the fine resolution handle together with the keyboard To pin point a certain entry with the item slider Click the upper handle of the slider and drag the box to the approximate position of the entry by keeping an eye on the currently selected value above the slider Fine tune with the fine resolution handle When the input focus is set on the slider marked by a dotted line you can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to adjust the slider to the exact position of the entry Up and right arrows move to the next value down and left to the previous one When the item slider drag box is moved to its leftmost position all values for the slider are selected This is indicated by the label AlI above the slider 183 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 184 Full text Search Full text Search The full text search query device allows you to search for sub strings within columns It also allows you to search for a pattern by using Regular Expressions For example you can enter a pattern that means a letter followed by two digit
476. urrent version of the plot will be available Hence if you want the end user of the Guide to be able to select by which column to color by you must make sure that you have selected some column in the Properties dialog of the visualization in DecisionSite Also note that prompting is not supported for multiple color bands in pie charts x Prompt for Scatter Plot Signal for 516_1year_1 txt vs DetecHhionp Prompt user for Title for input field in prompt dialog M X axis x axis M Y axis Y axis M Color by Color by T Shape by Shape by T Labels by Laes tti SU J Size by size by I Drawing order by Drawing order by T Rotate by ma I Line connection by Line connection by Tl Connect order by Bonnet order by Help OK Cancel Option Description Prompt user for Select the check box for each of the properties that you want the end user of the Guide to be able to specify upon running the Guide Note If you want the end user of the Guide to use exactly the same settings as your current visualization you should not allow any prompting at all Title for input field Enter a descriptive title to be shown in the Settings for dialog of the in prompt dialog selected visualization This is what the end user of the Guide will see above the drop down list for each selected property gt To reach the Prompt for dialog 1 Create visualizations and edit their properties in Decisio
477. use Displays a list of the available result handlers What result handlers are available depends on the data types of your current output parameters The current version of Computation Services allows you to present your results in the following manners View in Result Dialog Add to Current Data Set Automatic Key Matching Add to Current Data Set Row by Row Replace Current Data Set Open in Other DecisionSite Instance Launch File Removes the selected result handler Displays the settings for the selected result handler If you remove an output parameter that has been used to define a result handler the result handler will turn red in the list Either delete the incorrect result handler or open the Settings for the result handler and change it to work on another output parameter You can also add the missing parameter again to fix the problems Tools 8 2 3 7 Execution Log Tab Input Parameters Output Parameters Result Handling Execution Log rocessing output parameters Parameter dataout Calling output handlers Merging output with loaded data Column name template Calculated Removing columns to be overwritten Adding columns Connecting to data source Joining records from data source Handling extra columns Mapping source columns to view Building join conditions Fetching records Sorting Execution completed successfully Pa The Execution Log shows detailed informa
478. use button Rotation around the visualization center Shift drag using the right mouse button or Shift drag using the middle mouse button Zooms in the direction of the view Ctrl Shift drag using the right mouse button or Ctrl Shift drag using the middle mouse button Rotation in the plane of the screen downwards and right cursor motion rotates clockwise Mouse wheel or Ctrl drag using the middle mouse button Zooms in and out in the visualization Right click in visualization Brings up the visualization context pop up menu 11 5 3 Mouse Shortcuts Bar Charts and Pie Charts Mouse over object An outline highlights the object and corresponding objects in similar visualizations Left click on object Activates an object A persistent outline surrounds the object Information about the bar or pie that was clicked displays in the Details on Demand window 367 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 11 5 4 368 Left drag Marks the pies or bars that are inside the rectangle delineated by the diagonal movement of the pointer If no bars are surrounded all objects will be unmarked Shift left drag Enables marking of bars or pies with the lasso tool Draw an arbitrary shape around the objects you want to mark If none are surrounded all objects will be unmarked Ctrl left drag Adds bars or pies to the set of marked objects using the rectangle rubber band box tool Ctrl Shift l
479. used to format information in other DecisionSite sessions The Default button will revert to the default settings and remove any changes made to the open template OK applies the editing changes to the Details on Demand window Cancel removes any changes you have made since opening the Edit window When a new data set is loaded into Spotfire DecisionSite the program creates default HTML templates that can be edited to suit your needs Tip The HTML templates made for another data set will also be applied to the presently loaded data set if you apply the previously created data set as a template File gt Apply Template In this case not only the HTML Details on Demand but also any visualization settings query device settings and general settings will be applied See Applying Templates for more information For a template file to work properly it should only be applied to data with a structure similar to the one used to create the template Variables In the HTML templates variables that refer to the value of a specific column or to other information can be used which will then be replaced with current values from any active or marked record HTML variable Refers to Name Value of a particular record in column Name Format Name Value of a particular record in column Name formatted according to the configured number formatting for the column and the Windows locale DBDIR The full path to the location of the directory of
480. usly created Guide start by running the Guide in DecisionSite This will furnish the list of actions with the data visualizations and tools used in the Guide Automatic Logging You do not have to turn on Analysis Builder in order for your actions to be logged It is done automatically when you load data in DecisionSite Client even if you have not started Analysis Builder However if you log out from the server no actions will be logged while you are disconnected Clearing the List of Actions The list of actions will be emptied if you close your data via File gt Close in DecisionSite Note The Actions in DecisionSite list will be cleared if you open a new data set Since you can only have one data set open at a time in Spotfire DecisionSite the previous data will be closed 290 Guides when you open the new data set If you log out from the server the Analysis Builder will be closed and the Actions in DecisionSite list will be cleared 9 5 2 5 Settings Captured in Links All actions that you have performed on your current data set are included in the Actions in DecisionSite list See How the Actions in DecisionSite list works for more information about the Actions in DecisionSite list Note The Analysis Builder will log all actions that you perform in DecisionSite even if it has not been started The Actions in DecisionSite list will be cleared if you open a new data set Information links If an information link is added via
481. ution Log The Execution Log tab contains a read only text field displaying the progress of execution of a configuration along with any errors gt To reach Computation Services Select Tools gt Computation Services gt R or SAS or S PLUS or whatever the type of your current computation server Computation Services Menus File menu Option New Open Save Save As Send to Analysis Builder Connector Settings Close All Sessions Exit Execute menu Option Run Log Level gt Description Empties Computation Services so that you can start a new configuration Any information you have currently open in the Script pane or in any of the tabs will be cleared Opens an earlier saved configuration This configuration contains the actual script along with any defined input and output parameters as well as the specified result handlers and prompt settings Saves the current configuration including the script all input and output parameters as well as the specified result handlers and prompt settings to an earlier specified file Saves the current configuration including the script all input and output parameters as well as the specified result handlers and prompt settings after you have provided a file name in the Save dialog Sends the current configuration to Analysis Builder as an available action so that the calculation can be incorporated in a Guide Displays the Connector Settings
482. uttons that are shortcuts to frequent commands on the menus Tools The tools provide the special functions of your DecisionSite such as clustering or structure analytics You reach the tools via the Data and Tools menus Trellis plot A way of splitting a visualization into panes and organizing these in a grid layout Visualization A graphical presentation of data in Spotfire DecisionSite e g scatter plot pie chart etc The query devices control which data is displayed Web link A link to an external web site that lets you send a query about marked records Zoom Bar The bars along the edges of the visualization window By manipulating them it is possible to zoom in on details of the visualization 375 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 13 Index 2 2D scatter plots color creating customize markers jitter labels line connection rotation scale shapes size zooming 3 3D scatter plots axes color creating dimensions jitter labels line connection navigation panning perspective rendering rotation scale shape size zooming 3D Tab A Accessing data from file from the clipboard from web links using advanced data import Actions in DecisionSite how the list works properties included with links user interface description Activating how to Add Columns details on adding data from file from the clipboard if ID case mismatches overview Select Columns dialog Select Matching C
483. v Boston 150 WIV Dallas OF Seattle 1999 2000 2001 2002 Revenue OBL rear 3000 V 1000 eCa ae i Bar Chart I snn 4 8 10 Bar Chart Columns Tab 4 8 10 1 Bar Chart Columns Tab Edit gt Properties gt Bar Chart Columns tab Properties Age Distribution Annotations Data and Background Columns Details Columns Trellis Bars Bar Chart Columns Available columns Columns in bar chart Type Total Integer Customer age Integer Groceries Integer Garden Integer Furniture Integer Electronics Integer Toys Integer Receipt aver Integer lt lt Remove Necsecencnseecsscescesescebecessecesoesnectscescsnsesesnceneceesel serencoccoseeg LE Remove All Moye First Moye Up d Move Down 138 Option Available columns Columns in bar chart Add gt gt lt lt Remove Remove All Move First Move Up Move Down Move Last 4 8 11 Pies Tab 4 8 11 1 Pies Tab Visualizations Description These columns are not included in the bar chart Note You can right click on the Name header to get a pop up menu where you can select other attributes you would like to be visible These columns are included in the bar chart The order of this list corresponds to the order the columns are shown in the Bar Chart visualization Select a column from the left list and press the Add gt gt button to move it to the right list and include it in the bar chart Selec
484. ve In the descriptions of data types the following abbreviations are used G e square brackets For any item this indicates optional items or groups of correlated items YY Year as two digits YY YY Year as two or four digits MM Month as one or two digits DD Day as one or two digits HH Hours as one or two digits Mm Minutes as one or two digits SS Seconds as one or two digits fff Fractions of a second as many digits as there are MonthString In English only This may also be the abbreviated version of the month e g Jan stands for January If you are uncertain about whether or not Spotfire DecisionSite supports a data type or how it must be formatted to be recognized during import use a text editor to write a short file with sample data using the types that you want to test Copy and paste the text directly into Spotfire DecisionSite and use Details on Demand to verify the results The following tab separated file can be used as a template for such a file int_col time_col date_col str_col int sfTime date string 1 11 01 32 PM 990807 hello 2 110132 6 08 07 99 hello 3 11 01 AM 99 08 07 Hello I said Time Format Description Fields Colon as field separator HH Mm SS fff AM PM Dot as field separator HH Mn SS fff AM PM No field separator HHMnSS fff AM PM Type strings time sfTime 33 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 3 3 6 3 34 Remarks The format requires
485. ve programming experience or access to a person with these types of skills An example of a Guide created with Analysis Builder is presented below Guides Contents gt My own guide title D Some text I have added to my guide Calculate standard deviation 2 Set up visualizations Google web link 1 Contents and Title This is the flight view which is automatically added at the top of every Guide page It includes the Contents link followed by the Guide title The Contents link closes the Guide and goes back to the main page of the Guides pane The title of your Guide can be configured via Guide gt Properties in Analysis Builder 2 Text and Links This is the main part of the Guide which you can design via Analysis Builder You can add text and links to the Guide 3 Back and Next These are navigation links which are automatically added at the end of every Guide page The first page of the Guide gets a Next link following pages get a Back and a Next and the last page of the Guide gets a Back and a Back to Contents link same function as the Contents link in the flight view 9 5 2 2 Suggested Workflow gt To create a new Guide using Analysis Builder 1 Open a data set in Spotfire DecisionSite and start to perform your analysis the way that you want it to be done in the Guide 2 Ifthe Analysis Builder tool is not already open click Guides gt Create and Edit Guide 288 Guides Create the Gu
486. vices Legend Guides Toolbar Guides Getting Started Hotkey F11 Ctrl L Visualization Menu Option New Scatter Plot New 3D Scatter Plot New Bar Chart New Pie Chart New Line Chart New Profile Chart Hotkey Ctrl 1 Ctrl 2 Ctrl 4 Ctrl 5 Ctrl 6 Ctrl 7 Description Show or hide the toolbar Show or hide the status bar Show visualizations with tabs Full screen mode on off Show or hide text Details on Demand Show or hide HTML Details on Demand Launches an external browser displaying the Details on Demand Show or hide the query devices Show or hide the Legend Show or hide the Guides toolbar Show or hide the Guides pane Show or hide the Getting Started welcome screen Description Creates a new scatter plot visualization A two dimensional visualization is created See Scatter Plots Creates a new scatter plot visualization A three dimensional visualization is created See Scatter Plots Creates a new bar chart visualization See Bar Charts Creates a new pie chart visualization See Pie Charts Creates a new bar chart visualization See Line Charts Creates a new bar chart visualization Profile New Heat Map New Table View Tip Duplicate Visualization Data Menu Option Add Columns New Column gt gt By Binning gt From Marked Records gt From Expression Column Normalization Row Summarization Pivot Data Depivot
487. vices for manipulating the visualization Tip An alternative way of loading the data is to open the file periodic sfs This may be preferable since sfs files contain Spotfire specific information on how the visualizations will be initially set up 10 Introduction 2 3 4 Changing Visualization Axes To change the column to be mapped to each axis click on an axis selector and select a column name For example to see the Mendeleevian layout of the peroidic csv example data set select P1 for the X axis and P2 for the Y axis R D ra Type to search P1 Integer P2 Integer Element String Atomic Number Integer Atomic Mass Integer Atomic Radius Integer lonic Radius Integer lonization Energy Integer Electronegativity Integer Ci Integer C2 Integer Note You can also select which column to use as an X Y or Z axis by right clicking on the Query Device representing that column and selecting Set Property gt Axis from the pop up menu 2 3 5 Setting Visualization Properties To make a visualization more informative activate the Properties dialog by selecting Edit gt Properties This dialog contains many settings which can be used to modify the visualization The keyboard shortcut is Alt Enter or Ctrl Enter gt To adjust the appearance of a visualization 1 Select the Markers tab 2 Move the Size slider towards Max to make the markers larger 3 Set the Color control to Continuous and the By control to Electro
488. vide the visualization with a description of your choice Copies the records corresponding to the markers bars and pies marked with the lasso or rectangle marking tool to the Windows clipboard in text format It also copies an image of the visualization to the clipboard which can be pasted into other applications by using a Paste Special option Creates a duplicate of the selected visualization Opens the Properties dialog n which parameters governing the appearance of the visualization can be set annotations made etc Description Zooms to the selected records Resets the zoom bars to the original state no zooming Opens the Properties dialog to the Trellis tab where you can split the visualization to display different subsets of your data 361 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 362 Marked Record s gt gt Delete Del gt Unmark Ctrl E gt Invert Ctrl I gt Select Ctrl M gt New Column gt Create New Portfolio List gt Add to Portfolio List Same Scale for All Annotate Copy Ctrl C Duplicate Visualization Properties Alt Enter Heat maps Option Hotkey Zoom gt gt Reset Zooming Trellis Deletes the set of marked records The marked records are removed from the data set in Spotfire DecisionSite s memory This operation cannot be undone but does not affect the original data unless that file is intentionally overwritten with the diminished data
489. visualization that you have selected Select the check box for the things that you want the user to specify Comment Each selected object will result in the appearance of a setting selection in a dialog which is presented to the end user of the Guide If desired change the Title for input field in prompt dialog to a different title Comment This is the title that the end user of the Guide will see above the selected setting Click OK Response In the Link Properties dialog the visualization action is updated with the information Settings modified Repeat steps 4 7 if you want to create a multiple action link with several prompt steps Click OK Response The link is added to the Guide contents list gt To prompt for input to tools 1 In the Actions in DecisionSite list click to select the tool that you want the new link to start Comment See How the Actions in DecisionSite list works for more information on how to populate the list Make sure that Edit gt Show Add Link Dialogs is selected with a check mark Click lt Add Link Response The Link Properties dialog is displayed Click on the tool action that you want to add prompting to in the Actions performed when clicking the link list Response The Prompts button is activated Click Prompts Response The Tool Option dialog is displayed Select the Display the tool dialog so the user can provide input radio button Comment For many of the tools
490. ware requirements Selecting data source line chart columns what is a query device Sending a query using Web Links Separators column date decimal integer Server Setting color data range property size slider span Setting up new web link Settings for dialog SFA files SFM files SFS files SFT files Shade Shapes 2D markers customizing Short Wide dialog examples pivoting Shortcuts keyboard mouse Show axes bounding box empty values windows Similarity search in run time filters upon data retrieval Size 2D markers 3D markers pie charts SKV files Sliders full text item range Smooth shading Software requirements 77 112 239 24 366 367 18 184 19 146 180 253 193 181 193 193 181 253 300 318 318 317 317 109 115 115 241 240 239 365 368 111 111 193 171 45 112 112 142 30 184 183 181 109 Sorting a Table Details on Demand query devices Specifications data types hardware requirements software requirements text files Specify Column dialog Splash screen S PLUS Computation Services overview connection to an S PLUS server example configuration Spotfire DecisionSite contact support welcome to what is it Spotfire files Spotfire interactive reports Spreadsheet SQL editing exporting Square Stacked bars in bar charts layout option in bar charts Standard Deviation Average and Standard Deviation dialog data and background when binning
491. without milliseconds or according to a number of other time formats By changing the time format for a time column you can change the number of unique values in your data set See Rearranging the Data by Formatting for more information gt To set Time Formatting for a column 1 Open the Properties dialog by selecting Edit gt Properties and click on the Columns tab Select one or more columns you wish to set time formatting for 3 Click on the Format button 101 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 4 4 8 4 1 102 4 Select Time which opens the Time Format dialog Type Time according to regional settings Tim ding to regional settings with milliseconds if available 24 hour time HH MM 24 hour time with seconds HH MM S5 24 hour time with milliseconds HH MM SS fff 24 hour time with milliseconds if available HH MM SS _ fff 24 hour time with two decimals HH MM SS ff 24 hour time with one decimal HH MM SS5 f Compact 24 hour time HH Mihi Compact 24 hour time with seconds HHMMSS Compact 24 hour time with milliseconds HHMMSS fff 24 hour time hour only HH x AN lemesan bime FELG el Sample OK Cancel 5 Click on a format type Response An example of what the selected time format would look like is shown in the Sample field 6 When you are satisfied with the selected format click OK Selecting Format gt None from the Format drop down menu resets th
492. xis Zero correlation A correlation of 0 means there is no linear relationship between the two variables as shown in this graph Correlation is rarely if ever 0 1 or 1 Visualizations With behavioral data there is almost never a perfect linear relationship between two variables The more the points tend to fall along a straight line the stronger the linear relationship View Tip calculates the absolute value for r and then determines the rank of the scatter plots accordingly 179 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 5 5 1 180 Query Devices What is a Query Device A query device works like a filter imposing constraints on the loaded data set For example a query device may exclude all records with values above a certain threshold Only records that comply with the query device settings are visible in visualizations When manipulating a query device you can instantly see how the current setting affects the visible data The visible data and any empty values for the active axis is also referred to as selected When a data set is loaded each column in the underlying data set becomes associated with one query device The type of device depends on the type of data in the column Spotfire DecisionSite has five types of query devices range sliders item sliders full text search check box query devices and radio button query devices Also the zoom bars work like range sliders Searching
493. xplanation of what is wrong Pressing F5 will also display the error description Pressing F4 will move the cursor to the position in the expression where the error lies There are three kinds of error messages EXPR there is a problem with the syntax of the expression NUM the row evaluates to infinity or other illegal number 221 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 7 4 3 2 222 ARG there is a problem with one or many arguments Specify Column Dialog The dialog can be resized to provide more space for editing and for the lists New Column from Expression Specify Column Step 2 2 Column name Calculated Column Column type Real Decimal M Expression Population Pop growthr ppm iz Preview Population Pop growthr ppm Calculated Column 3273131 19 3273150 3335044 18 3335062 3285224 11 3285235 3333839 12 3333851 7867541 7 7867548 7915145 5 7915150 10373881 5 10373886 10370269 3 10370272 9909285 1 9909286 9921910 1 9921911 10016623 30 10016653 lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Column name Enter the name for the new column in this field Column type This drop down box lets you select which Type the new column should have e String e nteger e Decimal e Date e Time e DateTime Expression This field displays the expression which will be used to evaluate th
494. y This title will be displayed as a link in the Guides pane It is important that the title is informative with regards to what the Guide actually does Note The title can be 50 characters at the most and the following characters are not supported s 2 lt gt amp 305 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 5 3 11 2 306 Next gt Proceeds to Publish to Library Wizard Step 2 2 where properties can be edited further gt Toreach the Publish to Library Wizard Step 1 2 dialog In Analysis Builder click Guide gt Publish to Library Publish to Library Wizard Step 2 2 This dialog lets you enter all properties of the Guide By using detailed properties the organization and search capabilities in the Library are greatly enhanced Publish to Library Step 2 2 x Guide title Footbal Description 4 football Guide Keywords premienleague SSS For multiple keywords use semicolon z as separator Tooltip Footbal Author Jdemo spotfie com 00 Company Spotine ne Help lt Back Finish Cancel Option Description Guide title The name of the Guide as it will be displayed in the Library This is the title you provided in the previous step Description A description of the functions of the Guide The description can make it easier for the server administrator to group similar Guides together and remove duplicates etc Note The description can be at most 650 c
495. y Month Day Temp London February 1 5 London February 15 8 London May 1 15 London May 15 22 New York February 1 9 New York February 15 7 New York May 1 18 New York May 15 24 Working with the Data Tall Skinny gt Short Wide conversion lets us pivot and aggregate this table producing the following City avg Temp for February avg Temp for May London 6 5 18 5 New York 8 21 A smaller table has been created summarizing the original table In the Tall Skinny gt Short Wide dialog the following settings would be made e Identity City e Category Month e Values Temp 7 5 3 User Interface 7 5 3 1 The Tall Skinny gt Short Wide Dialog This dialog allows you to configure how pivoting is performed Pivot Tall Skinny gt Short Wide Identify records by the column s Identity Type gt E x Integer Or Integer O Year Integer CO Cadmium Integer O Chome Integer x Create a new column for each value in Category Type ay ttt Ox Integer Y Integer O Year Integer CO Cadmium Integer O Chome Integer Use values in the following columnis Values Type Eror Integer Average i admium Integer Average O Chome Integer Average Integer Average Other Columns N Name Type Cadmium Integer Average i Chrome Integer Average InChrome Integer Average O Copper Integer Average Help Cancel 241 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 242 Opti
496. y from the list gt To show hide a statistical measure e Select the check box beside a statistical measure to show it in the scatter plot e Clear the check box beside a statistical measure to hide it in the scatter plot Average and Standard Deviation The statistical measure Average displays the X axis and Y axis standard deviation marking lines The standard deviation s is an indication of how dispersed the probability distribution is about its center It is computed as follows where n is the number of values in the group and X is the mean value of the group Note In this application the standard deviation is calculated for the data in the data set as opposed to calculation of standard deviation for the mean value only 79 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 4 8 2 5 3 80 User Interface Average and Standard Deviation EE xj r Calculate average of Base calculation on x values Selected records C Y values C All records Number of standard deviations 2 0 b m Trellis plot options Create separate statistics for each trellis panel Create statistics based on entire visualization Option Description Calculate average of Specifies whether the average of the X values or the Y values should be calculated Base calculation on Specifies whether the statistical measure should be calculated based on All records in the data set regardless of any filtering done wit
497. y that everything that is needed to run DecisionSite has been installed and has the correct version For example Internet Explorer version Operating System version correct DLLs etc Displays program information version number and copyright License information is also found here Query Device Pop Up Menu Right clicking in the query device window brings up a pop up menu to let you modify query devices generate new columns change the kind of query device used alter scale transformations etc Option Check Boxes Description If the column contains less than 500 unique values you can choose to have check boxes as query device Values deselected by other query device constraints have red labels Radio Buttons If the column contains less than 500 unique values you can choose to have radio buttons as query device Only one of the values may be selected at a time Range Slider Range sliders can be used to select numeric data 355 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 356 Item Slider full text search None All Data Range From Selected Reset Show Empty Values Show Full Name Sort Original by Annotation by Name by Type Move To the Top Up Down To the Bottom Hide New Column By Binning From Expression From Marked Records Set Property Color Size Axis Item sliders can be used to select alphanumeric data Full Text Search can search a string for a
498. your Guides gt To reach the Guide Properties dialog In Analysis Builder click Guide gt Properties 9 5 3 9 Tool Option Dialog i i There are two ways to launch the selected tool New Column from Expression Calculated Column What should happen when the user clicks the link Run the tool using the settings from this analysis C Display the tool dialog so the user can provide input Help OK Cancel Option Run the tool using the settings from this analysis Display the tool dialog so the user can provide input Description The tool will be run silently without any input from the end user of the Guide using the same settings that you used in your calculation The tool is started but the end user of the Guide must provide input and click OK in the tool dialog for any calculation to be performed gt To reach the Tool Option dialog 1 Runa tool in DecisionSite 2 Adda Run the tool link to the Guide 3 Inthe Link Properties dialog of the desired link click to select the tool that you want to add prompting for 4 Click Prompts Note In the current version of Analysis Builder not all tools have the possibility to be run silently 303 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 9 5 3 10 Open Guide from Library Dialog This dialog lets you select and open a Guide that is located in the Library To find a Guide either look through a Library Section s content or search
499. ype real If Arg2 is 0 the result is NaN Mod Arg Arg2 is defined as Argl Arg2 Floor Arg1 Arg2 Returns the numerical constant n The result is of type real Returns Arg raised to the Arg2 power The arguments and the result are of type real Example Power 10 3 gt 1000 Power 10 3 gt 0 001 Power 0 0 gt 1 Product Arg Round Arg1 Arg2 Sin Arg1 Sqrt Arg1 Sum Arg Tan Arg1 7 4 4 4 2 Statistical Functions Function Average Argl Max Argl Working with the Data Returns the product of the arguments The arguments and the result are of type real Null arguments are ignored and do not contribute to the product Example Product 1 gt 1 Product 1 5 2 3 gt 9 Product 1 null 3 gt 3 Product null gt NULL Rounds Arg to the number of decimal places specified by Arg2 The arguments and the result are of type real but for Arg2 only the integer part is used Note that Arg2 can be negative to round to even 10s 100s etc 0 5 is rounded upwards to a number with higher magnitude ignoring the sign Example Round PI Q 3 gt 3 142 Round 0 5 0 gt 1 Round 25 1 gt 30 Returns the sine of Arg where Arg is an angle expressed in radians The argument and the result are of type real Returns the square root of Arg The argument and the result are of type real If Arg is negative the result is a NaN error Returns
500. zation default The visualizations in the Poster can be displayed either as a layout scrollable list of large plots or tiled smaller plots next to each other Select which default layout you want A exclamation mark icon means that some aspect of that visualization is not supported in DecisionSite Posters Move the mouse cursor over the icon to display more information Query devices Select the Query Devices you want to enable data filtering with See Poster Query Devices for more information Details on Demand Select which type of Details on Demand that you want to present either Table or Web search See Poster Details on Demand for more information Next When your Poster is designed click Next gt to proceed publishing For information about which features can be included in a DecisionSite Poster see Poster Supported Features gt To reach the Publish Poster to Library Step 1 3 dialog Click File gt Publish Poster to Library Publish Poster to Library Wizard Step 2 3 In this step you specify where in the Library your DecisionSite Poster should be published Navigate in the Library by using double click on Library Sections and folders Publish Poster to Library Step 2 3 i xj Home gt Sales and Marketing gt Entertainment Q New Folder X Delete f Properties Q Members Type Title Description Modified By Modified 4 Poster title Movie Analysis Help lt Back Next gt Cancel Options Desc
501. zoom bars to the original state no zooming Opens the Properties dialog to the Trellis tab where you can split the visualization to display different subsets of your data Del Deletes the set of marked records The marked records are removed from the data set in Spotfire DecisionSite s memory This operation cannot be undone but does not affect the original data unless that file is intentionally overwritten with the diminished data Ctrl E Resets the set of marked records No records will be marked after you have executed this operation Ctrl I Inverts the set of marked records Marks all unmarked records and unmarks the set of marked records Ctrl M Sets the selection to the marked records Creates a temporary filter so that only the marked records are visible 357 TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite 9 1 1 User s Manual 358 gt New Column gt Create New Portfolio List gt Add to Portfolio List Annotate Copy Ctrl C Duplicate Visualization Reset Navigation Properties Alt Enter Bar charts Option Hotkey Zoom gt gt Zoom to Selection gt Reset Zooming Trellis Marked Record s gt gt Delete Del gt Unmark Ctrl E gt Invert Ctrl I gt Select Ctrl M Opens the New Column from Marked Records dialog where you can add a new column showing whether records are included in the marked group or not Creates a new list with the marked records to the Portfolio The list is placed

TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite® 9.1.1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite&reg; 9.1.1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

TIBCO Spotfire DecisionSite® 9.1.1